Comcast Standard

Comcast Outside Plant Coaxial Cable
Construction
ENTERPRISE STANDARD
Abstract:
This standard will provide Comcast prescribed coaxial outside plant construction
guidance. The goal of the document is to inform, guide and direct the construction of
durable and reliable coaxial plant that is economical to operate and maintain.
Audience: National, Divisional, Regional and System personnel involved in, or

requiring knowledge of coaxial plant construction practices and
requirements.
Document Owner: Frank Eichenlaub
Standards Writer: Alan Baumgartner
Contributor(s): Frank Eichenlaub, Pat Wike, William Polis, David Lorenzi, Thomas
Carroll, Scott Olson, Robert Sass, Scott Johnston, Roe Morris, Ken
Bridges, Todd Galiant, Jon Wiley, Jeremiah Johnson, Randy Parks,
Misael Hinlo, Comcast Engineering, CommScope Engineering
Team, Duraline Engineering, Times Fiber Communications Inc.
(Amphenol Broadband Systems)
Release Version: 1.3 Release Date: 04/06/2022
Review Cycle: 1 year Next Review Date: 04/10/2023
Portal Link: Standards Portal
Approvals: Thomas Bach, SVP, Engineering

Jennifer Smardo, VP, CONNECT Implementation
Frank Eichenlaub, Executive Director, Access Engineering
Copyright © 2022 Comcast Cable Communications LLC, All Rights Reserved

ENTERPRISE STANDARD
Comcast Outside Plant Coaxial Construction
Enterprise Standard
Comcast Proprietary and Confidential
Information in this document is subject to change without notice. This document may contain sensitive
confidential proprietary information and trade secret information concerning Comcast. All recipients have an
obligation not to disclose to any non-Comcast person or entity the information contained herein. Partial or full
disclosure, even inadvertent disclosure, of this information may cause irreparable damage to Comcast. No
part of this document may be reproduced in whole or in part, or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, for any purpose,
without the express written permission of Comcast. If you are not the intended recipient of this document, you
are hereby notified that any dissemination, distribution or copying of this document or its contents is strictly
prohibited.
Comcast may have patents, patent applications, trademarks, copyrights, or other intellectual property rights
covering subject matter in this document. The furnishing of this document does not grant any license to these
patents, trademarks, copyrights, or other intellectual property.
Copyright © 2022 Comcast Cable Communications LLC, All Rights Reserved Release Date: 2022-04-06
ENTERPRISE STANDARD Comcast Proprietary and Confidential
ii
Enterprise Standard
DOCUMENT CHANGE HISTORY

Version Description Date
001 Original release 2020-01-31
001.1 Updated Release 2020-10-20
001.2 Update Release 2021-09-23
001.3 Update Release 2022-04-06
DETAILED CHANGE LOG

Document Revision: 001.1
Approved: 2020-10-20
Summary: Summary description of changes
Section Description
9.6.1 Removed/Moved Guy Grips and Strand vises to 9.7.5
9.7.4 Strand dead-end updated. Removed Automatic splices
9.7.5 Added Automatic Guy grips and Strand splice prohibition language
9.8.4 Updated climbing space illustrations
9.8.6 Updated traveling ground illustration
12.6.4 Flex Conduit. Removed Barb Mechanical Fittings Description

Section Description
9.7.8 Updated Extension Devices: Arms, Stand-off Bracket, etc
10.3.10 Added Lashing Aerial Duct
12.1 Added Ordinances and Codes to 12 Underground / Subsurface Construction
Added Underground Cable Route Marker Placement. Moved existing 12.6 to 12.7.
12.6
Incremented the numbering of sub-sections after 12.6.
12.6.2.1 Added Rigid Conduit Header (4)
12.6.3.3 – 12.6.3.5 Moved to 12.6.2.5 thru 12.6.2.7 Conduit / Duct
12.6.4.1 – 12.6.4.3 Added Headers under 12.6.4 Flexible Conduit/ Duct Splicing
12.8.2.4 Cable-in-Conduit
iii
Enterprise Standard

Section Description
Add Figure and Table designations.
Reformatted and reworded sentences.
Document Reformatted Conformance Notation Words as required. Depended upon the
context of the paragraph
Updated figures as required to make clearer and more legible.
Updated conformance notations references throughout the document. Added
1.6 highlighting of conformance words. Checked context and changed wording as
necessary in the document.
7.0 Edited summary
7.1 Reworded Grounding
7.1.3 Add Aerial Active bonding (Before and After active) in section 7
7.5 Edited ground wire splicing
8.5 Expanded the explanation of the Lead to Height Ratio
10.1 Added detail to Comcast aerial construction specification summary
10.2 Safety Aerial Construction Sections 10.2.1 and 10.2.2
10.3.3 Expansion Loop Updates
10.3.4.1 Update diagrams
12.2.1 Added Mule tape or approved Comcast pull tape use specification
12.2.3 Added Rigid Conduit Header (4)
12.2.6 Add conduit specification for Cable-in-Conduit
12.7.1 Added approved pedestal sizes and CIFA numbers
12.7.2.1.2 Updated AASHTO information and illustrations
12.7.2.2.6 Added Vault Stacking
12.7.2.2.8 Added approved vault sizes
12.7.4.1 Added active at riser illustration
12.9.4 1 Rolled duct added
13.6.1.5 Added Tap Installation for new build.
13.6.1.7 Updated actives splicing details
15.5 Plant Upgrade: Aerial Tap Device Replacement
19 Appendix TFC Construction Math (Removed Section)
iv
Enterprise Standard
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DOCUMENT CHANGE HISTORY.................................................................................. iii
DETAILED CHANGE LOG ............................................................................................. iii
TABLE OF CONTENTS .................................................................................................. v
LIST OF TABLES .........................................................................................................xxii
LIST OF FIGURES...................................................................................................... xxiii
List of Acronyms..........................................................................................................xxxi
1. Overview .................................................................................................................1
Objective of Standard ...................................................................................... 1
Scope of this Standard..................................................................................... 1
Applicability of Standard .................................................................................. 2
Deviations ........................................................................................................ 2
Updates and Changes ..................................................................................... 2
Conformance Notation ..................................................................................... 3
Pre-requisites................................................................................................... 3
2. Regulations and Codes ........................................................................................... 4
3. Safety ......................................................................................................................5
General ............................................................................................................6
Grades of Construction .................................................................................... 7
National Regulation and Code Availability........................................................ 7
OSHA Standards Section 1910.268 ................................................................. 8
Purpose of Section 1910.268.................................................................. 8
Scope of Section 1910.268 ..................................................................... 9
National Electric Safety Code (NESC) ............................................................. 9
Purpose of the NESC ........................................................................... 11
Scope of the NESC .............................................................................. 11
National Electric Code (NEC)......................................................................... 12
Pole Lease Agreements................................................................................. 12
State, Local, and Municipal Codes ................................................................. 12
Governing Code or Regulation ....................................................................... 12
v
Enterprise Standard
4. Tools and Equipment ............................................................................................. 13

Comcast Specifications.................................................................................. 13
Aerial Construction Tools ............................................................................... 13
Subsurface Construction Tools ...................................................................... 18
Tools and Equipment Common to Aerial and Subsurface Construction ......... 20
Coaxial Splicing Tools.................................................................................... 21
5. Unloading, Inspecting and Warehousing of Construction Equipment ..................... 22
Construction Materials ................................................................................... 22
Coaxial Cable Warehousing........................................................................... 23
Storage and Stacking of Cable Reels ................................................... 23
Visual Inspection .................................................................................. 25
Shipping and Deployment .............................................................................. 25
6. Comcast Coaxial Architecture Trunk and Distribution Concepts ............................ 26
Architecture ................................................................................................... 26
HFC BAU Sub-split Architecture ........................................................... 26
Xnet (N+0) Mid-split architecture .......................................................... 27
Fiber Deep (N+0) Sub-split Architecture ............................................... 27
Coaxial Trunk and Distribution Cables ........................................................... 28
7. Grounding and Bonding ......................................................................................... 31
Comcast Grounding and Bonding Specification Summary ............................. 31
Aerial Specification Summary ............................................................... 32
Underground Specification Summary ................................................... 32
Active Devices and Power Supplies Specifications Summary ............... 33
General Overview of Grounding and Bonding ................................................ 33
Review of Bonding and Grounding Terminology ............................................ 34
Electrical Grounding and Bonding Connections ............................................. 35
Grounding and Bonding Components ............................................................ 35
Grounding and Bonding Practices.................................................................. 38
vi
Enterprise Standard
Aerial Cable Grounding ........................................................................ 38

Aerial Configurations ............................................................................ 42
7.6.2.1 Cable Bearing Strand ........................................................................ 43
7.6.2.2 Self-Support ...................................................................................... 43
Subsurface Plant (Underground Configurations)................................... 43
8. Guys and Anchors ................................................................................................. 45
Comcast Specification Summary ................................................................... 45
General .......................................................................................................... 46
Safety Factors ...................................................................................... 47
Crossings ............................................................................................. 47
Guy Wires............................................................................................. 47
Down Guys ........................................................................................... 47
Types and Methods of Guying .............................................................. 48
Types of Anchors ........................................................................................... 50
Anchor Attachment ........................................................................................ 51
Guy Construction Lead-to-Height ................................................................... 51
Guy Wire Tension ................................................................................. 52
Guy Wire Attachments .......................................................................... 52
Guy Guards .......................................................................................... 53
Grounding and Bonding Guys............................................................... 53
Guy Insulator ........................................................................................ 53
9. Aerial Strand Construction ..................................................................................... 54
Comcast Specifications Summary.................................................................. 54
Construction and Maintenance Safety............................................................ 55
Poles and Pole-line Hardware ........................................................................ 55
Pole-Line Hardware Specification ......................................................... 55
Pole Conditions Specifications.............................................................. 57
Coaxial Cable Clearances.............................................................................. 57
Equipment Clearances................................................................................... 64
Pole Line Hardware Description ..................................................................... 65
vii
Enterprise Standard
Wood Pole Hardware ........................................................................... 65

9.6.1.1 Suspension Clamps .......................................................................... 66
9.6.1.2 Through Bolts, Square Nuts, and Square Washers ........................... 66
9.6.1.3 Thimble Eye Bolts ............................................................................. 67
9.6.1.4 Cable Suspension Screws ................................................................ 67
9.6.1.5 Reinforcing and Support Straps ........................................................ 68
9.6.1.6 Guy Hooks ........................................................................................ 69
9.6.1.7 Guy Straps ........................................................................................ 69
9.6.1.8 Guy Clamps ...................................................................................... 69
Non-wood Pole ..................................................................................... 71
9.6.2.1 Concrete Poles ................................................................................. 71
9.6.2.2 Steel Poles........................................................................................ 71
9.6.2.3 Fiberglass or Poles of Fiber Reinforced Construction........................ 72
9.6.2.4 Pole Hardware .................................................................................. 72
9.6.2.5 Hardware for Non-wood Poles .......................................................... 73
9.6.2.6 Guys ................................................................................................. 73
9.6.2.7 Hole Drilling ...................................................................................... 74
9.6.2.8 Lag Screws and Support Straps........................................................ 74
9.6.2.9 Banded Hardware Attachments ........................................................ 74
Pole Framing and Hardware Placement Guidelines ....................................... 75
Crossover at Pole ................................................................................. 79
Strand or Mid-span Crossover .............................................................. 80
Branch Strand Termination ................................................................... 81
Strand Dead-end .................................................................................. 84
Guy Grips and Strand Splice ................................................................ 85
9.7.5.1 Guy Grips (B Strand Grips) ............................................................... 85
9.7.5.2 Strand Splice .................................................................................... 85
9.7.5.3 Strand Vise or Automatic Dead-end .................................................. 86
9.7.5.4 Automatic Strand Splice (Pickle) ....................................................... 86
False Dead End .................................................................................... 87
viii
Enterprise Standard
Double Framed Double Dead end ........................................................ 89

Extension Devices: Arms, Stand-off Bracket, etc. ................................. 90
9.7.8.1 Comcast Extension Device Clearances............................................. 90
9.7.8.2 Extension Device Deployment Considerations .................................. 92
9.7.8.3 Epoxirod Stand-off Bracket ............................................................... 94
9.7.8.4 Wooden Extension Arms................................................................... 96
9.7.8.5 Extension Bolts ................................................................................. 97
Power and Cable Riser ......................................................................... 98
Strand Installation .......................................................................................... 99
Strand Installation Specifications .......................................................... 99
Equipment Protection ......................................................................... 101
Anchors and Guys .............................................................................. 101
Climbing Space .................................................................................. 101
Support Strand ................................................................................... 102
Traveling Ground ................................................................................ 103
Strand Bonding and Grounding at the Time of Installation .................. 104
Measuring Strand Tension .................................................................. 104
Bending and Cutting Strand ................................................................ 106
Strand and Cable Installation Complete .............................................. 106
10. Aerial Coaxial Cable Construction ................................................................... 107
Comcast Specifications Summary................................................................ 107
Aerial Coaxial Cable Bonding and Grounding ..................................... 107
Aerial Clearances ............................................................................... 107
Coaxial Cable Installation ................................................................... 108
Coaxial Cable Expansion Loop ........................................................... 108
Construction and Maintenance Safety.......................................................... 108
Safety Equipment and Personnel ....................................................... 109
Safety Equipment Usage .................................................................... 110
Clearances .................................................................................................. 111
Lashing and Handling Coaxial Cable ........................................................... 111
ix
Enterprise Standard
Lashing Coaxial Cable ........................................................................ 111

Bending Radii ..................................................................................... 112
Expansion Loops ................................................................................ 113
10.4.3.1 Make the Expansion Loop Prior to Lashing. .................................... 114
10.4.3.2 Flat Bottom Expansion Loops ......................................................... 114
10.4.3.3 When to place expansion loops ...................................................... 115
10.4.3.4 Where to place expansion loops ..................................................... 116
Straight Line Construction .................................................................. 117
10.4.4.1 Active Locations .............................................................................. 118
10.4.4.2 Mechanical Bender ......................................................................... 120
10.4.4.3 Forming the Loop ............................................................................ 120
10.4.4.4 Expansion Loops – Various Configurations ..................................... 121
Cable Placement Back Pull Method .................................................... 122
10.4.5.1 Set-up Chute or 45⁰ Roller Corner Block Placement ....................... 122
10.4.5.2 Cable Puller Set-up ......................................................................... 123
10.4.5.3 Cable Block Placement ................................................................... 123
10.4.5.4 Passing the Cable Puller at Poles ................................................... 123
Cable Placement Drive off Method ..................................................... 124
10.4.6.1 Strand ............................................................................................. 124
10.4.6.2 Coax ............................................................................................... 124
10.4.6.3 Trailer set-up ................................................................................... 124
10.4.6.4 Set-up Chute Placement ................................................................. 124
10.4.6.5 Make the Expansion Loop Prior to Lashing. .................................... 125
Power Winching Methods ................................................................... 126
Overlash Cable Placement ................................................................. 127
Delashing and Relashing .................................................................... 127
Lashing Aerial Duct ............................................................................ 128
10.4.10.1 Areal Conduit Installation Method.................................................... 130
10.4.10.2 Moving Reel Method ....................................................................... 131
10.4.10.3 Stationary Reel Method................................................................... 131
x
Enterprise Standard
Prelashing Cable Placement Methods ................................................ 132

Lashing Wire Tension ......................................................................... 132
Lasher Pull Angle ............................................................................... 132
Cable Pushers and Straighteners ....................................................... 133
Expansion and Contraction ................................................................. 133
10.4.15.1 Coaxial Cable.................................................................................. 133
10.4.15.2 Strand ............................................................................................. 134
Cable Movement ................................................................................ 134
Cable and Center Conductor Tension................................................. 135
Bands and Spacers ............................................................................ 136
Band and Spacer Location ................................................................. 137
Lashing Wire Termination ................................................................... 137
10.4.20.1 Lashing Wire Clamps ...................................................................... 138
Cable Protection .......................................................................................... 140
11. Integrated Messenger (Figure 8) Cable Installation.......................................... 141
Comcast Specifications................................................................................ 141
Integrated Messenger Safety ....................................................................... 142
Poles and Pole line Hardware ...................................................................... 143
Pole Conditions Specifications............................................................ 143
Pole-Line Hardware Specification ....................................................... 144
Hardware Integrated Messenger ........................................................ 145
Cable Clearances ........................................................................................ 147
Plant Equipment Cable Transition ................................................................ 147
Bending Radii / Diameter .................................................................... 147
Expansion Loop .................................................................................. 148
Straight Line Construction .................................................................. 149
Integrated Messenger Installation ................................................................ 152
Down Guys ......................................................................................... 154
Dead Ending....................................................................................... 154
Pole Attachment ................................................................................. 155
xi
Enterprise Standard
Web Removal ..................................................................................... 156

Cable Transition to Equipment............................................................ 156
Hardware and Block Placement.......................................................... 157
Cable Placement Drive-off (Moving Reel) Method........................................ 158
Loading the Cable Reel ...................................................................... 159
Placing the Cable in Blocks ................................................................ 159
Hardware and Cable Placement ......................................................... 159
Crossing Intersections during the Installation...................................... 160
Splicing Locations............................................................................... 160
Cable Placement - Stationary Reel Method ................................................. 161
Trailer set-up ...................................................................................... 162
Cable block placement ....................................................................... 162
Cable puller set-up ............................................................................. 163
Cable Placement ................................................................................ 163
Pulling the Cable ................................................................................ 164
Tensioning the Cable .......................................................................... 165
Cable Placement Stationary Reel with Winch Assist .................................... 165
Set-up Chute and Hardware Placement ............................................. 165
Trailer set-up ...................................................................................... 166
Hardware Placement .......................................................................... 167
Winch Setup – Pulling the Cable ........................................................ 167
Tensioning the Cable .......................................................................... 168
Underground Transitions.............................................................................. 168
Overlash Cable Placement .......................................................................... 169
12. Underground / Subsurface Construction .......................................................... 170
Ordinances Codes and Permits ................................................................... 171
Comcast Subsurface Specification............................................................... 171
Muletape or Pull Tape......................................................................... 172
Conduit Burial Depth .......................................................................... 172
Rigid Conduit: ..................................................................................... 172
xii
Enterprise Standard
Flexible Conduit: ................................................................................. 173

Conduit Innerduct: .............................................................................. 173
Cable in Conduit ................................................................................. 173
Existing Conduit / Duct: ...................................................................... 173
Conduit Intercept ................................................................................ 173
Sealant and Duct Plugs ...................................................................... 174
Subsurface Trenching Support ........................................................... 174
Subsurface Construction and Maintenance Safety....................................... 174
Traffic Control ..................................................................................... 176
Open Trenches and Pits ..................................................................... 177
Fencing Guidance .............................................................................. 177
12.3.3.1 Temporary Fencing ......................................................................... 177
12.3.3.2 Permanent Existing Fencing ........................................................... 178
Subsurface Plant Bonding and Grounding ................................................... 178
Pedestal/Flush Mount Ground Placement........................................... 179
12.4.1.1 Pedestal-mount plant ...................................................................... 179
12.4.1.2 Flush-mount plant ........................................................................... 179
12.4.1.3 Grounding methods:........................................................................ 179
Bonding .............................................................................................. 180
Manhole Bonding................................................................................ 180
12.4.3.1 Wire Requirement ........................................................................... 181
12.4.3.2 Connection to Ground (Earth) ......................................................... 181
Subsurface Construction General ................................................................ 182
Pre-construction Notification ............................................................... 182
Locating Subsurface Utilities............................................................... 183
12.5.2.1 Contact Subsurface Plant Operators ............................................... 183
12.5.2.2 Subsurface Plant Locators .............................................................. 184
12.5.2.3 Potholing Subsurface Utility Location .............................................. 184
12.5.2.3.1 Backhoes.................................................................................. 185
12.5.2.3.2 Hand Dig .................................................................................. 185
xiii
Enterprise Standard
12.5.2.3.3 Vacuum Excavation .................................................................. 185

12.5.2.3.4 Air-Vacuum............................................................................... 185
12.5.2.3.5 Water Vacuum .......................................................................... 186
12.5.2.3.6 Protecting Exposed Facilities .................................................... 186
12.5.2.3.7 Pothole Backfill and Restoration ............................................... 186
12.5.2.3.8 Mis-Designated Facility............................................................. 187
Permitting and Easements.................................................................. 187
Working on Easements within Private Property .................................. 187
Residential Trenching Guidelines ....................................................... 187
Restoration ......................................................................................... 188
Construction Debris Removal ............................................................. 188
Underground Cable Route Marker Placement.............................................. 189
Marker Minimum Requirements .......................................................... 189
Marker Post Physical Requirements ................................................... 190
Marker Placement General Requirements .......................................... 191
Marker Post, Ground Level Solution ................................................... 193
Ground Level Marker (Road, Sidewalk, and Vault) ............................. 193
Enclosures, Pedestals, Vaults, Handholes, Manholes and Risers ................ 195
Enclosure (Cabinets) / Pedestals........................................................ 195
Vault, Handhole and Lid Guidance, (Grade Level Enclosure) ............. 197
12.7.2.1 Vault and Vault-lid Loading Standards ............................................ 199
12.7.2.1.1 ANSI / SCTE 77 Loading Specification Tiers. ........................... 200
12.7.2.1.2 AASHTO American Association of State Highway and
Transportation Officials Standard................................................................. 200
12.7.2.2 Vault Specifications......................................................................... 202
12.7.2.2.1 Traffic Locations: ...................................................................... 202
12.7.2.2.2 Pedestrian Traffic Locations: .................................................... 202
12.7.2.2.3 Vehicular Traffic Locations ....................................................... 202
12.7.2.2.4 Vault Lids (Based on Use) ........................................................ 202
12.7.2.2.4.1 Splice and Passive Vaults ..................................................... 202
12.7.2.2.4.2 Actives .................................................................................. 202
xiv
Enterprise Standard
12.7.2.2.4.3 Battery Vaults (Do NOT Use) ................................................ 203

12.7.2.2.5 Vault Extensions ....................................................................... 203
12.7.2.2.6 Vault Stacking .......................................................................... 203
12.7.2.2.7 Vault Drainage .......................................................................... 203
12.7.2.2.8 Vault Configurations ................................................................. 204
Manhole ............................................................................................. 207
12.7.3.1 Confined Workspace Definitions ..................................................... 208
12.7.3.2 Permit Required Entry ..................................................................... 208
12.7.3.3 Non-permit Required Entry.............................................................. 209
12.7.3.4 General Precautions and Work Rules ............................................. 210
Riser ................................................................................................... 211
12.7.4.1 Riser Installation ............................................................................. 212
12.7.4.2 Riser Standoff Brackets .................................................................. 213
12.7.4.3 Riser protection ............................................................................... 215
Coaxial Cable and Conduit .......................................................................... 215
Cable Direct Buried (Not Approved).................................................... 216
Conduit / Duct..................................................................................... 217
12.8.2.1 Rigid Conduit .................................................................................. 218
12.8.2.2 Flexible Conduit .............................................................................. 219
12.8.2.3 Innerduct ......................................................................................... 220
12.8.2.4 Cable-in-Conduit For Distribution .................................................... 221
12.8.2.5 Multi-cell Conduit (FuturePath)........................................................ 221
12.8.2.6 Armored (Rodent and Mechanical Protection) ................................. 222
12.8.2.7 Tone-able Conduit or Conduit Location ........................................... 222
Conduit Specialty Applications............................................................ 222
12.8.3.1 Submarine / Underwater Duct ......................................................... 223
12.8.3.2 Sub-Aqueous Terrain Plowing......................................................... 223
12.8.3.3 Self-Propelled Bottom Crawling Vehicles ........................................ 223
12.8.3.4 Jet-assisted Plows .......................................................................... 224
Bridge Structures Conduit Placement ................................................. 224
xv
Enterprise Standard
12.8.4.1 Bridge Expansion and Contraction .................................................. 224

12.8.4.2 Bridge Structure Conduit Attachment .............................................. 225
Flexible Conduit / Duct Splicing .......................................................... 226
12.8.5.1 Mechanical Fittings ......................................................................... 227
12.8.5.2 Heat Fusion .................................................................................... 227
12.8.5.3 Repair Operations ........................................................................... 228
Intercept Existing Conduits ................................................................. 229
12.8.6.1 Highway or Street Crossing Intercept .............................................. 230
12.8.6.2 Building Intercept ............................................................................ 230
12.8.6.3 Existing Conduit “Y” to New Conduit ............................................... 231
Subsurface Installation of Coaxial Cable or Conduits ................................... 233
Trenching ........................................................................................... 233
12.9.1.1 Trenching Guidelines ...................................................................... 234
12.9.1.1.1 Trench Depth............................................................................ 235
12.9.1.1.2 Materials in the Trench ............................................................. 236
12.9.1.1.3 Trench Offset / Intersections..................................................... 236
Trenchers and Tractors ...................................................................... 236
Cable or Flexible Conduit Reels. ........................................................ 237
Open Trench ...................................................................................... 238
12.9.4.1 Rolled Duct and CIC Installation ..................................................... 239
12.9.4.1.1 Open Trench or Bore– Stationary Reel ..................................... 239
12.9.4.1.2 Open Trench – Moving Reel Conduit Installation ...................... 240
12.9.4.2 Flooded Trench ............................................................................... 241
12.9.4.3 Open Trench Backfill ....................................................................... 241
12.9.4.4 Frost Heave .................................................................................... 242
Plowing ............................................................................................... 243
12.9.5.1 Factors to Consider......................................................................... 244
12.9.5.2 Construction Method Prior to Plowing ............................................. 244
12.9.5.3 Static Plowing ................................................................................. 245
12.9.5.4 Vibratory Plowing ............................................................................ 245
xvi
Enterprise Standard
12.9.5.5 Pull Plow ......................................................................................... 246

12.9.5.6 Rip and Plow (using two tractors) .................................................... 246
Boring (Conventional and Directional) .......................................................... 247
Conventional Bores ............................................................................ 247
12.10.1.1 Mechanical Boring .......................................................................... 247
12.10.1.2 Pneumatically Driven Pistons (missiles) .......................................... 248
Directional Bores ................................................................................ 248
12.10.2.1 Drilling Fluid .................................................................................... 249
12.10.2.2 Soil Classification ............................................................................ 250
12.10.2.2.1 Coarse Grain Soils ................................................................. 250
12.10.2.2.2 Fine Grain Soils (Clay and Silt) ............................................... 250
12.10.2.3 Bits / Reamers ................................................................................ 251
12.10.2.4 Pilot Boring ..................................................................................... 251
12.10.2.5 Reaming and Pullback .................................................................... 251
Street Cut .................................................................................................... 252
Concrete Saw Method ........................................................................ 252
12.11.1.1 Trench Restoration ......................................................................... 252
12.11.1.2 Backfill Trench ................................................................................ 252
12.11.1.3 Asphalt Cap .................................................................................... 252
Rock Saw Method .............................................................................. 253
12.11.2.1 Trench Preparation ......................................................................... 253
12.11.2.2 Backfill Specification ....................................................................... 254
12.11.2.3 Asphalt Cap .................................................................................... 254
Street Cut Options .............................................................................. 254
Pulling Tension and Control ......................................................................... 255
Pulling Cable or Innerduct into Conduit............................................... 255
12.12.1.1 Route Geometry.............................................................................. 255
Coaxial Cable Tension........................................................................ 256
Flexible Conduit Tension .................................................................... 257
Break-away Swivels ........................................................................... 258
xvii
Enterprise Standard
Dynamometers ................................................................................... 258

Tail Loading ........................................................................................ 258
Bending Radius .................................................................................. 259
12.12.7.1 Static Bending Radius ................................................................... 259
12.12.7.2 Dynamic Bending Radius .............................................................. 259
Capstan Winch ................................................................................... 260
Installing Cable in a Conduit or Duct ............................................................ 261
Subsurface Installation of Coaxial Cable into Existing Conduits ................... 261
Conduit Proofing ................................................................................. 261
Mid-Assists ......................................................................................... 262
After Pulling ........................................................................................ 262
Existing Conduit / Duct ....................................................................... 262
Multiple Cables ................................................................................... 263
Installing Cable Grips ......................................................................... 263
Fill Percentage ................................................................................... 263
12.14.7.1 Triangular Configuration.................................................................. 264
12.14.7.2 Cradled Configuration ..................................................................... 264
Pulling Multiple Cables ....................................................................... 264
Reel Braking ....................................................................................... 265
13. Hardline Coaxial Splicing ................................................................................. 266
Comcast Specifications Section 13 Summary .............................................. 266
Hardline Coaxial Splicing Safety .................................................................. 267
Hardline Coaxial Splicing Customer Impact ................................................. 268
Equipment Used During Splicing.................................................................. 268
Hardline Splice Preparation Tools ...................................................... 268
Hardline Connectors, Splices, and Adapters....................................... 271
Hardline Cables .................................................................................. 274
Splice Environmental Protection – Shrink Tubing ............................... 275
13.4.4.1 Heat Shrink Tube Application .......................................................... 276
13.4.4.2 Air Shrink Tube ............................................................................... 279
xviii
Enterprise Standard
13.4.4.3 Self-Fusing or Self-Adhesive Tape .................................................. 280

Hardline Coaxial Cable Splicing ................................................................... 280
Connectorization and Splicing Guidelines........................................... 280
13.5.1.1 Coaxial Hardline Cable Preparation for Connectorization ................ 281
13.5.1.2 Coring and Stripping ....................................................................... 282
13.5.1.3 Coaxial Hardline Cable Center Conductor Preparation ................... 283
13.5.1.4 Cable Connectorization at a Splice ................................................. 284
13.5.1.5 Pin Connector Preparation for 5/8” Port .......................................... 285
13.5.1.6 Environmentally Securing the Connectors....................................... 287
Equipment Installation and Splicing ............................................................. 287
Aerial Equipment Mounting and Splicing Guidelines ........................... 287
13.6.1.1 Grounding and Bonding .................................................................. 288
13.6.1.2 Expansion Loops and Splicing ........................................................ 288
13.6.1.3 Corners ........................................................................................... 289
13.6.1.4 Splitter and Coupler Installation ...................................................... 290
13.6.1.5 Tap Installation................................................................................ 291
13.6.1.6 Active Equipment ............................................................................ 293
13.6.1.6.1 Nodes and Amplifiers ............................................................... 293
13.6.1.6.2 Line Extender ........................................................................... 296
13.6.1.6.3 Line Extender with Through Cable ............................................ 297
13.6.1.7 Aerial Power Supplies ..................................................................... 298
13.6.1.8 Aerial Network Power Insertion ....................................................... 299
Underground / Subsurface Splicing Guidelines................................... 300
13.6.2.1 Underground Actives Equipment Splicing Configurations................ 301
13.6.2.1.1 Nodes and Amplifiers ............................................................... 301
13.6.2.1.2 Line Extender ........................................................................... 302
13.6.2.2 Splitter and Coupler Locations ........................................................ 302
13.6.2.3 Tap Locations ................................................................................. 303
13.6.2.4 Underground Plant Power Supplies ................................................ 304
13.6.2.5 Underground Network Power Insertion............................................ 305
xix
Enterprise Standard
13.6.2.6 xNet Network Power Transition Between Nodes ............................. 306

14. Rebuild Construction ....................................................................................... 307
Rebuild Construction Specification............................................................... 307
Rebuild Construction Requirements............................................................. 308
Aerial Plant .................................................................................................. 309
Raise or Lower the Existing System ................................................... 309
Securing the Old Plant........................................................................ 311
14.3.2.1 Securing a Through Pole ................................................................ 311
14.3.2.2 Securing Deadends and Angle Poles .............................................. 312
Reframing Poles ................................................................................. 313
Rebuild Grounding and Bonding ......................................................... 313
Anchors and Guys .............................................................................. 314
Underground / Subsurface ........................................................................... 314
Deactivating the Existing / Old System......................................................... 314
Equipment Wreck-out .................................................................................. 315
Strand and Cable Wreck-out ........................................................................ 315
Deactivation and Removal of Old Power Supplies ....................................... 316
Equipment Reconciliation and Disposition ................................................... 317
CLI Compliance ........................................................................................... 317
15. Upgrade Construction ...................................................................................... 318
Comcast Upgrade Construction Specifications ............................................ 318
Upgrade Construction Requirements ........................................................... 319
New Coaxial Cable Placement..................................................................... 320
Minimal Plant Interruptions Preparation ....................................................... 320
Aerial Tap Device Replacement ................................................................... 321
Underground / Subsurface ........................................................................... 323
Remove and Replace Actives and Passives ................................................ 325
Deactivation and Removal of Old Power Supplies ....................................... 325
Equipment Reconciliation and Disposition ................................................... 326
CLI Compliance ........................................................................................... 326
xx
Enterprise Standard
16. Coaxial Construction Inspection and Plant Acceptance ................................... 327

Construction Inspection and Plant Acceptance Specification Summary ....... 327
Physical Plant Inspection and Acceptance ................................................... 328
Aerial Physical Plant Inspection .......................................................... 328
16.2.1.1 Bonding and Grounding .................................................................. 328
16.2.1.2 Cable Placement............................................................................. 328
16.2.1.3 Active and Passive Equipment Housings ........................................ 329
16.2.1.4 Aerial Environmental Protection ...................................................... 329
Underground Physical Plant Inspection .............................................. 329
16.2.2.1 Conduit ........................................................................................... 330
16.2.2.2 Cable Placement............................................................................. 330
16.2.2.3 Riser locations ................................................................................ 330
16.2.2.4 Equipment Protective Covering ....................................................... 330
16.2.2.4.1 Pedestals.................................................................................. 330
16.2.2.4.2 Cabinets ................................................................................... 331
16.2.2.4.3 Vaults ....................................................................................... 331
16.2.2.4.4 Manhole ................................................................................... 331
16.2.2.5 Bonding and Grounding .................................................................. 331
16.2.2.6 Underground Hardline Connector Environmental Protection ........... 331
As-Built (Red-Lining) .......................................................................... 331
Construction Inspection and Documentation: ............................................... 332
Closing Activity for Unconditional Acceptance: ................................... 332
Follow-up Activity for Qualified Acceptance: ....................................... 332
17. Comcast Network Construction Waivers .......................................................... 334
18. Resources Used in the Document ................................................................... 337
Construction and Standards References...................................................... 337
PPC references can be found at: ................................................................. 339
Corning Gilbert references can be found at:................................................. 339
Sub-surface / Underground References ....................................................... 340
xxi
Enterprise Standard
LIST OF TABLES
Table 1-1: Conformance Notation.................................................................................... 3
Table 3-1: Clearances ................................................................................................... 10
Table 4-1: Aerial Construction Tools with Tool Illustrations............................................ 13
Table 4-2: Subsurface Construction Tools..................................................................... 18
Table 4-3: Common Tools to Aerial and Subsurface Construction................................. 20
Table 5-1: Example Reel Stacking Height Specifications............................................... 24
Table 6-1: Cable Types Used by Comcast .................................................................... 30
Table 7-1: Bonding Clamp Configurations ..................................................................... 37
Table 8-1: Guy Configurations....................................................................................... 48
Table 8-2: Anchor Types ............................................................................................... 50
Table 8-3: Strand Minimum Breaking Strength .............................................................. 52
Table 9-1: Vertical Clearances (Per 2017 NESC Table 232-1) ...................................... 59
Table 9-2: Specific Clearances (Driveways, Roads, Buildings, etc.) .............................. 60
Table 9-3: Specified Stand-off Bracket Loading............................................................. 95
Table 9-4: Non-conductive Extension Arm CIFA Numbers ............................................ 95
Table 9-5: Stringing Tension Pounds vs Temperature / Span Length .......................... 105
Table 10-1: Temperature Extremes ............................................................................. 134
Table 10-2: Cable Movement 750 cable 150' Span ..................................................... 135
Table 10-3: Tension pounds at -40⁰F .......................................................................... 135
Table 11-1: Integrated Messenger Hardware .............................................................. 145
Table 11-2: Integrated Messenger Cable Minimum Bend Radius ................................ 148
Table 11-3: Integrated Messenger Construction Configurations .................................. 150
Table 11-4: IM Maximum Rated Loads (lbs) ................................................................ 164
Table 12-1: APWA Color Code for Marking Utilities ..................................................... 183
Table 12-2: Pedestal Examples................................................................................... 196
Table 12-3: Approved Pedestals, Size and Colors ...................................................... 197
Table 12-4: Vault Configurations ................................................................................. 204
Table 12-5: HDPE Vault Dimensions........................................................................... 206
Table 12-6: Concrete Vault Dimensions ...................................................................... 207
xxii
Enterprise Standard
Table 12-7: Underground Armored/Unarmored Cable ................................................. 217

Table 12-8: Multi-cell Conduit Configurations .............................................................. 221
Table 12-9: Cable Maximum Pulling Tensions............................................................. 257
Table 12-10: Minimum Bending Radius (Radii) ........................................................... 260
Table 13-1: Tools Used for Hardline Splicing.............................................................. 269
Table 13-2: Hardline Connectors, Splices and Adaptors ............................................. 272
Table 13-3: Shrink Tube Parameters........................................................................... 276
Table 13-4: Heat Shrink Application ............................................................................ 278
Table 13-5: Air Shrink Tube......................................................................................... 279
Table 13-6: Self Adhesive Tape .................................................................................. 280
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 6-1: Tree and Branch Architecture (N+x) ............................................................ 27
Figure 6-2: Xnet (N+0)................................................................................................... 27
Figure 6-3: Fiber Deep Sub-split (N+0).......................................................................... 27
Figure 6-4: Distribution Cables ...................................................................................... 28
Figure 6-5: RF Cable vs Power Cable ........................................................................... 29
Figure 7-1: Ground Electrode / Ground Rod .................................................................. 36
Figure 7-2: Ground Rod Clamp ..................................................................................... 36
Figure 7-3: In-Line Grounding ....................................................................................... 39
Figure 7-4: Bonding Strand ........................................................................................... 40
Figure 7-5: Double Dead-End Bonding .......................................................................... 41
Figure 7-6: Vertical Riser ............................................................................................ 42
Figure 8-1: Anchor Attachment...................................................................................... 51
Figure 8-2: Guy Lead to Height Ratio ............................................................................ 52
Figure 8-3: Guy Guard .................................................................................................. 53
Figure 8-4: Guy Insulator............................................................................................... 53
Figure 9-1: Sag and Tension ......................................................................................... 58
Figure 9-2: Preferred Clearance .................................................................................... 64
Figure 9-3: Equipment Clearances Power to Communications ...................................... 64
xxiii
Enterprise Standard
Figure 9-4: Opposite Pole Side Clearance .................................................................... 65

Figure 9-5: Suspension Clamps .................................................................................... 66
Figure 9-6: Through Bolt, Square Nut and Washer........................................................ 66
Figure 9-7: Double Threaded Through Bolt an Nuts ...................................................... 67
Figure 9-8: Flat Washer................................................................................................. 67
Figure 9-9: Curved Washer ........................................................................................... 67
Figure 9-10: Thimble Eye Bolt ....................................................................................... 67
Figure 9-11: Cable Suspension Screw .......................................................................... 67
Figure 9-12: Reinforcing Straps..................................................................................... 68
Figure 9-13: Reinforcement Strap / Three Bolt .............................................................. 68
Figure 9-14: Guy Hooks ................................................................................................ 69
Figure 9-15: Guy Straps ................................................................................................ 69
Figure 9-16: Guy Clamps .............................................................................................. 69
Figure 9-17: Anchor Guy / Stub Guy ............................................................................. 70
Figure 9-18: Pole to Stub / Pole to Pole Guy Clamp Usage ........................................... 70
Figure 9-19: Through-Bolt Excess Thread Length ......................................................... 75
Figure 9-20: Three Bolt Clamp ...................................................................................... 75
Figure 9-21: Low Angled Pole Line Curved Three-Bolt Clamp ....................................... 76
Figure 9-22: Suspension Clamp Orientation .................................................................. 77
Figure 9-23: Dead-end Configuration ............................................................................ 77
Figure 9-24: Pole Washer Placement ............................................................................ 78
Figure 9-25: Crossover at the Pole ................................................................................ 79
Figure 9-26: Strand Crossover ...................................................................................... 80
Figure 9-27: Crossover Clamp ...................................................................................... 80
Figure 9-28: Branch Strand Termination Configuration A .............................................. 81
Figure 9-29: Branch Strand Termination Configuration B .............................................. 82
Figure 9-30: Branch Strand Termination Configuration C .............................................. 83
Figure 9-31: Pole Framing Dead-end Pole with Guy...................................................... 84
Figure 9-32: Guy Grips .................................................................................................. 85
Figure 9-33: Strand Splice ............................................................................................. 86
xxiv
Enterprise Standard
Figure 9-34: Strand Vise or Automatic Deadend. .......................................................... 86

Figure 9-35: Automatic Strand Splice (Pickle) ............................................................... 87
Figure 9-36: False Dead-end for a Slack Span .............................................................. 87
Figure 9-37: False Dead-end Anchored......................................................................... 88
Figure 9-38: False Dead-end Non-anchored ................................................................. 88
Figure 9-39: False Dead-end with Arm .......................................................................... 89
Figure 9-40: Double Framed Dead-end ......................................................................... 89
Figure 9-41: Double Dead End ...................................................................................... 90
Figure 9-42: Standoff Clearances .................................................................................. 91
Figure 9-43: 18” Bolt-Bolt Clearances............................................................................ 91
Figure 9-44: Changing the Strand Geometry Top View ................................................. 93
Figure 9-45: Changing the Strand Geometry Front View ............................................... 93
Figure 9-46: Epoxirod Stand-off Bracket........................................................................ 94
Figure 9-47: Epoxirod Loads ......................................................................................... 94
Figure 9-48: Epoxirod Clearances with OM6000 Node .................................................. 96
Figure 9-49: Wooden Extension Arm Illustration............................................................ 96
Figure 9-50: Extension Bolts and Reinforcing Straps..................................................... 97
Figure 9-51: 4-inch Extension Bolt Example with Dimensions ....................................... 97
Figure 9-52: 8-inch Extension Bolt Example and Dimensions........................................ 98
Figure 9-53: Power and Cable Riser ............................................................................. 98
Figure 9-54: Climbing Space (Top View) ..................................................................... 101
Figure 9-55: Climbing Space (Side View) .................................................................... 101
Figure 9-56: Traveling Ground .................................................................................... 103
Figure 9-57: Dynamometer.......................................................................................... 105
Figure 10-1 Bending Radii ........................................................................................... 112
Figure 10-2: Expansion Loop Bend Radius ................................................................. 114
Figure 10-3: Flat Bottomed Expansion Loop Dimensions ............................................ 114
Figure 10-4: 12” Flat Bottomed Expansion Loop < 0.750 Cable Dimensions ............... 115
Figure 10-5: 15" Flat Bottomed Expansion Loop > 0.750 Cable Dimensions ............... 115
Figure 10-6 Straight Line Construction ........................................................................ 117
xxv
Enterprise Standard
Figure 10-7: Straight Line Non-Wood Pole Construction ............................................. 117

Figure 10-8: Expansion Loop Amplifier ........................................................................ 119
Figure 10-9: Expansion Loop Node ............................................................................. 119
Figure 10-10: Hardware Spacing ................................................................................. 120
Figure 10-11: Mechanical Bender (Lemco Example) ................................................... 120
Figure 10-12: Expansion Loop Configurations ............................................................. 121
Figure 10-13: Back Pull Stationary Reel ...................................................................... 122
Figure 10-14: Drive Off Method ................................................................................... 125
Figure 10-15: Drive-off Cable Lashing Configuration ................................................... 125
Figure 10-16: Power Winch Diagram ........................................................................... 127
Figure 10-17: Aerial Duct 2-way Thru 7-way (Duraline) ............................................... 129
Figure 10-18: Aerial Duct Construction (Duraline) ....................................................... 129
Figure 10-19: Lashing Duct ......................................................................................... 129
Figure 10-20: FuturePath® Double Lash ..................................................................... 131
Figure 10-21: Cable Guidance Tools ........................................................................... 133
Figure 10-22: Strap and Spacers................................................................................. 136
Figure 10-23: Bender and Lasher (Back Pull) .............................................................. 137
Figure 10-24: Lashing Wire Clamp .............................................................................. 138
Figure 10-25: Cable Placing - Lashing Wire Clamp, Strap and Spacer ........................ 139
Figure 10-26: Cable End Caps .................................................................................... 140
Figure 11-1: Bend Radius Integrated Messenger Cable .............................................. 147
Figure 11-2: Expansion Loop ...................................................................................... 149
Figure 11-3: IM Straight Line Construction .................................................................. 149
Figure 11-4: IM Straight Line Construction Non-Wood Pole ........................................ 150
Figure 11-5: Integrated Messenger Cable ................................................................... 153
Figure 11-6: Dead End Wire Vise Configuration .......................................................... 155
Figure 11-7: Cable Separation at Pole Passing ........................................................... 156
Figure 11-8: Integrated Messenger Cable Transition ................................................... 156
Figure 11-9: Three Bolt Clamp Serpentine Groove ...................................................... 157
Figure 11-10: Pole Frames .......................................................................................... 157
xxvi
Enterprise Standard
Figure 11-11: Pole Blocks ........................................................................................... 157

Figure 11-12: Moving Reel Cable Placement .............................................................. 158
Figure 11-13: Protective Cable Caps........................................................................... 161
Figure 11-14: Stationary Reel IM Cable Installation ..................................................... 162
Figure 11-15: 90 Degree Turns ................................................................................... 163
Figure 11-16: Cable Trailer Positioned Aerial Feed ..................................................... 166
Figure 11-17: Winch Operation Communications ........................................................ 167
Figure 11-18: Aerial to Underground Transition ........................................................... 168
Figure 12-1: Temporary Fencing ................................................................................. 177
Figure 12-2: Ground Rod Drive Angle ......................................................................... 180
Figure 12-3: Marker Examples .................................................................................... 190
Figure 12-4: Marker Visibility ....................................................................................... 190
Figure 12-5: Marker Warning Language Example ....................................................... 191
Figure 12-6: Cable Route Marker Placement............................................................... 192
Figure 12-7: Flat Marker .............................................................................................. 192
Figure 12-8: Ground Level Markers ............................................................................. 193
Figure 12-9: Ground Marker (Road, Sidewalk, and Vault) ........................................... 193
Figure 12-10: Vault Lid Marker .................................................................................... 194
Figure 12-11: Pedestal Installation .............................................................................. 195
Figure 12-12: Grade Level Enclosure .......................................................................... 197
Figure 12-13: Vault Wall Loading ................................................................................ 198
Figure 12-14: Heavy Vehicle Illustration ...................................................................... 199
Figure 12-15: H-20 Axle Load ..................................................................................... 200
Figure 12-16: HS-20 Tandem Axle Loading ................................................................ 201
Figure 12-17: Vault Location Placement Examples ..................................................... 201
Figure 12-18: Vault Drainage (Gravel) ......................................................................... 204
Figure 12-19: Permit Required Configuration .............................................................. 209
Figure 12-20: Manhole Guard ..................................................................................... 210
Figure 12-21: Pole Riser ............................................................................................. 212
Figure 12-22: Wall Riser.............................................................................................. 212
xxvii
Enterprise Standard
Figure 12-23: Underground to Aerial Riser Transition at an Active .............................. 213

Figure 12-24: Pole Riser Standoff Bracket .................................................................. 214
Figure 12-25: Riser Protection ..................................................................................... 215
Figure 12-26: Rigid Conduit 4” Diameter and 20’ Length ............................................. 218
Figure 12-27: NO Right Angle Transition ..................................................................... 218
Figure 12-28: Conduit Sweep Angles .......................................................................... 219
Figure 12-29: Conduit on Reel .................................................................................... 220
Figure 12-30: Conduit Innerduct .................................................................................. 220
Figure 12-31: Sled-type Conduit Plow ......................................................................... 224
Figure 12-32: Bridge with Conduit ............................................................................... 224
Figure 12-33: Highway or Street Intercept ................................................................... 230
Figure 12-34: Building Intercept................................................................................... 231
Figure 12-35: Split "Y: Adapter .................................................................................... 232
Figure 12-36: "Y" Intercept Join Diagram .................................................................... 233
Figure 12-37: Trench Depth Illustration ....................................................................... 235
Figure 12-38: Trench Warning Tape ............................................................................ 235
Figure 12-39: Trencher Preferred Path ........................................................................ 237
Figure 12-40: Conduit Placement in the Trench from a Trailer .................................... 237
Figure 12-41: Trench Bend Radius.............................................................................. 238
Figure 12-42: Conduit Placement in Trench ................................................................ 239
Figure 12-43: Moving Reel Open Trench Conduit Placement ...................................... 240
Figure 12-44: Conduit Placement in Trench ................................................................ 241
Figure 12-45: Trench Fill ............................................................................................. 242
Figure 12-46: Large Trencher Example ....................................................................... 243
Figure 12-47: Static Plowing........................................................................................ 245
Figure 12-48: Vibratory Plowing .................................................................................. 245
Figure 12-49: Pull Plow Example................................................................................. 246
Figure 12-50: Rip and Plow ......................................................................................... 247
Figure 12-51: Mechanical Bore ................................................................................... 247
Figure 12-52: Pneumatically Driven Piston .................................................................. 248
xxviii
Enterprise Standard
Figure 12-53: Directional Bore ..................................................................................... 249

Figure 12-54: Drilling Square....................................................................................... 250
Figure 12-55: Concrete Saw........................................................................................ 252
Figure 12-56: Rock Saw .............................................................................................. 253
Figure 12-57: Route Geometry .................................................................................... 256
Figure 12-58: Break-away Swivel ................................................................................ 258
Figure 12-59: Capstan Winch ...................................................................................... 261
Figure 12-60: Conduit Triangular Configuration ........................................................... 264
Figure 12-61: Conduit Cradled Fill Configuration ......................................................... 264
Figure 12-62: Sling or Harness.................................................................................... 265
Figure 13-1: Hardline Coax Key Characteristics .......................................................... 274
Figure 13-2: Heat Shrink Recovery ............................................................................. 276
Figure 13-3: Shrink Expanded vs Recovered .............................................................. 276
Figure 13-4: Non-Jacketed Shrink Application ............................................................. 278
Figure 13-5: Jacketed Shrink Application .................................................................... 278
Figure 13-6: Splice and Splice Block ........................................................................... 281
Figure 13-7: Coring and Stripping Tool (CablePrep Illustration)................................... 283
Figure 13-8: Coax Core and Center Conductor Length ............................................... 284
Figure 13-9: Tap Pin Connector Configuration ............................................................ 285
Figure 13-10: NO Back Loop ....................................................................................... 288
Figure 13-11: Corner Equipment Pole Configuration ................................................... 290
Figure 13-12: Tap Installation ...................................................................................... 292
Figure 13-13: Tap Installation with Through Cable ...................................................... 293
Figure 13-14: Node Splicing ........................................................................................ 295
Figure 13-15: Amplifier Splicing ................................................................................... 295
Figure 13-16: Active Device Input and Output Expansion Loops ................................. 296
Figure 13-17: Line Extender Splicing No Through Cable ............................................. 297
Figure 13-18: Line Extender Splicing with Through Cable ........................................... 298
Figure 13-19: Power Configuration and Current Draw Diagram ................................... 298
Figure 13-20: Power Supply Connectivity .................................................................... 300
xxix
Enterprise Standard
Figure 13-21: Actives Pedestal.................................................................................... 301

Figure 13-22: Line Extender Pedestal ......................................................................... 302
Figure 13-23: Coupler Pedestal Placement ................................................................. 303
Figure 13-24: Tap Pedestal Placement ....................................................................... 304
Figure 13-25: Underground Power Configuration ........................................................ 304
Figure 13-26: Power Insertion Power Supply to Underground Amplifier Pedestal........ 305
Figure 13-27: xNET Power Strapping Diagram............................................................ 306
Figure 14-1: Reframe for New Plant Above the Existing Plant ..................................... 309
Figure 14-2: Lower the Existing Plant .......................................................................... 310
Figure 14-3: Raise the Existing Plant .......................................................................... 311
Figure 14-4: Drive hook ............................................................................................... 312
Figure 14-5: Working at Angled Pole Locations ........................................................... 312
Figure 15-1: Stretch Tap Replacement Using Extension Connectors .......................... 322
Figure 15-2: Existing 9" Tap Installation ...................................................................... 323
Figure 15-3: Replacement 5" Widebody Tap for 9" Stretch Tap................................... 323
Figure 15-4: Extension connectors at a tap location .................................................... 324
Figure 15-5: Extension connectors at a splitter or directional coupler location ............. 324
Figure 17-1: Comcast Waiver Request Form............................................................... 336
xxx
Enterprise Standard
List of Acronyms
This document uses the following terms and definitions.
Term Definition
811 Call before you dig number

⁰C Celsius, Temperature scale
⁰F Farenheit, Temperature scale
A Amp or Ampere
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
ANSI American National Standards Institute
APWA American Public Works Association
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials is a standards group.
AWG American Wire Gauge
Business as Usual applied to existing plant prior to Fiber Deep or PON
BAU
networks
CPE Customer Premises Equipment
Downstream, Referenced to forward signal flow from the transmitter to
DS
the CPE
EHS Extra High Strength
FRC Fiber Reinforced Composite
FVD Foreign Voltage Detector
Forward in reference to downstream signal flow from the Headend to
FWD
the CPE
GHz GigaHertz 10^9
HDPE High Density Polyethylene
HFC Hybrid Fiber Coax
IM Integrated Messenger
MDPE Medium Density Polyethylene
MHz MegaHertz 10^6
MUTCD Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices
xxxi
Enterprise Standard
Term Definition
N+0 HFC mid-split or sub-split node only no additional amplification

HFC sub-split node plus additional amplifiers in cascade.
N+x
N = Node, x equals the number of amplifiers in cascade.
NEC National Electrical Code NFPA 70
ohm Standard international unit of electrical resistance
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act
OSP Outside Plant
PVC Polyvinyl chloride, Plastic Pipe
R Resistance
RBS Rated Breaking Strength
RF Radio Frequency
Return in reference to upstream signal flow from the CPE to the
RTN
receiver.
SCTE Society of Telecommunications Engineers
SS Sub-split spectrum (5-42 MHz return, 54 MHz -1.2 GHz forward)
SWP Sidewall Pressure, pulling tension efgfects on the sidewall of a conduit
US Referenced to return signal flow from the CPE to the HE.
UV Ultraviolet
V Volt or Voltage
VAC Volts Alternating Current
Xnet N+0 architecture
xxxii
Enterprise Standard
1. Overview
The purpose of this standard is to document the requirements and processes enabling the
construction of robust and reliable Comcast coaxial cable networks. This document
incorporates guidelines and specifications to be used as a technical reference and is the
Comcast formal standard for the engineering and construction guidelines for aerial and
underground coaxial cable plant.
Engineering specifications contained in the standard are considered up-to-date and
applicable when released. Engineering specifications can be superseded by local
governing authorities or updated specifications. As such, the Outside Plant (OSP)
Engineer or Construction Specialist ought to be aware that local requirements may vary
and where they conflict with this standard MUST be communicated to Corporate
CONNECT Engineering prior to being incorporated.
Comcast coaxial cable (cable) plant is a coax-based access network, connecting end-
users to equipment that provide the applications, services, and connectivity to networks
beyond Comcast that can create a larger access network. The cable plant will transport
electromagnetic signals that convey services to and from Comcast end users, our
customers. Comcast cable plant MUST be built according to and compliant with
established standards set by Comcast, national, state, local authorities, and local
ordinances.
This document is not all inclusive. Certain aspects of the engineering and construction
guidelines will not be covered in detail. Additional documents will be referenced that can
provide the detail required.
Objective of Standard
This document establishes mandatory guidelines governing the construction of coaxial
cable plant in Comcast owned networks or operated in partnership with other entities.
• Provide guidelines to engineer and construct a coaxial cable plant to meet or
exceed Comcast and customer expectations.
• Standardize Comcast construction practices and procedures.
• Provide Comcast personnel and contractors with the necessary information to build
a reliable and long-life expectancy coaxial cable plant.
• Achieve plant construction and operational quality improvements.
Scope of this Standard

The specifications in this document will address processes and procedures for:
• Aerial coaxial cable plant construction
• Underground coaxial cable plant construction
1
Enterprise Standard
Guidelines and specifications within the standard document DO NOT create contractual
obligations and/or responsibilities of Comcast or business partners. Provisions may be
incorporated by reference into an agreement such that the provisions impose obligations
or responsibilities on Comcast personnel and business partners in addition to those
described in the written agreement.
Applicability of Standard
The contents of this document are intended solely for the use of Comcast employees and
its business partners for the purposes of design, construction, implementation, operation
and maintenance of systems that are Comcast owned or operated in partnership with
other entities.
This document applies to Comcast new build, upgrade, rebuild, and system extension
construction activity. All specifications MUST be applied in their entirety.
Applies to:
• Comcast Engineering, Construction, and Technical Support personnel
• Comcast business partners and subordinates
• All additional personnel associated with the construction and maintenance of the
Comcast network.
Deviations
Specification and configurations referenced in this document are the Comcast standard,
and cannot be modified in their implementation. A situation requiring modification to these
specifications, or where their implementation may not result in deployment of a cost-
effective solution, MUST be brought to the attention of the Division and Corporate
CONNECT Engineering groups. Deviation from the standards prescribed in this document
shall require approval by Comcast Corporate CONNECT Engineering.
Updates and Changes

This standard is a living document. The criteria contained in this standard are subject to
revision and updating as warranted by advances in coaxial cable plant construction
techniques and technology.
Future changes to the contents of this document will be communicated in the form of:
• Addenda addressing specific new areas as appropriate
• Engineering bulletins, or regular document version updates
2
Enterprise Standard
Conformance Notation
Throughout this document, the words that are used to define the significance of
requirements are in normal font and CAPITALIZED BOLD. Dependent upon context the
word may be in normal font, non-capitalized and non-boldened. These words are listed
in Table 1-1.
Table 1-1: Conformance Notation
Notation Meaning
MUST Word means that the item is an absolute requirement of this standard.
MUST NOT Phrase means that the item is an absolute prohibition of this standard.
NOT Word indicates a negative usage or coverage of a specific topic or is a

prohibition within the document.
Word is used to express condition, obligation, propriety, or expediency.

Word means that there may exist valid reasons or circumstances to
SHOULD
ignore this item, but the full implications MUST be understood, and the
case carefully weighed before choosing a different course.
Phrase means that there may exist valid reasons in particular

circumstances when the listed behavior is NOT acceptable or even
SHOULD NOT
useful, but the full implications MUST be understood, and the case
carefully weighed before choosing a different course.
This word means that this item is truly optional. Based on local
requirements an optional method may be used with approval from local
MAY construction engineering.
The change MUST enhance the network life expectancy and operation.
MUST NOT degrade the network.
Pre-requisites
Personnel using the guidance presented in this document should have prior experience in
the planning, engineering or installation of trunk and distribution coaxial cable in the
network.
Personnel MUST be familiar with applicable safety regulations, practices and policies.
Personnel using the document to gain coaxial construction knowledge ought to be teaming
up with and communicating with personnel having construction experience.
3
Enterprise Standard
2. Regulations and Codes

To construct a cost effective and reliable coaxial cable network, there MUST be an
understanding of the applicable regulations, codes, ordinances, statutes, procedures, and
specifications for the locality in which work is performed. Materials selected will comply
with the regulations and codes. All Comcast and business partner construction personnel
SHOULD be familiar with the regulations and codes. List below is an overview of the
possible regulations. Locally others MAY apply:
• All federal and national codes and regulations.
• All state, county and municipal codes, ordinances or statutes.
• All local utility codes
• All manufacturer’s installation procedures and specifications for installed
equipment.
• National Electrical Code (NEC) (Versions and specific requirements of the code
might be applied or not applied locally.)
• National Electric Safety Code (NESC) (Versions and specific requirements of the
code might be applied or not applied by the state or locally.)
• OSHA, national and state safety requirements MUST be followed
The most recent documents pertinent to the construction of the network MUST be
available and understood. The system MUST be constructed under all the provisions they
contain. Provisions contained within any governing document does not excuse the
employee or business partner for failure to conform.
4
Enterprise Standard
3. Safety
Summary
The safety of Comcast employees, business partners and the general public will receive
first consideration in the performance of work. Accident prevention MUST be a part of
everyday operations. When on the job, automatically think of the hazards involved
and of the appropriate safety precautions.
All personnel involved with the construction of the plant MUST be familiar with all
applicable regulations and codes.
• Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA)
• National Electrical Safety Code (NESC),
• Municipal
• State
• Local
• Comcast safety practices and policies.
Compliance is mandatory. Failure to comply can result in life-threatening injury or death
to Comcast personnel, business partners or the general public.
To reduce the chance of accidental injury:
• All personnel involved in the installation of the coaxial network MUST be thoroughly
familiar with the operation of the equipment and construction apparatus being used.
• Inspect all equipment (ladders, bucket trucks, reel trailers, etc.) for defects and
replace if found in an unsound condition.
• Use only company-approved equipment for lighting, heating, and other operations.
• Arrange or secure any material in a bucket truck or on a ladder so that it cannot fall.
Materials and equipment MUST NOT unnecessarily impede pedestrian or vehicular
traffic.
• Allocate the appropriate number and type of safety personnel and associated
equipment. Such personnel and equipment MAY include:
o Flagmen
o Pilot vehicles
o Roadside barricades, warning signs, traffic cones, beacon lights, etc.
o ABC-rated fire extinguishers on board all associated vehicles.
• Use protective leather gloves and, if necessary, lineman’s rubber gloves. Use the
leather gloves when climbing or descending a pole, and when working with sharp
instruments or materials. Wear rubber gloves when working near exposed
electrical circuits.
5
Enterprise Standard
• Use a safety harness on all bucket trucks and aerial lifts. A body belt and safety
strap for the bucket or platform MUST be used when the equipment is in operation
to minimize the chance of injury.
• Before climbing a pole, inspect it for significant deterioration and safety hazards
(splintering, insect nests, sharp protrusions, etc.).
• Position all motorized equipment so that exhausts are directed away from the
location where most work will be done.
• Personnel normally SHOULD not remain in an area where a cable is being pulled
around a piece of hardware under tension. A craftsman can remain in such an area
(for example, to observe the alignment of a cable around a corner block), if they
stay clear of the hardware under tension and they have a clear path to safety.
• Keep hands free of tools or materials when climbing or descending a pole or ladder.
• Do not step on cables, cable enclosures, or suspended equipment which might
provide unsafe footholds.
• Always lower cable blocks and other equipment from strand level with a handline.
Additional safety precautions are included within the sections addressing the handling of
specific equipment and processes.
Note: All field technicians MUST have a Foreign Voltage Detector in good working order
and MUST confirm the presence or absence of any Foreign Voltages prior to beginning
work at the jobsite.
General
Construction of a broadband cable system requires a substantial amount of manpower,
tools and equipment. Underground and aerial construction will expose the manpower,
tools and equipment to hazards, dependent on the conditions and circumstances that
exist in the field.
Construction personnel MUST have experience in hazard recognition and sound
judgement in hazard avoidance to prevent harm to the construction crew, general public,
cable plant, and other utilities.
Note: The Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) defines a qualified
employee as “any worker who by reason of training and experience has demonstrated his
ability to safely perform his duties.” Only a qualified employee can be assigned duties that
could cause harm or potential harm to the aforementioned people and facilities.
This manual cannot identify the many hazards that exist in the construction environment,
nor can it dictate the caution required with the tools and equipment in field conditions.
This manual is composed with the assumption that the Comcast and business partner
construction personnel performing the work are qualified employees.
There are multiple national codes and standards that are applicable during the
construction of a Comcast network.
6
Enterprise Standard
• OSHA Safety and Health Standards applies to work in telecommunications centers

and the telecommunications field installations.
• National Electric Safety Code (NESC), generally applies to outside plant
construction.
• National Electric Code (NEC) applies to building utilization wiring, i.e., inside plant
construction. The NEC applies specifically to but not limited to plant that is within
or on public and private buildings or other structures.
Municipal, state, county, and local codes are often made applicable to the construction of
cable systems or work that involves their respective properties and rights-of-way. Pole
Lease Agreements often stipulate specific practices related to safety.
Grades of Construction
The NESC defines grades of construction based on strength requirements for reasons of
safety.
• Section 24 of the NESC identifies construction grades B, C, and N.
• Grade B is the highest grade followed by C and N.
o B: Railway feeder and trolley-contact circuit conductors
o C: Communication circuit conductors and cables
o N: Service drops and cables
• Grade C construction typically applies to communication system lines including
broadband coaxial cable and fiber optic cable. Construction grades B or C may be
applicable dependent on the situations that exist.
If more than one grade of construction applies to a situation, the higher grade will apply.
A qualified engineer MUST evaluate required construction and dictate the grade of
construction. The strength requirements for the various grades of construction are defined
in Section 26 of the NESC.
National Regulation and Code Availability

OSHA standards can be obtained from the:
SUPERINTENDENT OF DOCUMENTS
U.S. G OVERNMENT PRINTING O FFICE
W ASHINGTON, DC 20402
PHONE: (202) 783-3238
https://www. OSHA. GOV
The generally applicable OSHA standards are found in:

• Title 29 CFR Parts 1901.1 to 1910.441 General Industry, (OSHA), Order No. 869-
019-00111-5
7
Enterprise Standard
• Trenching and Excavation Safety (OSHA 2226-10R 2015), Order No. 029-016-
00125-5
• Underground Construction Tunneling (OSHA 3115-06R)
• Stairways and Ladders (OSHA 3124-12R)
NESC can be obtained from the:
IEEE SERVICE CENTER
445 HOES LANE
P.O. BOX 1331
PISCATAWAY, NJ 08855-1331
PHONE: (732)-981-0060
https://standards. IEEE. ORG
NEC Handbook can be obtained from the:
NATIONAL F IRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION
1 BATTERYMARCH PARK
P.O. BOX 9146
Q UINCY, MA 02269-3555
PHONE: (800) 344-3555
https://www. NFPA. ORG
OSHA Standards Section 1910.268

OSHA Standards were established in 1970 to help ensure workplace safety. The
Standards are federal regulations that are intended to enable employers and employees
to recognize, understand, and control hazards in the workplace. Standards have been
established for general industry while some sections of the standards are dedicated to
specific industries such as telecommunications.
Regional OSHA offices are identified in Appendix A.
An outline of the OSHA standards for telecommunications, Section 1910.286
Telecommunications, can be found in Appendix B.
Note: This section is not all inclusive of the OSHA standards that apply to cable
systems.
Purpose of Section 1910.268

The purpose of OSHA standards Section 1910.268 Telecommunications is noted in the
Section as follows:
This section sets forth safety and health standards that apply to the work conditions,
practices, means, methods, operations, installations, and processes performed at
telecommunications centers and telecommunications field installations, which are located
outdoors or in building spaces used for such field installations.
8
Enterprise Standard
Scope of Section 1910.268

The scope is identified in Section ·1910.268 as a continued definition of
telecommunication “center’’ and telecommunications “field” installation:
• “Center’’ work includes the installation, operation, maintenance, rearrangement and
removal of communications equipment in telecommunications switching centers.
• “Field” work includes the installation, operation, maintenance, rearrangement and
removal of conductors and other equipment used for signal or communication
service, and of their supporting or containing structures, overhead or underground,
on public or private rights-of-way, including buildings or other structures.
National Electric Safety Code (NESC)

The NESC typically identifies the construction techniques and materials necessary in
outside plant construction of electric supply or communication cable systems. The
NESC is an American National Standard that has been written by a group of
professionals that are concerned about the Standard’s scope and provisions. The
NESC has been adopted by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
Note: All references to the NESC in this manual are from the 2017 edition.
Pay special attention to NESC Table 232- 1, Vertical Clearance of Wires, Conductors,
and Cables above Ground, Roadway, Rail, or Water Surfaces which is in part
reproduced in Table 3-1: Clearances. Additional clearance information can be found in
Section 9.4.
9
Enterprise Standard
Table 3-1: Clearances
Vertical Clearance of Wires, Conductors, and Cables Above Ground, Roadway, Rail or
Water Surfaces
Non-insulated communication
Nature of surface underneath
conductors, supply cables or 0 to 750
wire, conductors or cables
V meeting Rules 230C2 or 230C3
1. Track rails of railroads (except

electrified railroads using overhead 24.0 feet
trolley conductors)
2. Roads, streets, and other areas

16.0 feet
subject to truck traffic
3. Driveways, parking lots, and alleys 16.0 feet
4. Other land traversed by vehicles, such

as cultivated, grazing, forest, orchard, 16.0 feet
etc.
5. Spaces and ways subject to

12.0 feet
pedestrians or restricted traffic only
6. Water areas not suitable for sail

boating or where sail boating is 14.5 feet
prohibited
7. Water areas suitable for sail boating,

including lakes, ponds, reservoirs, tidal
14.5 feet
waters, rivers, streams, and canals with
an unobstructed surface area of:
a. Less than 20 acres 18.0 feet
b. Over 20 to 200 acres 26.0 feet
C. Over 200 to 2000 acres 32.0 feet
d. Over 2000 acres 38.0 feet
8. Public or private land water areas Clearance above ground shall be 5 feet
posted for rigging or launching greater than in 7 above, for the type of water
sailboats areas served by the launching site.
10
Enterprise Standard
Purpose of the NESC

The purpose of the NESC (2017) is identified in Section 1, 010. Purpose:
A. The purpose of the NESC is the practical safeguarding of persons and utility
facilities during the installation, operation, and maintenance of electric supply and
communication facilities, under specified conditions.
NESC rules are globally recognized and intended to provide a practical standard of safe
practices that can be adopted by public utilities, private utilities, state or local utility
commissions or public service commissions, or other boards or bodies having control over
safe practices employed in the design, installation, operation, and maintenance of electric
supply, communication, street and area lighting, signal, or railroad utility facilities.
B. NESC rules contain the basic provisions, under specified conditions, that are
considered necessary for the safeguarding of:
1. The public,
2. Utility workers (employees and contractors), and
3. Utility facilities.
C. This code is not intended as a design specification or as an instruction manual.
Scope of the NESC

The scope of the NESC (2017) is also identified in Section 1 of the NESC as follows:
1. Supply and communication facilities (including metering) and associated work
practices employed by a public or private electric supply, communications, railway,
trolley, street and area lighting, traffic signal (or other signal), irrigation district or other
community owned utility, or a similar utility in the exercise of its function as a utility.
2. The generation, transmission, and distribution of electricity, lumens, communication
signals, and communication data through public and private utility systems that are
installed and maintained under the exclusive control of utilities or their authorized
representatives.
Note: There are six additional points in the NESC 2017 scope.
NESC 2017 rules cover the outside plant construction and safety. What is not covered
in the NESC may be covered in the National Electrical Code.
11
Enterprise Standard
National Electric Code (NEC)

The NEC typically identifies the construction techniques and materials necessary in
building wiring requirements, i.e., inside plant construction, of fiber optic or coaxial cable
systems. The NEC has been developed by the National Fire Protection Association’s
(NFPA’s) National Electric Code committee. Committee members are professionals from
the electrical industry. The NEC addresses safety from fire and electrocution. The NEC
has been adopted by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
The purpose of the NEC is identified in NFPA (2017) Article 90-1 of the NEC as follows:
“The purpose of this Code (NEC) is the practical safeguarding of persons and property
from hazards arising from the use of electricity.”
Pole Lease Agreements

Cable system operators often enter into contractual agreements with the owners of utility
poles. The pole owners are municipalities, telephone companies, and power companies.
There are often specific safety practices that are specified in the contract. These safety
practices may be more restrictive than other codes and standards. The contractual
agreements MUST be investigated for safety requirements. The requirements MUST be
interpreted, communicated and accordingly observed.
State, Local, and Municipal Codes

State, local and municipal codes may also apply to the construction of the cable system.
These codes will vary by location. These codes will have to be identified and applied as
required on a location specific basis.
Governing Code or Regulation

The more restrictive code or regulation MUST always be practiced.
12
Enterprise Standard
4. Tools and Equipment

Summary
The purpose of this section of the Coaxial Construction Standard is to introduce a few of
the tools and equipment that are used in the construction methods discussed in this
manual. Not all tools and equipment used in the construction of coaxial plant will be
presented. Specialized tools specific to coaxial cable construction will be presented.
Note: This section is not intended to be a user’s guide for the tools. The personnel
operating the tools and equipment MUST be thoroughly familiar with the operation and
possible hazards associated with the use of the tool.
Comcast Specifications
No Comcast specifications related to this section.
Aerial Construction Tools

Table 4-1 explains and shows the tools used for aerial coaxial cable construction.
Table 4-1: Aerial Construction Tools with Tool Illustrations
(multiple page table)
Bender, Mechanical
Preferred method of placing an expansion loop.
Used to insert bends for expansion loops into the coaxial
cable. The bender tool uses a mechanical wrenching action
to bend the expansion loop into the cable prior to lashing or
during splicing.
Depending upon the vendor, mechanical benders can be
adjustable to provide for possible variation in loop size.
Mechanical benders create consistent expansion loop forming
and sizing and increase the life of the cable.
Hand Bender, Board (Reference Only) DO NOT USE

Used to bend expansion loops into coaxial cable. Made from
wood or molded plastic. The expansion loops made by this
tool should be compatible with the expansion loops made by
the mechanical benders identified in this section.
Note: Hand bending boards are not consistent and cannot
properly stress the expansion loop into place reducing the life
of the cable.
13
Enterprise Standard
Block, (90 Degree) Corner

Used to route cables through inside or outside corners up to
90 degrees. Using the block will place minimal drag the cable
due to the corners and ensure that the minimum bend radius
of the cable is not exceeded. Corner block equipment utilizes
specialized mounting hardware dependent on the specific use
of the block.
Block, (45 Degree) Corner

Used to pull cables through inside or side corners up to 45
degrees. Using the block will place minimal drag on the cable
due to the corners and ensure that the minimum bend radius
of the cable is not exceeded.
The corner block is used to guide cables from the cable trailer
or a reel stand when used in place of a set-up chute. Corner
block equipment utilizes specialized mounting hardware
dependent on the specific use of the equipment.
Note: A 45-degree block MAY be used in place of a set-up chute.
Block, Single Roller

Typically used to support a single cable prior to lashing. MAY
be used when cables are lashed directly to strand or in over-
lash applications.
New construction on strand, single roller blocks MAY be
locked onto the strand.
In over-lash applications, this block MUST NOT be pushed in
front of the lasher. Multiple small cables can be supported
within the single roller block although cable positioning prior to
lashing is a concern.
Block, Economy
This inexpensive block is used to support a single cable prior to
lashing. The block can be used when cables are lashed
directly to strand or in over-lash applications dependent on the
specific block used.
14
Enterprise Standard
Multiple Cable Block

Block is used to support multiple cables in independent
rollers. Multiple cable blocks make a cable positioner
unnecessary when lashing multiple cables.
Pole Mount Cable Block

This block is used to install self-support cable. It is
attached to the pole hardware to support the self-support
cable as the cable is pulled.
Note: Do not use at a setup pole. The cable will be
damaged.
Cross-over Bracket
Used to support corner blocks at aerial crossovers.
Set-Up Bracket
Used to support a 45-degree corner block or a set-up chute
mid-span.
Strand Brake
Strand brake is selectively placed at pole hardware
locations to prevent dangerous strand sag while strand is
being installed. The strand brake allows the strand that is
being pulled into place to move in only one direction, which
is the direction of the strand pull. Use of strand brakes in
conjunction with reel brakes effectively limits the amounts
of strand sag between poles during strand installation.
15
Enterprise Standard
Set-up Chute
A set-up chute is used to guide cables from the cable trailer
or reel stand. The cable trailer or reel stand MUST be in
line with the strand, otherwise a 45-degree corner block can
be used for this purpose.
A chute requires specialized mounting hardware dependent
on the specific use of the equipment
Note: Not recommended for stationary reel applications. A
45-degree corner block MUST be used.
Anchor Rod Driver

An Anchor Rod Driver is a motor driven drill that couples
onto an anchor rod to directly drill the anchor rod into the
earth.
Dynamometer
A dynamometer is used to measure the pulling tension
applied to cables.
Cable Guide
Cable guides are used to guide or feed the cable into the
lasher in drive-off applications. Cable guides can be used
during the installation of cables directly to new strand or in
over-lash applications. The guide may be pushed in front
of the lasher with a cable block pusher that is pulled in front
of the lasher or physically attached to the lasher.
Note: Failure to use a shotgun or cable block pusher can
result in damage to the cable as it enters the lasher.
Cable Lasher
Cable lashers are used to secure or lash cable directly to
installed strand. If cable is existing, the lasher will lash new
cables onto the existing cable or cable bundles. This is
known as over-lashing.
Note: Lashers are specific based on the strand and cable
or cable bundle size. Improper lasher size or adjustment
can damage cables.
16
Enterprise Standard
Lay-up Stick
This equipment consists of sections of fiberglass poles with
interconnection hardware. Lay-up sticks are used to lift
cable blocks and cables into place utilizing lay-up stick
heads.
Cable Block Lifter

A cable block lifter head is used in conjunction with a lay-up
stick to place assorted cable blocks mid-span along the
strand.
Cable Lifter
A cable lifter head is used in conjunction with a lay-up stick
to lift cables into place. The lifter ensures that the cables
that are lifted are not damaged by micro bending or by
exceeding the minimum bend radii.
Cable Positioner
Cable positioners are pushed in front of a lasher by a cable
block pusher to uniformly position multiple cables that are
being lashed.
A cable positioner is referred to as a magic box.
Multiple Cables Puller

Puller allows multiple cables to be pulled into place when
lashing cables directly to strand. The multiple cable puller is
equipped with a strand brake to prevent sagging of cables
as the pulling tension is released. Swivels allow the cables
that are being pulled to independently swivel.
Over-lash Cable Puller

An over-lash puller allows multiple cables to be pulled into
place in overlash applications. Swivels allow the cables that
are being pulled to move and rotate independently.
17
Enterprise Standard
Cable Block Pusher

A cable block pusher is used to push equipment ahead of a
pulled lasher.
A cable block pusher is also referred to as a shotgun or shuttle.
Wire Raising Tool

Wire raising tools have several uses, lifting cable blocks to the
strand and raise the strand into place for initial installation onto
the pole hardware.
Note: The wire raising tool may also be used to lift cables into
place.
• USE WITH GREAT CARE.
• Do not damage the cable.
• Keep away from power.
Subsurface Construction Tools

Underground construction tools and equipment consist primarily of mechanized
equipment. Mechanized equipment will excavate the ground opening a trench.
• Conduit is placed in the trench and is then secured by burying.
o If a conduit is placed, the cable MUST be installed into the conduit later.
o If a cable-in-conduit is placed the conduit and cable are jointly placed.
Table 4-2: Subsurface Construction Tools
Trencher
A trencher removes soil, making an open trench. The soil
removed, known as spoil, is placed adjacent to the trench.
The trencher can be equipped with a blade to facilitate the
pushing of the spoil back into the trench after the cable or
duct has been installed.
Vibratory Plow
Vibratory plows use a vibrating blade to split the ground.
The conduit is routed down through the vibrating blade and
placed at the bottom of the split made by the vibrating plow
blade. A plow tractor carries the plow and provides forward
movement for the plow.
18
Enterprise Standard
Static Plow
Static plows split the ground by forward movement of the
plow tractor. The conduit is routed down through the static
plow blade and is placed at the bottom of the split made by
the plow blade. A plow tractor carries the plow and provides
forward movement for the plow
Note: The conduit can be transported by the plow tractor.
Cable Winch
A cable winch is a powered capstan used to pull
cable. This equipment will often be used as an
intermediate assist in pulling cables that are very
long or have considerable drag.
Cable Shoe
A cable shoe is used to route cable through
manholes while the cable is being pulled into
place. Placement of the cable shoes will prevent
the rubbing of the cable on obstacles within the
manhole.
Trench Tamper
The trench tamper is a specialized tool that
allows compaction of back-fill soil. It typically has
a weighted tamping head and long handle.
Cable Sheave
Used to facilitate the movement of cable that is
being pulled into place through a manhole.
Cable sheaves are freewheeling adding little
drag to the cable that is being installed. The
placement of the sheave will prevent the rubbing
of the cable on obstacles within the manhole that
could damage the cable.
19
Enterprise Standard
Tools and Equipment Common to Aerial and Subsurface

Construction
Table 4-3: Common Tools to Aerial and Subsurface Construction
Reel Brake
Reel brakes are used on a cable trailer arbor to prevent
uneven cable payout and possible cable kinking or micro
bending. Sag in cable being pulled into place can be
controlled by proper braking.
Cable Grip
Used to attach a pulling line directly to a cable. Cable grips
are specific to cable size.
Break-away Swivel
Break-away swivels allow cables that are being pulled to
swivel and are used to ensure that the cables are not over-
tensioned during pulling. The swivel will unlink, i.e., yield,
when a specified pulling tension is exceeded. Break-away
swivels are manufactured in a variety of yield strengths.
The swivels are used in pulling cables in underground and
aerial applications
Reel Stands
Reel stands are used to support cable reels to allow cable
payout. The reel stand is preferred in locations not
accessible to cable trailers. Reel stands are also referred to
as reel bucks.
• Aerial pay-off over the top
• Underground pay-off is under the bottom
Cable Trailer
Cable Trailers are used to move cable reels to the location
of cable installation. The cable trailer is pulled by a vehicle.
• The cable reel is supported on the cable trailer by a reel arbor that is passed through the
center hole of the cable reel.
• Cable can payout directly from the trailer.
• Reel brakes that are placed on the reel arbor can be adjusted to control the payout of
cable from the cable trailer.
Cable trailers can typically be loaded without the use of mechanized equipment.
20
Enterprise Standard
Coaxial Splicing Tools

Coaxial splicing tools are specialized tools that allow the joining of cables to equipment or
to other cables. Coaxial cables have connectors that are specific to each size and type of
cable. Selection of the correct tool for the application is required for a successful splice
or connection to occur.
Coring Tool
Coring tools are used to remove the dielectric
from the coaxial cable to the depth required by the
specific connector being in stalled.
Outer Conductor Cutting Tool

These tools remove only the aluminum outer conductor of the cable. The dielectric is exposed
after the outer conductor is removed.
Center Conductor Cleaner

Center conductor cleaners are used to scrape the
dielectric remnants from the center conductor
after the dielectric has been removed by other
means.
These devices MUST be manufactured from a
material that will not mar the center conductor.
Center conductor cleaner component MUST NOT
be metallic.
Note: A piece of plexiglass is often used as a
center conductor cleaner.
Jacket Stripping Tool

Jacket stripping tools are used to remove the
outer polyethylene jacket from the cable. Use of a
jacket stripping tool is preferred over the use of a
knife to remove the jacket due to the tendency of
the knife to score the aluminum outer conductor.
Preparation Tools
Preparation tools perform several splicing steps simultaneously. These tools cut the outer
conductor and center conductor to length while coring the dielectric from the cable to the
proper depth. Removal of the dielectric remnants from the center conductor and cutting
the jacket to length MUST be subsequently done with other tools.
21
Enterprise Standard
5. Unloading, Inspecting and Warehousing of Construction

Equipment
Summary
Coaxial network construction materials are easily damaged if they are not handled and
stored properly. Most of the equipment used to construct a Comcast coaxial network are
heavy and bulky to handle. Comcast personnel MUST observe all safety guidelines when
handling the delivery, storage, and deployment of the materials in the warehouse to the
field. Protective safety equipment is recommended, steel toed shoes, heavy gloves, back
supports, and safety glasses.
Note: Always follow established inventory receiving and shipping processes and safety
procedures.
• Materials on reels are never to be dropped in any manner.
• Do not unload a truck or container by rolling reels off the trailer floor and onto a pile
of automobile or truck tires.
• Visually inspect all received materials for possible shipping damage as it is
unloaded.
• Material MUST be stored so as to not be damaged.
Construction Materials
If construction material is being received and has been stacked for shipping, it MUST be
carefully unstacked to prevent damage and possible injury. A forklift with an experienced
operator MUST be used when unstacking the materials for receipt into the warehouse.
While unloading the contents of a truck or shipping container, material MUST never be
dropped in any manner. It is NOT RECOMMENDED and is FORBIDDEN to unload a
truck or container by dropping construction material off the trailer. The impact can cause
serious injury to personnel. Always use ample personnel to safely unload material
shipments.
Unloading at a dock, use a pallet jack or forklift to remove all material on pallets. If the
back of the trailer and dock are not at the same height, use an appropriate loading ramp
to compensate for the difference.
Unloading without a dock, a ramp MUST be used. The ramp MUST be strong enough
to support the weight of the unloading personnel and the heaviest materials that are
expected to be unloaded. The ramp MUST have raised sides to prevent the dollies and
pallet jacks from rolling off the sides of the ramp.
• The ramp MUST be long enough to allow control of the momentum of the cable as
it rolls on the ramp.
22
Enterprise Standard
• A pulley system connected to the sides of the truck and to a shaft passing through
the center of the reels can help control the momentum of the rolling reels. With this
method, two workers can usually control movement of the heaviest reel.
DO NOT DROP reels or other materials off the back of the truck onto a stack
of tires, onto the ground or any other surface. The impact can injure personnel
and damage the cable and reel. Always have enough personnel to safely unload
shipments of cable.
All reels are marked with an arrow indicating the direction in which the reel MUST be
rolled. Roll only in the indicated direction.
Coaxial Cable Warehousing

If coaxial cable is being received and has been stacked for shipping, it MUST be carefully
unstacked to prevent cable damage and possible injury. A forklift with an experienced
operator MUST be used when unstacking the cable reels.
It is important that reels of cable are never dropped in any manner. The weight of the reel
and cable may cause a deflection of the reel flange when it strikes the landing surface
causing a flattening deformation of the cable in the wraps adjacent to the deflected flange.
Note: It is not recommended to unload a truck or container by rolling reels off the trailer
floor and onto a pile of automobile or truck tires.
Unloading at a dock, use a pallet jack or forklift to remove all cable on pallets. Remove
any blocking materials for the individual rows of cable and roll the reels onto the dock. If
the back of the trailer and dock are not at the same height, use an appropriate loading
ramp to compensate for the difference.
Unloading without a dock, a ramp MUST be used. The ramp MUST be strong enough
to support the weight of the unloading personnel and the heaviest cable reels. The ramp
MUST have raised sides to prevent the cable reels from rolling off the sides of the ramp.
The ramp MUST be long enough to allow momentum control of the cable as it rolls down
the ramp. A pulley system connected to the sides of the truck and to a shaft passing
through the center of the reels can help control the momentum of the rolling reels. With
this method, two workers can usually control movement of the heaviest reel.
DO NOT drop reels off the back of the truck onto a stack of tires, onto the
ground or any other surface. The impact can injure personnel and damage the
cable. Always have ample personnel to safely unload shipments of cable.
Storage and Stacking of Cable Reels

Cables can be stored indoors or outdoors. When storing reels of cable, they MUST remain
properly wrapped to prevent damage from careless handling during storage. The cables
may be stacked on flange or stored upright on the rolling edge.
23
Enterprise Standard
When cable is stored outside, the ground ought to be level and have good drainage to
reduce the possibility of deterioration of the reel flanges.
Reels stored on their rolling edges should be lined up in rows with the flanges touching
each other so the flanges do not overlap and accidentally damage the cable in an adjacent
reel. This alignment, flange to flange, will help prevent possible damage to the cable once
the protective cover has been removed.
Caution: Wrapper will not protect the cable from forklift impacts or similar carelessness.
If storage space is limited and it becomes necessary to stack reels to conserve room,
check with the vendor for the maximum stacking heights, see an example in Table 5-1.
This applies when cable is moved, shipped, or stored. Ensure that the maximum stacking
heights are not exceeded. Consideration MUST be given to the maximum height as well
as the total weight of the stack.
Table 5-1: Example Reel Stacking Height Specifications
Maximum Maximum
QR
Storage Height (Reels) Loading Height (Reels)
QR 540 5 3
QR 715 5 3
QR 860 5 3
MC2
MO500 6 4
MO650 6 4
MO750 5 3
P3
P3 500 6 4
P3 625 6 4
P3 750 5 3
P3 875 5 3
Care MUST be taken to minimize or eliminate damage to the cable whether placing in
storage or retrieving from storage. Use only personnel who are trained in the handling of
the coaxial cable and are aware of the safety precautions that MUST be used when
transitioning coaxial cable into and out of storage.
24
Enterprise Standard
Visual Inspection
In addition to making sure that the proper cable was shipped from the factory, it is
necessary to inspect each reel for possible shipping damage as it is unloaded. Usually, if
there is no visible sign of damage to the reel wrapper or reel flange, the cable is most likely
undamaged. If there is any doubt, remove the wrapper carefully and visually examine the
cable for any signs of damage such as dents, punctures or flattening.
Inspect every reel for damage as it is unloaded. Suspect cable MUST be set aside for a
more detailed inspection before the shipping documents are signed. Make sure to note
the orientation and condition of the reel in your inspection.
• If cable damage is visible or suspected and if it is decided to accept the shipment,
note the damage and the reel number on ALL copies of the bill of lading.
• If the damage is too extensive to accept the shipment, advise the carrier’s driver that
the shipment is being refused because of the damage. Immediately notify the vendor
so arrangements can be made for a replacement shipment.
Shipping and Deployment

The same care that was used when the material was received MUST be executed when
transitioning to a different warehousing location or to the field for deployment.
Components, such as the coax, MUST be handled correctly or performance may not be
adequate when deployed. Correct handling of equipment will result in an efficient, cost-
effective deployment.
25
Enterprise Standard
6. Comcast Coaxial Architecture Trunk and Distribution

Concepts
Summary
Within Comcast, fiber and cable are the primary components used for the transmission of
broadband signals in the network. The industry uses the term Hybrid Fiber Coax or Cable
(HFC) to describe a broadband network that utilizes optical cable and coaxial cable.
Signals are generated at a distribution facility and transmitted over a fiber link. The fiber
link is terminated at a node that will perform an optical to electrical conversion. The
electrical signal is transmitted within an RF envelope defined for the system.
The coaxial section of the plant is two-way.
• Forward (FWD) or downstream signals from the headend are received at the
customer premises equipment (CPE) and transitioned to useful services for the
customer.
• The CPE will transmit return (RTN) signals to the headend where they are
processed and transitioned to their proper termination within the Comcast network
or to an outside entity.
Note: One-way distribution is very rare within the Comcast footprint. Although very rare,
construction practices MUST be maintained for new construction or maintenance.
Highly detailed CONNECT HFC architectural specifications are available on the standards
portal.
Architecture
Coaxial cable construction is defined by the following architectures, HFC sub split (N+x),
Xnet (N+0), Fiber Deep (N+0). Each architecture is based on the network requirements.
The goal of using these architectures is to support the business in the most cost effective,
reliable and technologically advanced way. During the lifetime of the plant new services,
using new signaling and modulation methods, will be introduced. If the network has been
built and deployed based on the guidance presented in this manual, the network can
support the business for many years.
HFC BAU Sub-split Architecture

HFC Business as Usual (BAU) is an architecture that supports N+x, with “N” equals the
node and “x” the number of amplifiers deployed in series after the node. It is a sub-split
network with FWD bandwidth (BW) of 54 MHz to 1.0 GHz and an RTN bandwidth 5 MHz
to 42 MHz. Fiber in the HFC BAU architecture is from the headend or hub to the node.
26
Enterprise Standard
Beyond the node the architecture is based on a coaxial tree and branch network with
additional amplification in the network.
Figure 6-1: Tree and Branch Architecture (N+x)
Note: HFC BAU upper band-pass can be 550, 650, 750, 870 MHz or 1 GHz.
Xnet (N+0) Mid-split architecture

Xnet is a mid-split, node + 0 amplifiers (N+0) architecture. The mid-split FWD BW is 102
MHz – 1.2 GHz and the RTN BW is 5 – 85 MHz. Xnet applies to a Comcast upgrade,
rebuild, system extension and brownfield SFU/MDU plant construction. Beyond the node,
the architecture is based on a passive coaxial tree and branch network with NO
amplification in the distribution network.
Figure 6-2: Xnet (N+0)
Fiber Deep (N+0) Sub-split Architecture

Fiber deep N+0 is a sub-split fiber deep architecture. It is a node + 0 amplifiers in a sub-
split spectrum configuration. The FWD BW is 54 MHZ – 1.0 GHz and the RTN BW is 5 –
42 MHz. FD N+0 applies to a Comcast upgrade new build or greenfield residential and
SFU/MDU plant construction. Beyond the node, the architecture is based on a passive
coaxial tree and branch network with NO amplification in the distribution network.
Figure 6-3: Fiber Deep Sub-split (N+0)
27
Enterprise Standard
Coaxial Trunk and Distribution Cables

Coaxial cable falls into a classification of cabling called an "RF-transmission line," which
means it has special physical characteristics that allow it to efficiently transmit radio
frequency (RF) energy. It is the physical characteristics of a coaxial RF-transmission line
that allow it to transport rather than radiate high-frequency signals.
In the case of coaxial cable, the size and spacing of the conductors, as well as their
physical symmetry, give the cable its ability to carry RF energy. Therefore, anything that
disrupts the physical integrity of the coaxial cable will impair its abilities as an RF-
transmission medium.
The greater the bandwidth carried by this cable, the more critical these physical
characteristics are to the proper transmission of RF. Proper plant construction and
installation of the cable connectors is critical for the performance of coaxial cable.
Trunk Cable
Trunk cables are used when a service area is directly fed RF from a headend or hub to
the active equipment. N+x networks use trunk cable to transport and distribute the RF
from the node to amplifiers in the network and power between active devices. Larger
diameter cables are used.
Distribution Cable
Distribution cables have a smaller diameter and also distribute RF and power. Distribution
cables are tapped to provide RF to the customer premises.
Larger coaxial cables are used for power distribution and long runs of cable such as
express feeder legs to minimize RF and power loss across that section of distribution.
Aerial Jacketed / w flooding Underground
Figure 6-4: Distribution Cables
28
Enterprise Standard
Power Cable
When a dedicated cable is required for supplying power to the network, a 23-ohm cable
can be used. Because of the 23-ohm characteristic impedance the cable is not suited for
RF distribution.
75 Ohm 23 Ohm
Figure 6-5: RF Cable vs Power Cable
Table 6-1 shows the different sizes of coaxial cables used by Comcast. They are
highlighted based on the cables use.
Cable type and size MUST be as approved by Corporate CONNECT Engineering and
selection is based on the most cost-effective design for deployment and operation
In upgrade areas, existing foam-dielectric (PI or PIII) trunk and feeder coaxial cables will
be used as much as possible, including their exclusive use as power feeder cable where
practical
Preferred cable used for new construction will be PIII 0.625” and PIII 0.875”
Legacy MC2 cables, fused disc, have known issues with dead zones:
The MC2 products 440, 500, 650, 750- and 1-inch cables were manufactured through four
different generations each with unique dead zones:
Each of these cables types and sizes may be encountered in the network.
• 1st generation manufactured 1983 – 1986 had a resonance at 457 MHz
• 2nd generation manufactured 1986 - 1987 had a resonance at 559 MHz
• 3rd generation manufactured 1987 - 1988 had a resonance at 639 MHz
• 4th generation manufactured from 1989 with a resonance at 1118 MHz
Note: The resonance or dead zone can be described as a frequency suck-out.
29
Enterprise Standard
Table 6-1: Cable Types Used by Comcast
23
Type
ohms
Size P1 P2 P3 MC2 QR T10 TX10 P3
.320 ex X
.412 X X
.500 X X X X X X
.540 X X
.565 X X
.625 X X X
.650 X
.700 X X
.715 X X
.750 X X X X X
.840 X X
.860 X X
.875 X X
1.000 X
1.125 X
1.160 X
RF distribution
Standalone power cable and/or RF distribution
23-ohm Power distribution cable
30
Enterprise Standard
7. Grounding and Bonding

Summary
Grounding and bonding discussed in this section will summarize the methods used to get
all network components, suspension strand, cable, and attachment and support hardware
in the plant to have the same ground reference. The ground reference MUST be the same
for the utilities that may be collocated with the Comcast outside plant.
The effort and point of this section is to demonstrate how the bonding and grounding of
the network hardware and support structure will reduce the possibility of electrical shock
and minimize network damage if the strand or other metallic component accidently is in
contact with energized power wires.
It is very important that Comcast and other communications providers and the power utility
work together to help ensure the protection of the public, their employees, business
partners, and the network plant elements. To achieve that protection, Comcast outside
plant is intended to be an integral part of the grounding system used on joint use
structures.
Comcast Grounding and Bonding Specification Summary

• Ground rods are electrical grounds. They are also called grounding electrodes.
Ground rods MUST be at least 8 feet in length with a conductive and non-corrosive
outer surface. Copper-clad ground rods MUST be at least ½ inch in diameter.
• Ground rods MUST be driven to a depth of 8 feet below ground level.
• Driven ground rods that encounter a rock bottom are not required to be buried to a
depth of 8 feet.
o An angled ground rod insertion may be used if the angle is not greater than 45°
from vertical and the ground rod is buried.
o A ground rod may be placed in the trench. It MUST be 2 ½ feet deep or 30-
inches.
o The ground rod MUST be installed so 8-feet of length minimum is in contact with
the soil,
• Driven ground rods at a vault or pedestal location MUST be driven to 7 ½-feet. Six
inches MUST be available above ground for connectorization.
• Multiple ground rods MAY be installed to desirably reduce the ground resistance.
o Distance between the ground rods arranged as multiple ground rods SHOULD
NOT be less than 6 feet.
o Multiple ground rods can be bonded together and connected to a common
ground wire.
• Ground rods MUST NOT be installed within 10 feet of high-pressure pipelines that
transport flammable materials
31
Enterprise Standard
• Ground wires dedicated to the system MUST be made of copper and of a size not
less than AWG No. 6.
• The ground wire MUST NOT be spliced when practically possible.
• No splice can be made in buried ground wire.
• Ground wire can be connected to the ground rod by using a bolted clamp, commonly
called a ground rod clamp.
Aerial Specification Summary

• The opposite end of the ground wire MUST be connected to the system by means
of a suitable connector that will not corrode. A bi-metal connector is required if the
ground wire is connected to galvanized steel strand or hardware.
• Ground the first, last, and each tenth pole in any given line. Ground first and last
poles at the time of strand placement. Ground tenth pole and active locations
during cable placements.
• Move the last pole vertical one span (in line) if any ground obstruction (i.e., cement)
prohibits ground rod placement.
• When grounding or bonding (strand or copper), follow existing utilities to avoid
boxing the pole.
• Anytime two or more support strands run in the same vertical or horizontal plane,
always bond them together with KUL clamps
• Bond all double dead-ends, guys, pole crossover, etc. using a strand tail and a KUL
bonding clamp, or # 6 bare soft drawn copper wire and two KUL bonding clamps.
• Guys MUST be bonded to an integral part of the cable bearing strand.
• All messengers and guys of the system on the same supporting structure MUST be
bonded together with AWG No. 6 copper wire.
• Guys MUST be bonded to the self-support strand.
• Ground wire and ground rods MUST be installed in areas of limited exposure to
mechanical damage.
Underground Specification Summary

• Ground rods installed in vaults or enclosures MUST be buried to a minimal depth
of 7.5 feet.
• Ground rods MUST be buried level with or below the ground level unless the ground
rod is installed in a vault or enclosure.
32
Enterprise Standard
• All cables, ground wires, metal ducts, and other accessible grounded power
systems in the same vaults and manholes MUST be bonded together and grounded
to the same grounding network. AWG No. 6 copper wire should be used for
bonding the system to the grounding network.
• Jacketed cables MUST be bonded to the grounding network where the jacket is
accessed for splicing purposes
mechanical damage.
• Buried ground wire MUST be continuous and free of joints and connections.
• Buried ground wire MUST be laid slack to prevent being broken during ground
movement.
Active Devices and Power Supplies Specifications Summary

• Ground all node and amplifier (active) locations. Use existing power or telephone
grounds. If no other ground exists, install a ground rod and wire.
• At an active device location, if no other ground exists, place a vertical bond one
pole in either direction from the active location. Otherwise, place the ground rod
and ground wire at an active location.
• In HFC brownfield applications, a new vertical ground is not required at an active
location if vertical grounds at the poles before and after the active location exist.
• Each power supply MUST have its own ground rod and ground wire.
General Overview of Grounding and Bonding

The primary purpose for the grounding and bonding of the broadband network is to protect
Comcast and business partner personnel working on or around the network in addition to
protecting the public. The secondary purpose for grounding and bonding of the system is
to establish a reference ground potential.
Note: When referring to the broadband network or system the term system will be used.
Energization will be considered in this section as the unwanted presence of high voltages
on the conductive surfaces of the system. Energization can be caused by direct contact
with high voltage wires and equipment or by induced voltages caused by conductive
surfaces of the system being near changing electric and magnetic fields such as those
caused by high voltage wires and lightning. Dangerously high voltages can be present
within the system, that is, on the systems conductive surfaces, even when the system is
not in direct contact with an energized conductor.
Note: All field technicians MUST have a Foreign Voltage Detector in good working order
and MUST confirm the absence of any Foreign Voltages prior to beginning work at the
jobsite.
33
Enterprise Standard
Review of Bonding and Grounding Terminology

The terms grounding and bonding are often used interchangeably. They are different and
do not produce the same result.
Grounding
• Eliminates potential between the network and earth.
Bonding
• Eliminates the potential differences between two or more network elements.
Bonding is the act of joining two electrical conductors together. Metallic elements
such as strand, cable, hardware and boding conductors are physically contacting.
Bonding and Grounding
• Grounding and bonding are only effective when the network elements are
conductive.
• Bonding two network elements does not eliminate a potential difference between
elements unless one has an adequate path to the earth for grounding.
The need to bond the communications plant occurs when it is categorized as EXPOSED.
There are four conditions, any one of which can place the communications plant element
into that exposed category:
1. Lightning
2. If contact with power in excess of 300 V to ground is possible
3. If proximity of power facilities can induce voltages in excess of 300 V to ground on
the communications plant
4. If ground potential rises in excess of 300 V exist.
Lightning often induces high voltages onto the system without directly striking the system.
The induced voltages can be extremely high, but of very short duration. Proper bonding
and grounding will dissipate these voltages. Protection against lightning is best effort.
Note: The over-voltage conditions caused by lightning are harmful to electronic devices,
personnel and the general public.
The primary reason Comcast will bond and ground OSP components is the presence of
power distribution facilities. The power distribution has the potential to induce voltages on
the plant through accidental contact or improper clearances being maintained between
the Comcast OSP and the power company distribution plant.
The grounding network establishes an effective electrical ground for the system and its
associated hardware. This grounding network will provide a termination point for currents
that might be present if the system inadvertently becomes energized.
Continuity bonding of the broadband plant will ensure that no hardware and/or cables in
the system are electrically isolated from the grounding network. Continuity bonding is
simply referred to as bonding. Bonding is intended to minimize the potential (voltage)
differences between conductive surfaces.
34
Enterprise Standard
Conductors and cables that are near other current carrying conductors will have voltages
induced onto them. Proper bonding and grounding of the system will dissipate the induced
voltages. Induced voltages are usually continuous. Some control of induced voltages can
be maintained by the proper spacing of the system from other electrical conductors,
especially high voltage conductors.
The bonding and grounding of the system MUST be maintained throughout the
lifetime of the system.
Caution: As conductive surfaces are brought into the proximity of high voltages,
flash-over can occur. Flash-over is the transfer of electrical energy from one
conductive surface to another without direct contact of the two surfaces.
Electrical Grounding and Bonding Connections

Grounding and bonding connections MUST be made with materials and techniques that
ensure the combination of metals will not corrode during the lifetime of the plant.
Take into consideration the environmental exposure of the plant. Grounding and bonding
connections may be made by brazing, welding, compression connections, and mechanical
connections. Mechanical connections are preferred for OSP network bonding and
grounding.
Electrical Grounds
The grounding network consists of many electrical grounds throughout the system. The
grounds are established by various methods known to offer a low impedance path for
current flow. Grounding methods are identified in this section.
Electrical Bonding
Bonding is the method by which all conductive cables and messengers are continuously
connected. Current flow is enabled from conductive cables and messengers to ground by
the continuous bonding of the plant to the grounding network. Bonding hardware and
methods are identified in this section.
Note: Jacketed cables MUST be bonded to the grounding network where the jacket is
accessed for splicing purposes. Jacketed coaxial cables are electrically connected to the
grounding network at the connector/cable interface when the equipment that the cable is
connected to is bonded to the grounding network.
Grounding and Bonding Components

The components and methods used in the grounding and bonding of the system are
specified as follows:
Ground rods are electrical grounds. They are also called grounding electrodes. Ground
rods MUST be at least 8 feet in length with a conductive and non-corrosive outer surface.
Copper-clad ground rods MUST be at least ½ inch in diameter.
35
Enterprise Standard
Figure 7-1: Ground Electrode / Ground Rod
Multiple ground rods can be installed to reduce the ground resistance if the ground
resistance to a single ground rod is greater than 15 Ohms as per Comcast facilities
specification.
Note: Maximum 25 ohms as per 2017 NEC 250-53(A).
• Distance between the ground rods arranged as multiple ground rods MUST NOT
be less than 6 feet.
• Multiple ground rods MUST be bonded together and connected to a common
ground wire.
• Ground rods MUST be buried level with or below ground level unless the ground
rod is installed in a vault or enclosure.
• Ground rods installed in vaults or enclosures MUST be buried to a minimal depth
of 7.5 feet.
• Driven ground rods that encounter a rock bottom are not required to be buried to a
depth of 8 feet.
Note: Ground rods MUST NOT be installed within 10 feet of high-pressure pipelines that
transport flammable materials.
If a ground rod is installed specifically for the system, then a dedicated ground wire is
required to connect the system and the dedicated ground rod. To connect to the ground
rod and ground wire a ground rod clamp is used. The ground rod clamp MUST be
corrosion resistant.
Figure 7-2: Ground Rod Clamp
Ground Wires
Ground wires provide means for interconnection of the strand, messenger and cables to
the ground rod. Ground wires are also referred to as grounding conductors.
• A ground wire may already exist on aerial structures (poles).
• The size of the existing ground wire is determined according to the fault currents of
the services on the structure.
• Ground wires dedicated to the system MUST be made of copper and of a size not
less than AWG No. 6.
36
Enterprise Standard
• Ground wire MUST NOT be spliced when practically possible.

• Buried ground wire MUST NOT be spliced.
Ground wire MUST be connected to the ground rod by means of a bolted clamp,
commonly called a ground rod clamp. The opposite end of the ground wire MUST be
connected to the system by means of a suitable connector that will not corrode. A bi-metal
connector is required if the ground wire is connected to galvanized steel strand or
hardware.
If there is insulation or non-conducting material on the ground wire, it MUST be removed
before a connection is made to the ground wire to ensure a good electrical connection.
Ground wires MUST be installed in straight lines whenever possible. Any bends made in
the ground wire MUST be gradual. NO SHARP BENDS.
Ground Wire Staples
Ground wire MUST be secured to the wooden pole structure with copper clad staples.
Copper clad or copper staples are used to affix the ground wire to the structure when the
structure is wooden. Copper staples are used to prevent corrosion between the staple and
the ground wire. Structures of materials other than wood usually have specific attachment
hardware or accommodations for the attachment of the ground wire to the structure.
Ground Wire Molding
A nonmetallic ground wire molding MUST cover from ground level to eight-feet above
ground level on the pole. The molding is typically held in place by galvanized steel staples.
Bonding Clamps
Bonding clamps are made in various types and many styles. Corrosion at the bonding
clamp is controlled by using a bonding clamp that will not corrode when in contact with
another dissimilar metal. If there is insulation or non-conducting material on the bonding
surfaces, the insulation or non-conducting material MUST be removed before any
connection is made. Three types of bonds are present in the system. The types of bonds
and the hardware that is specific to the bonds are as follows:
Table 7-1: Bonding Clamp Configurations
Copper to Copper Bond,

Bond is usually made with a bronze split bolt clamp.
Copper to Galvanized Steel or Aluminum Bond,

A bond usually made with a bi-metal clamp that has bonding surfaces
compatible to the two different materials being bonded, it is important
to properly install this clamp due to the different bonding surfaces.
One side of the clamp is specified for copper and the other for
galvanized steel or aluminum.
37
Enterprise Standard
Galvanized Steel to Galvanized Steel Bond

A bond usually made with a simple bonding clamp; this clamp can be
easily confused with the bi-metal bonding clamp.
Grounding and Bonding Practices

Equipment damage, outages, and nuisance fuse blowing due to sheath currents, lightning,
and other transient or steady-state currents can be substantially reduced by adequate
system grounding.
Aerial Cable Grounding

ALL Comcast plant MUST be grounded. Grounding reduces the electrical shock hazard
caused by overhead power lines. It also reduces static electricity problems caused by
dust particles in the air or by thunderstorms. Good grounding is also important for the
electronics to work properly.
• The grounding standard is ground the first, last, and each tenth pole in any given
line. If there are only eight to 13 poles in a line, use the first and last pole.
• When grounding or bonding (strand or copper), follow existing utilities to avoid
boxing the pole.
Ground first and last poles at the time of strand placement. Ground tenth pole and active
locations during cable placements.
Move the last pole vertical one span (in line) if any ground obstruction (i.e., cement)
prohibits ground rod placement.
Ground all node and amplifier (active) locations. Use existing power or telephone
grounds. If no other ground exists, install a ground rod and wire.
At an active device location, if a vertical ground cannot be established due to soil
conditions or impediments to driving a ground rod, place a vertical bond one pole in either
direction from the active location.
Networks that have used the practice of placing the vertical ground one pole before and
after the active device do not require a new vertical ground to be placed at the active
device.
Each power supply MUST have its own vertical ground rod and wire. The ground rod is
5/8" X 8' and the ground wire is AWG #6 copper.
• Locate the ground rod 12" from the pole and
• Drive the top of the rod 4" to 6" below the surface.
38
Enterprise Standard
Staple the AWG # 6 bare soft-drawn copper ground wire to the pole all the way to ground
level. Bury the ground wire 4" to 6" below the surface of the soil and connect it to the
ground rod with a C-LOK ground rod clamp.
Connect the ground wire to the strand with a KUL bonding clamp to prevent electrolysis.
Connect bonding clamps to the strand and never to the Preformed splice or dead-end.
The coating on these devices reduces the electrical contact.
At locations that require ground wire molding, wood or plastic is acceptable. See Figure
7-3.
Figure 7-3: In-Line Grounding
39
Enterprise Standard
BONDING STRANDS
Anytime two or more support strands run in the same vertical or horizontal plane, always
bond them together with KUL clamps. This is true whether they are all CATV or a
combination of CATV, telephone and power grounds. Bonding maintains the same
electrical potential in all strands and reduces the possibility of electrical shock caused by
many sources. See Figure 7-4: Bonding Strand.
Figure 7-4: Bonding Strand
Use # 6 soft-drawn copper ground wire and KUL bonding clamps. If a ground riser or
vertical exists, use a KUL clamp to bond to an existing vertical ground.
Bond all double dead-ends, guys, pole crossover, etc. using a strand tail and a KUL
bonding clamp, or # 6 bare soft drawn copper wire and two KUL bonding clamps. This is
shown in Figure 7-5.
40
Enterprise Standard
Figure 7-5: Double Dead-End Bonding
If using #6 copper wire for bonding, always use a KUL clamp to prevent electrolysis from
occurring. Electrolysis is a chemical reaction that takes place due to the different chemical
properties of dissimilar metals and any minor electrical current. The effect is a fine film of
powder created between each metal object that was in contact. This film breaks the
ground connection at this point in the system.
Note: When installing the KUL type clamp, do not extend the grounding wire out the end
of the clamp. When cut, the ground wire is sharp and can cause injury.
Bond the strand at all vertical riser locations whether the vertical riser is power, telephone
or CATV. See Figure 7-6.
41
Enterprise Standard
Figure 7-6: Vertical Riser
Aerial Configurations
Aerial coaxial cables are installed in two configurations.
• Cables are directly lashed to a messenger (strand). The messenger is commonly
referred to as cable bearing strand.
• Self-support, figure-eight, or integrated messenger (IM) cable configuration.
The employed method of grounding MUST provide a ground of adequate low resistance.
42
Enterprise Standard
7.6.2.1 Cable Bearing Strand

Cable bearing strand MUST be grounded or bonded to the grounding network at least 8
times per mile of plant.
• Guys MUST be bonded to or an integral part of the cable bearing strand.
7.6.2.2 Self-Support
Self-support strand MUST be grounded or bonded to the grounding network at least eight
(8) times per mile of plant.
• Guys MUST be bonded to the self-support strand.
Subsurface Plant (Underground Configurations)

Subsurface or Underground plant is defined as plant that is placed inside conduits and
routed to vaults and manholes. Grounding and bonding will be done inside the vaults and
manholes.
Follow all National, State and Local regulations.
Note: Local and state regulations may supersede NEC and NESC recommendations.
System designers MUST contact state and local regulatory agencies to determine if
regional regulations exist that differ from the NEC and NESC recommendations.
Grounding and Bonding
mechanical damage.
• All cables, ground wires, metal ducts, and other accessible grounded power
systems in the same vaults and manholes MUST be bonded together and grounded
to the same grounding network. AWG No. 6 copper wire MUST be used for bonding
the system to the grounding network.
• Jacketed cables MUST be bonded to the grounding network where the jacket is
accessed for splicing purposes. Coaxial cables are electrically connected to the
grounding network at the connector/cable interface when the equipment to which
the cable is connected is bonded to the grounding network.
Direct Buried Plant (Existing)
Direct buried coax in greenfield or rebuild is NOT ALLOWED in Comcast plant.
Direct buried plant is defined as plant that is in direct contact with the earth. Grounding
and bonding will be done at an enclosure, vault, and hand-hole locations.
43
Enterprise Standard
mechanical damage. Buried ground wire MUST be continuous and free of joints
and connections. Ground wire MUST be laid slack to prevent being broken during
ground movement.
• Jacketed flooded cables MUST be bonded to the grounding network where the
jacket is accessed for splicing purposes. Jacketed coaxial cables are electrically
connected to the grounding network at the connector/cable interface when the
equipment to which the cable is connected is bonded to the grounding network.
• If at an existing direct bury location and the cable MUST be replaced, a new conduit
MUST be placed and a cable and pull-tape will be installed.
Direct Buried coaxial cable is NOT ALLOWED in Comcast networks.
All underground coaxial cable MUST be placed in conduit or innerduct.
44
Enterprise Standard
8. Guys and Anchors

Summary
Guys and anchors are used in overhead construction to provide stability and to support
unbalanced lateral loads caused by the strand and cable loading on the poles. Typically
found at dead-end (anchor) locations in the plant.
Comcast aerial plant construction will be on joint use poles. The power company and
other communications companies may have infrastructure on the poles following the same
pole line in the easement.
Note: Installing the Comcast network requires the joint use partners will not be service
impacted by the construction efforts.
Comcast Specification Summary

• Placement of guys and anchors is to be performed by personnel that are familiar
with standard practices, safety precautions and the supplier’s specifications on the
equipment used.
• Comcast will use expansion bust anchors or screw anchors.
• Prior to placing the anchor call 811 to get all utilities and services located. It is the
responsibility of the Comcast personnel or business partner assigned to the project
to determine that subsurface locates are performed prior to the commencement of
work. These include and may not be limited to:
o Power
o Telephone
o Gas
o Water
o Homeowner subsurface infrastructures, fences, sprinkler systems, etc.
• It is the business partner’s responsibility to coordinate and obtain subsurface utility
locations on ALL services before installing any anchor.
• Install and tension all anchors and guy wires before installing the support strand.
The preferred method uses a two-bolt clamp at the anchor and a preform at the
pole or insulator (When applicable).
• Guy strand will have seven (7) wires per strand.
• Guy strand will be 1/4" or 5/16” diameter and
• Guy strand will be the same size as the support strand.
o The down guy ought to have a lead-to-height ratio of l/2 or better.
o If the lead-to-height ratio cannot be made, follow the angle of the existing
anchoring, or use good engineering practice when placing the anchor.
• When placing on a joint use pole with existing infrastructure, DO NOT tension the
guy wire to the point that the current infrastructure tension is changed.
45
Enterprise Standard
• An anchor MUST be placed into the ground at an angle that puts it in line with the
guywire and expected load.
• Any anchor rod damaged during installation and not replaced at the time will be
replaced at the business partner’s expense. An anchor rod is considered damaged
if it is bent, twisted, or if its eye is damaged.
• The business partner is responsible for any damage his crews may cause to utility
poles or peripheral equipment.
• All guy wires MUST maintain proper clearances. Use sidewalk type guy installation
where the correct down guy lead-length-ratio cannot be obtained, and a pole-to-
pole guy is not used.
• Install a guy guard on every down guy.
• Any time a guy is removed, always remove the anchor. The anchor can be
physically removed or cut below ground level. Do not disturb other existing
anchors.
• Addition or deletion of anchors, or a change in location from that indicated on the
system maps, MUST first be approved in writing by Comcast Regional Construction
Engineering.
General
A guy and anchor are used to counteract the horizontal component of forces placed on
poles by the strand and cable. The guy and anchor MUST:
• Keep the pole in a desirable position when strand and cable are added to the pole
line.
• Counteract the unbalanced forces due to construction techniques. At the dead-end
pole the strand and cable weight will pull the pole in the direction of the loaded line.
• Counteract abnormal forces on the pole due to wind and ice loading of the strand
and cable
• The guy and anchor will counteract this load caused by the strand, cable and
hardware connected to the strand.
NESC Rule 264A (2017) rule states that:
"When the loads are greater than can be supported by the structure alone, additional
strength shall be provided by the use of guys, braces or other suitable construction. Such
measures shall also be used where necessary to limit the increase of sags in adjacent
spans and provide sufficient strength for those supports on which the loads are sufficiently
unbalanced, for example, at corners, angles, dead ends, large differences in span lengths
and changes of grade in construction."
Applicable codes for guying can be found in NESC Section 26.
46
Enterprise Standard
Safety Factors
Safety factors of overhead lines are accounted for by the NESC. Overhead lines should
not be subjected to tension greater than 60% of the breaking strength of the line (strand /
messenger) as defined by 2017 NESC 261k2. For guy wires conforming to the American
Society for Testing Standards (ASTM) standards, the nominal breaking strength value
defined shall be the rated breaking strength required in this manual, ASTM A475 and
ASTM A363.
The guy should be constructed of such material and dimension such that the loading on
the guy multiplied by an appropriate overload capacity factor does not exceed 90% of the
rated breaking strength of the guy.
Crossings
In NESC 241C crossings are generally defined to be where overhead lines cross. Wires,
conductors, or other cables of one line are considered to be at crossings when either:
• Cross over another line, whether or not on a common supporting structure
• They cross or overhang
o Railroad tracks
o The traveled way of a limited access highway
o Navigable waterways requiring a waterway crossing permit
Guys used at crossings may require a change in construction grade dependent on the
crossing circumstances. Guidelines can be found in the 2017 NESC section 241.
Guy Wires
A guy wire is the strand that connects the pole line hardware, particularly the guy
attachment hardware, to the anchor. Being strand, the rated breaking strength of the guy
is the same as that for the strand
1/4” or 5/16” Extra High Strength (EHS) Strand. MUST be the same as the support strand
used
Down Guys
A down guy is the general name for the guy wire and associated hardware on all guys.
Down guys consist of a length of strand that is attached to pole-line hardware and to an
anchor. The anchor is used to transfer a horizontal component of force from the pole to
the ground via the guy wire.
Note: Down guys may also be referred to as anchor guys or simply guys.
47
Enterprise Standard
Types and Methods of Guying

This section defines and illustrates the various types of guy construction that can be
encountered in the field.
Table 8-1: Guy Configurations
Head Guy
Head guys are placed in line with the strand
routing.
A head guy MAY be used as a terminal guy or
two can be used in a location where the strand
changes direction.
Head guys may also be referred to as line guys.
Terminal Guy
Terminal guys are used at the end of pole lines.
Side Guy
Side guys MAY be used when the strand
changes directions.
The side guy is in line with the angel that
bisects the strand routing. Careful engineering
analysis ought to be made to ensure that the
side guy does not cause excessive forces to be
placed on the guy, anchor, and associated
hardware
Pole to Stub Guy

Pole-to-Stub guys are used to establish vertical
clearance for the guys. Pole-to-stub guys are
attached to a stub pole. This type of guy is used
when a head guy cannot be placed at a pole
because of an obstacle in the immediate vicinity
of the pole. Pole-to-stub guys are often used to
provide guy clearance over roads.
Can also be referred to as a stub guy.
48
Enterprise Standard
Pole-to-Pole Guy
Pole-to-pole guys utilize an in-line pole as an
anchor. A pole-to-pole guy can also be called a
span guy or an overhead guy.
The attachment to the pole used as an anchor
MUST NOT be less than eight feet from the
base of the anchor pole.
Verify with the pole owner before using a pole-to-
pole guy.
Storm Guy
Storm guys are used when a straight pole line is
subjected to extreme transverse forces typically
in the form of wind. There may be two storm
guys on a pole, both at a ninety-degree
orientation to the pole line.
Note: A storm guy may also be called a line guy.
Sidewalk Guy
Sidewalk guys use a horizontal strut to provide
overhead clearance when a head guy causes a
hazard to traffic beneath the guy. Sidewalk guys
are useful when the placement of the anchor is
critical.
The horizontal strut causes additional forces to
be placed on the pole where the strut contacts
the pole. The strut, typically a 2½ inch
galvanized steel pipe, MUST be placed eight
feet minimum from the ground beneath the strut
Push-Guy
A pole is used as a guy or brace on another
pole in a push guy configuration. Push guys
may be used in locations where it is impossible
to use conventional guys. Lack of enough right-
of-way often dictates the use of push guys.
Push guys are also be referred to as push
poles.
49
Enterprise Standard
Types of Anchors
Anchors are used to transfer the horizontal component of force from the pole to the ground.
The holding power of an anchor is a measurement of how effective the anchor is at
transferring the force to the ground.
Soil conditions effect the holding power of the anchor. Soil conditions are divided into
classifications such as sand, clay, or hard pan. The soil classification for the location of
the anchor installation MUST be considered when specifying the size and type of anchor
in addition to the component of force that the anchor MUST transfer.
Anchor manufacturers provide holding power specifications for the various types and sizes
of anchors in the various soil conditions.
All anchors and anchor rods MUST be installed in line with the direction of pull of the
attached down guy. When possible, rock anchors should also be installed in this manner,
but an exception can be made for rock anchors.
Table 8-2: Anchor Types
Anchor Rods
Anchor rods connect the anchor and the guy wire.
Anchor rod strength specifications are provided by anchor
manufacturers. Anchor rods are also called guy rods
Screw Anchor
Screw anchors are designed to be directly torqued into the
ground with a power anchor driver although screw anchors
can be installed manually. Minimal ground disturbance results
with screw anchors.
Never- Creep Anchor

Never-Creep Anchors are anchors designed for use in soft
soil where conventional anchors are less effective. The never-
creep anchor is installed by driving the never-creep anchor
rod to intersect a perpendicular bore hole used for placement
of the plate of the never creep anchor. The bore hole is
refilled and compacted.
May be called plate-type anchors
50
Enterprise Standard
Rock Anchor
Rock Anchors are designed to be expanded in holes bored in
rock or concrete.
Rock Anchors are also called concrete anchors.
Expansion Anchor or Bust Anchor

Expansion Anchors are placed into bored holes while the
expansion anchor is in the closed position. The expansion
anchor is struck several blows with a special expanding bar,
causing the anchor to expand into the undisturbed earth at the
base of the bore hole.
Anchor Attachment
Anchor attachments are referred to as auxiliary eyes. An auxiliary eye is used to provide
for attachment of an additional guy to an existing anchor and guy. Auxiliary eyes can be
added to anchors that have sufficient holding power to support the additional force
transferred to the anchor. Careful engineering analysis MUST be used in determining the
holding power of an anchor and the effect of the additional load on the anchor.
Figure 8-1: Anchor Attachment
Guy Construction Lead-to-Height

The lead and height of a guy is defined as distances in feet, measured as shown in Figure
8-2, and expressed as a fraction to give the lead-over-height ratio. For example, a lead of
10 feet and a height of 20 feet can be expressed as 10/20 feet, or as a lead-over-height
ratio of 1/2. (From Telcordia Bluebook SR-1421 section 6.3)
The lead-to-height ratio restricts the vertical compressive load on the pole while
counteracting the horizontal forces placed on the pole by the strand and cable.
The lead-to-height ratio that MUST be maintained is a function of the guy and anchor
materials and the allowable force on the materials.
The lead-to-height ratio MUST be specified by the system engineer due to the variance in
hardware and soil conditions.
51
Enterprise Standard
Figure 8-2: Guy Lead to Height Ratio
Guy Wire Tension

Guy wire tension counteracts the horizontal forces placed on the pole by the associated
strand and cables. Tension in the guy wire can be higher than the tension in the
associated strand and cable due to the angle of the guy wire in relation to the strand and
cable.
The breaking strength of the guy wire is a function of the strand size. Minimum breaking
strength of the guy wire (strand) is specified in vendor documentation.
Table 8-3: Strand Minimum Breaking Strength
1/4“ EHS Strand: 6,650 lbs

5/16” EHS Strand: 11,200 lbs
Accordingly, allowable guy wire tension is a function of anchor size and type, guy wire
size, lead-to-height ration, and location.
Allowable tension in the guy wire is given as a percentage of the breaking strength of the
strand as per NESC Section 26. Follow appropriate safety factors.
Guy Wire Attachments

Guy wire attachments enable attachment of the guy to the pole. Guy wire attachments
MUST be made directly to the pole-line hardware that is supporting the strand and cable
that is placing the horizontal forces on the pole.
52
Enterprise Standard
Guy Guards
Guy guards MUST be placed on the ground end of guys exposed to pedestrian traffic.
Guy guards MUST be of pattern or color to provide a conspicuous indication of the
presence of the guy. The guy guard MUST be polyethylene and be resilient to UV
exposure.
Figure 8-3: Guy Guard
Grounding and Bonding Guys

Guys are grounded and bonded to prevent the continued energization of the guy during
inadvertent contact with electrical conductors. Grounding and bonding are accomplished
using standard bonding and grounding hardware as identified in Section 6.
Guy Insulator
Guy insulators are installed on ungrounded guy wires attached to structures (poles)
carrying energized conductors. The guy insulators are installed between the guy
attachment hardware and the anchor attachment and in accordance with 2017 NESC
215C2 and 279.
The insulator should always be located at least 8 feet above the ground.
Figure 8-4: Guy Insulator
Note: Position the insulator in the guy so that if any guy sags down upon another the
insulator will NOT become ineffective.
53
Enterprise Standard
9. Aerial Strand Construction

Summary
Proper care and handling of strand during installation is critical to the long-term reliability
of the Comcast broadband network. The quality of the initial installation is a major
determining factor in the longevity of the system and the degree of continuing maintenance
required during the life of the network. During construction, proper attention MUST be
given to the mechanical and environmental factors which can cause degradation and
failure.
The strand is subject to daily mechanical stresses resulting from day-to-night temperature
changes and the consequent forces of expansion and contraction. These effects can be
offset to a large degree with proper awareness of sag and tension factors. Additional
mechanical stresses are induced during the rigors of installation and handling.
Comcast Specifications Summary

• Strand MUST be made of steel seven (7) wire Extra High Strength (EHS) class “A”
galvanized.
o Strand MUST be 1/4” or 5/16” diameter.
o Strand splices and deadends MUST meet the Rated Breaking Strength (RBS) of
the strand.
• Only use galvanized 5/8” diameter pole-line hardware, through-bolts, eyebolts,
nuts, etc.
• All hardware and equipment clearances MUST meet all required specifications.
• Through bolt length after tensioning.
o When installed excess bolt length will not be less than three (3) full threads
beyond the square nut.
o When installed excess bolt length will be no greater than 1 1/2-inches beyond
the square nut. Through bolts will not be cut to achieve this specification.
• Use three-bolt, flat back suspension clamps for straight-line construction.
• Use curved suspension clamps for tangent pulls and angles of ten through twenty
degrees.
• Always install all anchors and guys before installing the strand.
• Bonding and grounding MUST be performed during construction and secured after
the correct tensioning of the plant.
• #6 ground wire will be used to bond and ground the Comcast and joint user plant
components.
• Use only AMP C-LOK type clamps when grounding copper wire to ground rods.
• Clearance between the cable strand and other communication facility on the same
pole is 18". The minimum clearance is 12".
54
Enterprise Standard
• Recommended strand finished sag is 1.5% at 60°F.
Construction and Maintenance Safety

Construction and maintenance of a Comcast coaxial plant requires a substantial amount
of manpower, tools and equipment. Aerial construction will expose the manpower, tools
and equipment to hazards, dependent on field conditions and circumstances.
Only a qualified employee can be assigned duties that could cause harm or potential harm
to the construction crew, general public, cable plant, and other utilities. The Occupational
Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) defines a qualified employee as "any worker
who by reason of training and experience has demonstrated his ability to safely perform
his duties."
All possible hazards that exist in the construction environment cannot be identified.
Personnel MUST be familiar with the operation of the tools and equipment in variable field
conditions. Construction personnel performing the work MUST be qualified Comcast or
business partner personnel.
Three sets of national codes and standards apply to the construction of cable systems,
OSHA, NEC, NESC.
Municipal, state, county, and local codes are often applied to the construction of cable
systems or work that involves their respective properties and rights-of-way. Pole lease
agreements often stipulate specific practices related to safety and construction.
**These codes, regulations, and specified practices MUST be understood, communicated

and practiced.
Poles and Pole-line Hardware

From a Comcast perspective poles are the structures that provide the support for the
placement of hardware, strand and cable, and communications network equipment. These
structures are typically owned by others. Comcast is a joint user of the poles and MUST
abide by all clearances required to not interfere or cause harm to other joint user
equipment.
Pole line hardware will be used to support the Comcast aerial plant.
Pole-Line Hardware Specification

Galvanized steel suspension strand is generally available in two basic levels of
galvanizing:
• Type A - General use under normal field conditions.
55
Enterprise Standard
• Type C - Typically reserved for environments or applications where corrosion is a

known issue. Found in coastal regions subject to salty marine fogs and/or around
industrial areas where significant pollution levels may exist.
Construct all Comcast plant with Extra High Strength (EHS) seven wire, Type “A”
galvanized strand unless environmental conditions dictate the use of Type “C”.
• Strand breaking specification
o 1/4” EHS strand breaking point is 6,600 lbs.
o 5/16” EHS strand breaking point is 11,200 lbs.
o Strand splices and deadends MUST meet the rated breaking strength of the
strand when installed.
• It is critical to determine that the hardware used to attach the strand to anchors and
pole hardware are compatible and is the correct size to support the strand.
o The strand vises, strand grips, and strand clamps need to properly grip the
galvanized surface of the strand to maximize bond or holding strength.
o Using the wrong devices may cause extensive damage decreasing the effective
breaking strength of the strand.
o Understand the strand breaking point, tension at 60°F (15°C), and maximum
tension under the applicable storm loading (light, medium, and heavy) as
specified by the NESC.
square washers, nuts, etc.
• Washers MUST be square to the pole, not angled or diamond (twisted 90⁰).
degrees. When framing for a curved suspension clamp, break the angle for proper
fit of the strand.
o For angles under 10 degrees, use a straight suspension clamp.
o For angles 10 to 20 degrees, use a curved suspension clamp. Use a back-strap
with every curved suspension clamp.
o For angles over 20 degrees, always use dead-end construction techniques.
• Install the lip of the suspension clamps below the through-bolt and facing the pole.
• Place suspension clamps on the threaded end of a through-bolt.
• Attach dead-end construction attachments to the unthreaded end of a through-bolt.
• After installing the hardware and tensioning or tightening the outside nut on the
through-bolt,
o MUST have greater than three full threads of the through-bolt or suspension
screw extending beyond the outside face of the square nut or eye-nut.
56
Enterprise Standard
o No more than two-inches of the through- bolt or suspension screw thread can be
visible beyond the outside face of the square nut or eye-nut. Through-bolt or
suspension screw WILL NOT be cut to achieve this length. Cutting will cause
corrosion / rusting and premature failure of the bolt or screw will result.
• Eye nuts MUST be turned vertically, except when the angle exceeds 45 degrees. If
greater than 45⁰ the eye-nut MUST be turned horizontal.
• Use only KUL type clamps when bonding strand-to-strand-or strand-to-copper.
• Follow all manufacturer's application and safety procedures for all installed
equipment.
Pole Conditions Specifications

Prior to construction, check the condition of the pole.
• Look for tags indicating an unsafe pole condition, i.e., rotten or broken.
o Do not climb or place Comcast hardware on a tagged, unsafe pole.
o Consult with the pole owner to determine when the pole will be replaced.
• Thump the pole with a two-pound hammer (known as "pole sounding"). If there is a
hollow sound, the pole is rotten. It is the pole owner's responsibility to replace it.
• If the pole condition is suspect, probe the pole about one foot under the ground to
check for rot.
• Check the pole for shell rot and cracks. This type of safety hazard requires
replacement by the pole owner.
**It is important to remember that Comcast rents as a joint user the poles from the utility
companies. It is their responsibility to maintain the poles in a safe condition.
Coaxial Cable Clearances

Comcast plant is placed on support structures that can be jointly used by other entities
such as power and/or telephone. Minimum vertical clearances of wires between ground,
other communication facilities, roadways, rail properties, water surfaces and requirements
for climbing space MUST be in accordance with the requirements of the most recent
edition of the National Electric Safety Code. The NESC specifies both horizontal and
vertical clearance between any crossing or adjacent cables that are carried on different
supporting structures. However, some localities have codes that are more stringent
than the NESC. In these localities compliance with the local code is mandatory.
57
Enterprise Standard
Before starting construction and installation, determine if there exists enough clearance
between the coaxial cable and other utilities, as well as clearance to the ground, roadways,
rail service or water surfaces. Clearance requirements MUST be maintained through
temperature and loading extremes. If applicable, the clearance requirements in the latest
issue of the NESC MUST be met throughout the cable plant.
In general, the final sag of the coaxial cable plant MUST be known to determine the
minimum separation at the pole of the coaxial cable and the other utilities. Minimum
separations for mid-span clearance will require more separation at the support pole. The
final sag MUST also be known to determine the minimum coaxial cable attachment height
on the pole for the required span clearances above the ground or roadway.
Although final sag can be calculated the calculation is complex and requires a detailed
understanding of the properties of all materials being utilized. Initial and final sag and
tension values can be found in vendor supplied tables which can be used to make sure
the necessary clearances are met in conjunction with existing local requirements. Consult
these tables as each cable type along with strand length and loading may require different
tension and sag values.
Sag and Tension is 1.5% sag normalized

to 60F. Vendors provide charts detailing
initial and final sag and tension for varying
temperature conditions and span lengths.
Typically included in the charts are
stringing sag and tension, and ice loading
examples.
As the temperature increases above 60⁰
F the sag increases / tension decreases.
As the temperature decreases below 60⁰
F the sag decreases / tension increases Figure 9-1: Sag and Tension
Vertical clearances are critical to set correctly and be maintained over varying
environmental conditions.
• Table 9-1 specifies the clearances over surface objects. These clearances MUST
be maintained under filly loaded conditions.
• Table 9-2 further illustrates the clearance requirements.
58
Enterprise Standard
Table 9-1: Vertical Clearances (Per 2017 NESC Table 232-1)
Vertical clearance of wires, conductors, and cables above-ground,

roadway, rail, or water surfaces.
Nature of surface underneath Conductors Potential
wires, conductors, or cables 0 to 300 0 to 750 0 to 750 Volt 750 to 22 kV
(*) see the note Volts (1) Volts (2) to Ground (3) to Ground (4)
Meter
Height Clearance Feet
s
Feet Meters Feet Meters Feet Meters
1 Track rails of railroads 23.5 7.2 24.0 7.3 22.0 6.7 22.0 6.7
Roads, streets, and other areas
2 subject to truck traffic
15.5 4.7 16.1 4.9 18.0 5.5 20.0 6.1
Driveways, parking lots,
3 and alleys
15.5 4.7 15.4 4.7 18.0 5.5 20.0 6.1
Other areas traversed by vehicles,
such as cultivated, grazing, forest,
4 and orchard lands, industrial sites,
15.5 4.7 16.1 4.9
commercial sites, etc.
Spaces and ways subject to
5 pedestrians or restricted traffic only
9.5 2.9 11.8 3.6 16.1 4.9 18.0 5.5
Water areas not suitable for sail
6 boating or where sail boating is 13.1 4.0 14.4 4.4
prohibited
Water areas suitable for sail boating including lakes, ponds, reservoirs, tidal waters, rivers, streams,
7 and canals with an unobstructed surface area of;
Less than 0.08 km2 / 20 acres 17.5 5.3 18.0 5.5
Over 0.08 to 0.8 km2 / Over 20 to
25.5 7.8 25.9 7.9
200 Acres
Over 0.8 to 8 km 2
31.5 9.6 32.2 9.8
Over 200 to 2000 Acres
Over 8 km2 / Over 2000 Acres 37.5 11.4 38.1 11.6
Established boat ramps and
associated rigging areas; areas Clearance above ground shall be 4.9 feet / 1.5 meters greater than in
8 posted with sign(s) for rigging or 7 above, for the type of water areas served by the launching sites
launching sail boats
Where wires, conductors or cables run along and within the limits of highways or other road right-of-
way but do not overhang the roadway
9 Roads, streets, or alleys 15.5 4.7 16.1 4.9 18.0 5.5 20.0 6.1
Roads where it is unlikely that
1
vehicles will be crossing under the 13.6 4.1 14.1 4.3 18.0 5.5 20.0 6.1
0
line
3. Insulated communication conductors and cable; messengers; overhead shield / surge protection wires;
effectively grounded guys
4. Non-insulated communication conductors; supply cables of 0 to 750 Volts
5. Electrified trolley and electrified railroad contact conductors, 0 t0 750 Volts to Ground
6. Electrified trolley and electrified railroad contact conductors, over 750 Volts to 22 kV to Ground
59
Enterprise Standard
Table 9-2: Specific Clearances (Driveways, Roads, Buildings, etc.)
60
Enterprise Standard
**These illustrations are used with permission from Hi-Line Engineering / GDS Associates
61
Enterprise Standard
62
Enterprise Standard
63
Enterprise Standard
Equipment Clearances
The vertical clearance between communication

lines supported on different suspension strands
MUST be 12-inches minimum and 18-inches
preferred.
• A 12-inch clearance will provide adequate
working space and will prevent contact
between communications cables at mid-span
when the strand and cable loading are Figure 9-2: Preferred Clearance
tensioned properly.
• Determine the depth of the active device that will be place on the strand. Proper
clearance to the joint user below MUST be maintained. Dimensions of nodes:
o The largest active device currently deployed is the Arris OM6000 at 23.6” L x
11.0“ W x 12.2” D.
o All future actives: nodes, amplifiers, line extenders, access points, etc. ought to
be considered at this time.
• A recommended minimum vertical clearance of 4-inches MUST be maintained
between any strand mounted equipment and telephone cables.
• A minimum 40-inch distance from washer to washer MUST be maintained between
Comcast plant and the Power Company plant.
Figure 9-3: Equipment Clearances Power to Communications
64
Enterprise Standard
Where the power utility permits attachment using both sides of the pole, the vertical 12-
inch minimum clearance MAY be reduced. However, the framing of the bolts can be no
closer than 4-inches.
Figure 9-4: Opposite Pole Side Clearance
• For future guying purposes, back-straps can be installed where the power company
has existing guys.
• With an obstruction at the pole, where no additional clearance is available, the loop
may need to be located farther out from the pole, to enable the communication
facility to maintain proper clearance (six inches) from equipment.
Pole Line Hardware Description

Pole-line hardware is used to attach the support infrastructure (strand) to aerial facilities
(poles). Within this section will be the description of the pole-line hardware. This will not
be all-inclusive. Shown will be the most typical devices used at Comcast. Determine that
the hardware meets requirements for the location and the environment that it will be
placed.
• All hardware MUST be galvanized and meet the ASTM A153 specification.
• All support hardware will support 5/8-inch diameter bolt.
Pole line hardware will be described based on where it is used, wood poles vs non-wood
poles.
Wood Pole Hardware

Hardware for wood poles is the focus of this section. Section 0 provides attachment and
support hardware guidance for non-wood poles which are becoming more widely used.
65
Enterprise Standard
9.6.1.1 Suspension Clamps

Used to support strand at a location where the strand passes the pole and does not dead
end at that location. The suspension clamp MUST be a type recommended for the size of
the strand used. See examples in Figure 9-5.
• Left, Three-bolt clamp for strand
• Middle, Three-bolt clamp for integrated messenger cable
• Right, One-bolt clamp for strand or integrated messenger
Figure 9-5: Suspension Clamps
9.6.1.2 Through Bolts, Square Nuts, and Square Washers

Through bolts are used to secure the line hardware to the poles. Through-bolts are
available with threads on one end or threads on both ends. The double threaded bolt is
used if hardware is anticipated to occupy both side of the pole.
• Through-bolts MUST be 5/8” diameter and galvanized.
• Through-bolts will have a minimum breaking strength of 12,400 pounds.
• Use the appropriate length bolt based on the application. The length of the bolt is
determined by the hardware that MUST be supported. Length range is 12” to 42”.
• Hole bored through the pole ought to be 1/16” larger than the diameter of the bolt.
• After hardware placement and tightening, the excess through-bolt threads MUST
have greater than 3 threads and no-longer than 1 1/2-inches of thread showing
beyond the outside edge of the square nut or eye-nut.
Note: Double threaded bolts MUST NOT be used for dead-ending or guying.
Square-nuts and 2 1/4” square flat washers will be used on all pole-line construction.
Through Bolt Square Nut Square Washer
Figure 9-6: Through Bolt, Square Nut and Washer
66
Enterprise Standard
Figure 9-7: Double Threaded Through Bolt an Nuts
Figure 9-8: Flat Washer Figure 9-9: Curved Washer
9.6.1.3 Thimble Eye Bolts

Thimble eye bolts are used to terminate suspension and guy strand. There are two types
of thimble eye bolts, straight and angled.
• Straight thimble eye bolts are used where the strand is terminated. Additional
hardware may be used to secure a guy at the pole.
• Angled thimble eye bolts are used at anchor locations.
Upper= Straight
Lower = Angled
Figure 9-10: Thimble Eye Bolt
9.6.1.4 Cable Suspension Screws
Suspension screws are used when it is not

practical to use a through-bolt. Situations may
arise when using a through-bolt that the
opposite side of the bolt may be in violation of
Figure 9-11: Cable Suspension Screw
required clearances to other joint users.
DO NOT USE under the following conditions:

• At railroad crossings
• In bolt holes larger than 11/16-inch in diameter
67
Enterprise Standard
• Where the pole shows evidence of decay or checking to the extent that there would
be a tendency for the screw to loosen.
• The pole has been tagged unsafe.
9.6.1.5 Reinforcing and Support Straps

Reinforcing straps prevent the bending of the through-bolts or drive screws that support
the cable suspension clamps. Reinforcing straps prevent the bending of the suspension
bolts or suspension screw that supports the cable-suspension clamp.
Figure 9-12: Reinforcing Straps
Reinforcing straps prevent the bending of the through-bolts or drive screws that support
the cable suspension clamps. Reinforcing straps prevent the bending of the suspension
bolts or suspension screw that supports the cable-suspension clamp.
Figure 9-13: Reinforcement Strap / Three Bolt
Reinforcing straps are used for the following conditions:

• The suspension clamp is spaced from the pole by two nuts and a washer or by a
pole strand connector. Use the appropriate length through-bolt
• A downward change in grade of 10% or more from pole to pole
A 1/2-inch diameter by 4-1/2-inch length drive screw can be used to attach the top of the
reinforcing strap except where a 5/8-inch suspension bolt is required.
A 5/8-inch suspension bolt is required to attach the top of a reinforcing strap when the
following conditions exist:
68
Enterprise Standard
• Two reinforcing straps are used to support the through-bolt and hardware
• When a pole strand connector is used as a suspension clamp spacer.
• When the cable-suspension bolt is less than 22-inches from the top of the pole
• At railroad crossings
When two suspension strands on opposite sides of the pole are attached to a single
suspension bolt and both require reinforcing straps.
9.6.1.6 Guy Hooks

Guy hooks (Rams head) are used to terminate support strand or guy strand. Guy hooks
are available in several sizes, 5/8-inch, 3/4-inch, and 1-inch. The size of the guy hook
relates to the pole hardware size used. Comcast will typically use 5/8-inch hardware.
Figure 9-14: Guy Hooks
9.6.1.7 Guy Straps

Guy straps are used to reinforce the thimble eye bolts at guyed locations.
Figure 9-15: Guy Straps
9.6.1.8 Guy Clamps

Guy clamps are used to dead-end the strand. Used in locations where a guy-grip is not
used.
Figure 9-16: Guy Clamps
69
Enterprise Standard
Guy clamps will be found in the guying techniques that may be encountered in the
construction of Comcast plant and are illustrated in the diagrams below;
Anchor Guy Stub Guy
Figure 9-17: Anchor Guy / Stub Guy
Pole to Stub to Anchor Guy Pole to Pole Guy
Figure 9-18: Pole to Stub / Pole to Pole Guy Clamp Usage
70
Enterprise Standard
Non-wood Pole
Non-wood poles may be encountered as the system is constructed. These poles or
structures will have been identified prior to the start of construction. Reasons to have in
place or potentially to place non-wood poles are the following:
• Environmental concerns. (Wood preservatives)
• Strength
• Handling characteristics
• Corrosion resistance
9.6.2.1 Concrete Poles

Concrete poles are used in areas where corrosion is an issue. These are typically, but not
limited to, marine environments and coastal zones with corrosive soil conditions. Concrete
pole designs include square and round poles exhibiting a uniform taper from top to bottom
(butt). Square poles can be easier to cast and thereby cheaper than rounded or other
design shapes. The spun cast poles tend to be lighter and stronger than static cast
concrete poles. Poles are constructed as the following:
• Solid Concrete
• Pre-Stressed Concrete: Spun-Cast
• Pre-Stressed Concrete: Statically Cast
• Hybrid — Concrete and Steel Poles.
Advantages of using or constructing on concrete poles:
• Concrete poles may be pre-drilled so there is little, or no drilling required in the field.
o Drilling of a concrete pole is not recommended for installing hardware.
o Drilling MUST be approved in writing from the pole owner.
o Preferable to use banding straps.
• A ground may be included on or within the pole infrastructure. Internal or external
bonding of the Comcast network MUST follow the pole owner requirements.
9.6.2.2 Steel Poles

Steel poles will be encountered in the field and may be preferred by power companies
because of initial cost considerations (lower material and installation labor cost than
comparable wood pole) particularly if taller poles are required for enhanced clearances
and longer span requirements.
Wood poles may be changed to steel poles for the following reasons:
• Wood pole failure, requiring a change-out.
• Tops of wood poles tend to be damaged by lightning and woodpeckers.
71
Enterprise Standard
• Steel pole structure and grounding provide better performance in lightning prone
areas. Lightning energy is shed away from the infrastructure more efficiently.
Advantages of using or constructing on steel poles:
• Steel poles are pre-drilled, little or no drilling is required in the field.
o Drilling of a steel pole is not recommended for installing hardware.
o Drilling MUST be approved in writing from the pole owner.
o Preferable to use banding straps.
• A ground is typically included on the base of the steel poles, eliminating the need
to drive ground rods.
• Fiberglass cross arms and other hardware typically used on wood poles can be
used on steel poles.
• Steel poles can by guyed using the same hardware used for wood poles.
• Permanent attachments can be welded onto the poles for attaching guys. Welding
can only be done with the written consent of the pole owner.
9.6.2.3 Fiberglass or Poles of Fiber Reinforced Construction

Fiberglass or Fiber Reinforced Composite (FRC) poles are constructed of materials that
combine fiberglass strength members with cross-linked polyester resins and a variety of
chemical additives to produce a lightweight, strong and weather resistant structure. FRC
poles may incorporate other ingredients such as fillers, catalyst, UV inhibitors and
pigments.
FRC poles are increasingly being used for many distribution and transmission applications
such as pole lines, cross arms, etc. FRC poles have been successfully deployed in remote
locations with difficult access and restricted easements:
• Rocky terrain and environmentally sensitive areas
• Areas where wood poles have been heavily damaged by lightning, rot,
woodpeckers, etc.
9.6.2.4 Pole Hardware

FRC poles are pre-configured for hardware. Little or no drilling required in the field.
• Avoid hardware that has cleats, prongs or spurs designed for wood poles. Use
hardware designed for wood poles with flat backs.
• Avoid sharp edge contact by ensuring the radius of curved hardware is correctly
matched to the pole diameter.
• Spread the load over the pole surface with square curved washers.
• Back through bolts with curved square washers.
• Use pole bands;
72
Enterprise Standard
o Pole bands are effective if the pole has a taper.

o DO NOT use pole bands that incorporate a through bolt.
• Hardware components designed with a small radius will result in a sharp edge
contacting the pole wall. If there are no larger radii versions of the hardware
available, place a backer plate or use square curved washers between the pole and
the hardware component to protect the pole.
• Wood, steel or composite cross arms and cross braces can be used with FRC
poles.
• A ground may be included on the pole infrastructure. Internal or external bonding
of the Comcast network MUST follow the pole owner requirements.
9.6.2.5 Hardware for Non-wood Poles

Hardware for non-wood poles is distinctively different, both physically and handling
characteristics. Correct hardware MUST be used on the non-wood pole based on the
material used to build the pole.
Note: Consult with the pole owner for the correct hardware to use.
• DO NOT use wood pole line hardware on non-wood infrastructure.
• Using the wrong hardware will negatively impact the reliability of the network.
For information on functional performance requirements of pole attachments as well as
guidelines for non-wood poles, refer to Telcordia GR-180-CORE, Generic Requirements
for Hardware Attachments for Steel, Concrete, and Fiberglass Poles.
9.6.2.6 Guys
• Down guy hardware for wood poles have spurs and prongs that dig into the wood
pole for additional stability for the guying hardware.
• These cannot be used on non-wood poles since they are ineffective to provide the
stability required.
• Smooth hardware with rounded plates that conform to the surface of the non-wood
pole surface. The hardware ought to match the curvature or the surface geometry
of the pole.
• For FRC poles, a self-tapping screw can be used and are required. Avoid driven
fasteners such as nails and staples.
Note: Consult with the pole owner for the correct hardware to use.
73
Enterprise Standard
9.6.2.7 Hole Drilling

If a non-wood pole is placed, the pole owner may have had the foresight to accommodate
the other joint users that may attach to the pole. Pre-drilled holes can only be a benefit for
non-wood poles if the holes are at the correct height and position for the attachment of
cables and other aerial plant items.
Strands or guys may approach the pole at different angles. Predrilled holes may not be in
the right positions for the installation. Once set the pole will not be capable of being rotated
to orient the pole correctly in order to accommodate the hardware.
Note: Consult with the pole owner and get recommendations in writing prior to modifying
the pole by drilling or other methods.
• The recommendation is, Do Not drill or add additional holes to non-wood poles.
• Many holes or holes that are too close together on any pole will impact the structural
integrity of the pole.
• If drilling is required use the appropriate bits or hole-saws to accommodate the
structure being drilled.
9.6.2.8 Lag Screws and Support Straps

• Attachments using lag bolts, teeth, nails and staples are not advisable for non-wood
poles.
• Through-bolts, where applicable, are used instead of lag bolts for maximum
bonding to the non-wood pole and to avoid loosening of hardware. These MUST
be supplemented with square curved washers or square washers to match the
facial surface of the pole to maximize the bonding and gripping force.
• General fastener hardware for non-hardwood poles MUST support the non-wood
material the pole is fabricated from.
9.6.2.9 Banded Hardware Attachments

• Using banding hardware will avoid the issues associated with drilling non-wood
poles.
• Banded hardware MUST adhere to the pole through varying temperature and
loading conditions.
Note: Additional detail can be found in the Telcordia Blue Book – Manual of Construction
Procedures.
74
Enterprise Standard
Pole Framing and Hardware Placement Guidelines

Pole will be used as a generic term describing a wood, steel, concrete, fiber reinforced
composite or other material that is used to support aerial infrastructure.
Pole framing is the action of preparing the pole or structure for the placement of hardware
to support the Comcast plant. Separation requirements to joint users on the pole have
been covered and SHOULD be reviewed.
• All through-bolts, eyebolts, and other construction hardware MUST be galvanized
and have a 5/8” diameter.
• When drilling the pole for the 5/8” hardware, go through the thickest / diameter of
the pole and as level as possible at the correct height.
• After installing the hardware there MUST NOT be more than 1 1/2-inches or less
than three full threads of the through-bolt extending beyond the outside of the
square nut or eye nut.
• Washers MUST be placed square to the pole behind the bolt head and the square
nut on the opposite side. It should not resemble a diamond shape.
• Suspension clamps MUST be three-bolt and galvanized.
Figure 9-19: Through-Bolt Excess Figure 9-20: Three Bolt Clamp

Thread Length
• Always use a curved three-bolt suspension clamp when the strand makes a slight
change in angle from a straight line. Use this type of clamp for angles up to 20
degrees. See Figure 9-19 for the curved three-bolt clamp pole configuration at a
pole location where the strand may angle up to 20-degrees.
• Place a down guy at this pole to oppose any side pull on the pole.
75
Enterprise Standard
Figure 9-21: Low Angled Pole Line Curved Three-Bolt Clamp
Note: Place a down guy at this pole to oppose and side pull on the pole
76
Enterprise Standard
Suspension Clamp Orientation

• The lip of the suspension clamp MUST always be below the through-bolt and facing
the pole.
• Always place the suspension clamps on the threaded end of the through-bolt.
Figure 9-22: Suspension Clamp Orientation
Dead-end Construction
• Dead-end construction attachments can be attached to the end of a through-bolt.
• Eye nuts MUST be turned vertical, except when the angle exceeds 45 degrees. If
greater than 45 degrees, the eye nut MUST be turned horizontal.
Figure 9-23: Dead-end Configuration
77
Enterprise Standard
Pole Washer Placement

• Always keep washers square to the pole (not diamond shape).
• The preferred clearance between the cable strand and other communication facility
strand on the same pole is 18". The minimum clearance is 12".
Figure 9-24: Pole Washer Placement
78
Enterprise Standard
The following subsections will describe different methods of construction. The descriptions
may not be inclusive of all possible construction methods.
Crossover at Pole
A crossover point in any CATV plant is a spot where one strand coming from one direction
crosses over another strand coming from a different direction.
A pole attached crossover is made only when that pole is in line with all other poles in
relation to the crossover point. Always maintain a minimum of 4" separation between
suspension bolts at a pole attached crossover point. This reduces weakening the pole.
Bond the strands together with # 6 ground wire and two KUL bonding clamps at the
crossover point. This maintains the same electrical potential in both strands.
Figure 9-25: Crossover at the Pole
79
Enterprise Standard
Strand or Mid-span Crossover

A strand or mid-span type crossover is made when no pole is located at the crossover
point.
Watch the climbing space.
• Always maintain a 6" minimum clearance from the pole with an aerial crossover
clamp. See Figure 9-26.
• Always use an aerial crossover clamp whenever the crossover is mid-span and the
spans cross at approximately the same level. See Figure 9-27.
• Crossover clamps will be used to prevent double framing poles.
Figure 9-26: Strand Crossover Figure 9-27: Crossover Clamp
80
Enterprise Standard
Branch Strand Termination

A branch strand termination occurs when a strand coming from one direction ends on a
pole that also supports a through strand.
Figure 9-28 illustrates a Branch Strand Termination using guy-grip dead-ends, a guy hook,
and a down guy attachment strap. Use an angled thimble eye bolt instead of the down guy
attachment strap. Also shown is bonding using # 6 copper wire and KUL bonding clamps.
Figure 9-28: Branch Strand Termination Configuration A
81
Enterprise Standard
• Figure 9-29 illustrates the through strand on the same side of the pole as the branch
strand termination. A thimble eye nut is used instead of the guy hook. A thimble eye
angle bolt is used instead of a guy strap. Bonding is achieved by using the strand
ends and KUL clamps.
Figure 9-29: Branch Strand Termination Configuration B
82
Enterprise Standard
Figure 9-30 illustrates the through strand on the opposite side of the pole from the branch
strand using a thimble eye bolt. Bonding is accomplished by using the strand tails and
KUL clamps. Notice that the threaded end of the thru bolt is always on the suspension
clamp side.
Figure 9-30: Branch Strand Termination Configuration C
When a down guy strap attachment is used with a guy-grip dead-end, use only the strap
with the proper oval shape like the thimble eye bolt. If the guy-grip dead-end does not fit
completely into the guy strap and only contacts the side of the dead-end, DO NOT USE
THE GUY STRAP! An improper fit causes fatigue and failure of the guy-grip dead-end.
83
Enterprise Standard
Strand Dead-end
A strand dead-end is any point in a Comcast plant where the strand terminates or stops.
This is the point that the strand is pulled to the desired tension. Cable(s) lashed to it later.
This is also the point that will have one or more of the guys and anchors described in
Section 8.
When using the guy grip dead-end, attach the dead-end to a thimble eye bolt or thimble
eye nut, whichever is applicable. The thimble eye bolt or nut gives a large, smooth, round
surface and will not weaken the supporting bail.
At a termination point,
• Pass the strand through the attachment device, leaving a tail.
• Bypass the pole with the tail and bond the strand tail to the down guy about 6"
beyond the dead end.
• Bond a tail from the dead-end and the down guy at the pole using a KUL bonding
clamp. See 9.7
• Ground the strand to an existing ground. Use a KUL bonding clamp on the strand
to the existing ground.
• If no ground exists, install one. Use # 6 soft drawn copper wire and a KUL bonding
clamp on the strand in front of any attachment device.
(Always attach to the strand only and not to any dead-end device).
Use a 5/8" X 8' ground rod and a C-LOK clamp to the #6 wire. Any time a ground is
installed, a telephone bond may be required. (Check with local utilities.)
Figure 9-31: Pole Framing Dead-end Pole with Guy
84
Enterprise Standard
Guy Grips and Strand Splice

Guy grips and strand splices are integral in supporting and anchoring the aerial
infrastructure. Any strand splice, deadend or anchor device MUST meet the rated breaking
strength (RBS). Any device that cannot meet the RBS specification MUST NOT be used
in aerial plant with 1/4" and 5/16” strand.
• 1/4” EHS strand breaking point is 6,600 lbs.
• 5/16” EHS strand breaking point is 11,200 lbs.
9.7.5.1 Guy Grips (B Strand Grips)

Guy grips may be used to terminate guy or suspension strand. The grip is supported by a
guy-hook, strain insulator or thimble eye bolts or thimble eye type hardware. Guy grips are
spirally formed high strength steel wires that when installed will encompass the strand
providing a strong secure grip on the strand. As tension is applied to the grip, the tighter
the grip holds the strand.
• Guy grips MUST be selected for the size (diameter) of strand and the length is
determined by the application.
• MUST be Extra High Strength (EHS) compatible with the strand.
• Follow vendor guidelines on the installation and use of guy-grips.
• Typically, a one-use device, the grip can be adjusted during the first three months
after initial installation for tensioning. They MUST be replaced if the location is
tensioned three times.
Figure 9-32: Guy Grips
9.7.5.2 Strand Splice

Strand splices are used to bring two strand ends together to provide a continuous strand
path. Strand splices are spirally formed high strength steel wires that when installed will
encompass the strand providing a strong secure grip on the strand. As tension is applied
to the grip, the tighter the grip holds the strand.
• Strand splices MUST be selected for the size (diameter) of strand and the length is
determined by the application.
• MUST be Extra High Strength (EHS) compatible with the strand.
85
Enterprise Standard
• Follow vendor guidelines on the installation and use of guy-grips.

• Typically, a one-use device, the grip can be adjusted during the first three months
after initial installation for tensioning. Strand splices MUST be replaced if the
location is tensioned three times.
Figure 9-33: Strand Splice
9.7.5.3 Strand Vise or Automatic Dead-end

MUST NOT BE USED in Comcast plant.
Strand vise or an Automatic Dead-end have been used for strand dead-end applications
with overhead or down guy wire. Strand Vise or Automatic Dead ends were designed for
providing a termination to guy lines supporting utility poles. They are fundamentally
designed as a one-use product.
MUST NOT be used with 1/4" or 5/16“, 7 wire strand.
They have a maximum hold capability based on 90% of the strand RBS
Figure 9-34: Strand Vise or Automatic Deadend.
9.7.5.4 Automatic Strand Splice (Pickle)

MUST NOT be used in Comcast plant.
Automatic strand splices are used to bring two strand ends together to provide a
continuous strand path. It is a mechanical friction device that applies tension to the strand.
As tension is applied to the splice, the tighter the internal jaws grip strand.
MUST NOT be used with 1/4" or 5/16“, 7 wire strand.
NOT designed for dynamic loads. Rated to hold a maximum of 90% of the (RBS) of the
strand used.
86
Enterprise Standard
Figure 9-35: Automatic Strand Splice (Pickle)
False Dead End

A false dead-end is used in two situations.
• The first is when the strand MUST continue for one or two poles to the end of the
pole line and the last pole in line cannot be down guyed. These one or two spans
MUST be slacked to eliminate as much side pull on the pole as possible.
• The second case occurs in a long strand run. In this case the strand has one or
more false dead ends. This depends on the number of cables and the length of the
run. It is placed to maintain the proper tension on the support strand. See Figure
9-36, Figure 9-37 and Figure 9-38.
• The support strand can run a minimum of 4 inches above or below the false dead-
end strand. Or the strand can run horizontally on a support bracket, such as the
false dead-end with arm, or equivalent. The tie-in point of the false dead-end strand
to the support strand is not less than 10' from the pole and not more than 15'. Use
the same material at the pole as that for a normal down guy. (See Section 8 Anchors
and Guying). Use two three-bolt guy clamps and a serving sleeve on the extension
arm false dead-end. See Figure 9-39. (This type of false dead-end is very rarely
used.)
Figure 9-36: False Dead-end for a Slack Span
87
Enterprise Standard
Figure 9-37: False Dead-end Anchored
Figure 9-38: False Dead-end Non-anchored
88
Enterprise Standard
Figure 9-39: False Dead-end with Arm
Double Framed Double Dead end

Double frame dead-ends are used where strands intersect or terminate at a pole from
different angles. They are shown in Figure 9-40 and Figure 9-41.
Figure 9-40: Double Framed Dead-end
89
Enterprise Standard
Double Dead-end Attachment
Figure 9-41: Double Dead End
Extension Devices: Arms, Stand-off Bracket, etc.

Prior to placing an extension device, request approval or have previous approval from the
pole owner.
Extension devices such as, extension arms and stand-off brackets are used in locations
where additional spacing may be required to provide sufficient clearance between
Comcast and joint user facilities. These devices move the hardware from being directly
attached to the pole to being mounted at a distance from the pole. Instead of being vertical
clearances to the joint user equipment the clearance will be met horizontally.
• Extension devices MUST be placed at designated locations identified during the
walkout for new construction.
• Extension devices MUST be placed at designated locations when a change in the
plant, through a rebuild or upgrade, impacts the clearance to joint users’ facilities.
• Prior to placing an extension device, get approval or have previous approval from
the pole owner.
9.7.8.1 Comcast Extension Device Clearances

• Clearances to the power joint users MUST be maintained at the pole and midspan.
o 40-inches to the power neutral at the pole bolt-to-bolt
o 30-inches at midspan to the power neutral
o 40-inches to the bottom of a transformer (non-effectively bonded)
o 30-inches to the bottom of a transformer at the pole if the messenger is effectively
bonded to the neutral throughout the service area. NESC Rule 238 B and Table
238-1.
90
Enterprise Standard
• Clearances to communication joint user(s) MUST be maintained.

o 12-inches minimum or 18-inches preferred bolt to bolt at the pole.
o 6-inches minimum at the mid-span.
o 2017 NESC rule 235H2 specifies the minimum clearance between conductors,
cables, and equipment of one communication user to another anywhere in the
span shall not be less than 4-inches except by agreement between the parties
involved including the pole owner.
Figure 9-42: Standoff Clearances Figure 9-43: 18” Bolt-Bolt Clearances
91
Enterprise Standard
9.7.8.2 Extension Device Deployment Considerations

Extension device considerations are:
• Designed into new-build construction at locations where it may be difficult to provide
joint user clearance without significant modification to the existing or proposed
facilities.
• Used in locations where clearance may need to be modified such as during an
upgrade or rebuild of the plant.
• Used to insure proper lateral clearances around trees, obstructions, etc. in order to
maintain a straight strand lead. Use only approved extension arms specified by the
construction requirements.
• Consider using an extension device where the pole is slightly out of line.
• Use the appropriate extension device for the pole type,
Requires drilling of the pole or MUST be placed on existing 5/8-inch
Wood
hardware with a lag bolt for securing the device.
Steel MUST be banded except where mounting hardware is existing.
Concrete MUST be banded except where mounting hardware is existing.
Reinforced
MUST be banded except where mounting hardware is existing.
Fiberglass
• Where it is necessary to install an extension arm on a pole that has a tangent pull,
a steel arm MUST be installed.
Consider the environment and loads that will be placed on the extension device. The
extension device has load limitations as specified by the manufacturer. The closer to the
pole the load point is the more load that can be accommodated. These loads are not just
the strand and equipment but weather (wind and ice) and seasonal changes that subject
the extension device to additional loading.
Note: Any changes to the approved extension device MUST be brought to Comcast
Corporate CONNECT Engineering for a decision on the new, changed, or modified
product request.
During maintenance or plant upgrades, use of an extension device to get additional
clearance can be incorporated. Before proceeding, other plant conditions MUST be
considered. These are centered on the strand that is existing having already been built
and tensioned and the existing spacing to other joint users. Moving the attachment point
will change the distance between joint users and will change the geometry of the strand.
Adding distance from the pole will increase the tension placed on the strand.
Figure 9-44 and Figure 9-45 attempt to show the results of changing the geometry.
92
Enterprise Standard
• As the angle is changed, slack that was originally in place will be lessened.
• Depending upon the stand-off bracket length the original tension will be
increased.
Figure 9-44: Changing the Strand Geometry Top View
Figure 9-45: Changing the Strand Geometry Front View
NOTE: The strand configuration changes are exaggerated for illustration.
An existing span will have the form of a parabola from the span clamps to the center.
Changing the geometry will tighten the span, the center of the parabola will move up.
• Every effort MUST be made to maintain the strand on the same side of the pole as
the other joint users have placed their plant.
• Utilizing the other side of the pole from other joint users to gain clearance is NOT
acceptable. This is called “boxing” a pole.
o Boxing MUST NOT be used in aerial plant construction and is a violation of
Comcast construction standards.
o Climbing space MUST be preserved. There MUST always be sufficient climbing
space reserved for all personnel.
93
Enterprise Standard
9.7.8.3 Epoxirod Stand-off Bracket

Epoxirod is the preferred Comcast extension device. It has an extension structure made
of high-strength non-conductive fiberglass. The fiberglass rod is coated with an ultraviolet
resistant paint or a silicon coating and is fitted with aluminum alloy or hot-dip galvanized
end fittings.
The Epoxirod stand-off bracket is manufactured using a +15° angle and specified length
to provide height and distance from the pole.
Figure 9-46: Epoxirod Stand-off Bracket
Stand-off brackets have loading limitations. The shorter the length of the stand-off bracket
the more load that can be accommodated. These loads are not just the strand and
equipment but weather (wind and ice) and seasonal changes that subject the stand-off
bracket to additional loading. Table 9-3 shows the recommended loading of the Epoxirod
stand-off brackets based on length. 12 inch and 18 inch are shown. Additional lengths
associated with A in are found at:
https://hubbellcdn.com/catalogpage/FCP_Catalog_Page_12-33.pdf
For Epoxirod loading information see Table 9-3.
Figure 9-47: Epoxirod Loads
94
Enterprise Standard
The Vertical, Longitudinal and Transverse loading actions can be inferred on other
extension device configurations. Check with manufacturer specifications to determine
the loading that can be supported for each device configuration.
Table 9-3: Specified Stand-off Bracket Loading
Minimum Ultimate *
Length A Vertical V Longitudinal L Transverse T
(lbs.) (lbs.) (lbs.)
12 inch 2100 1300 1500
18 inch 1500 1000 1500
*Recommended maximum working load is 50% of the minimum

ratings listed
Multiple vendors have CIFA’s for Epoxirod extension arms or extension arms that are
similar in construction and are listed in Table 9-4.
Table 9-4: Non-conductive Extension Arm CIFA Numbers
CIFA NUM MANUFACTURER MFG PART NUM ITEM DESCRIPTION

EXTENSION ARM (BRACKET). 15 INCH.
000011602 EPOXIROD T653-0707-15
FIBERGLASS
EXTENSION ARM (BRACKET). 12 INCH.
000014952 EPOXIROD T653-12
FIBERGLASS.
POWER AND
000044877 G1MDA112AF H00.ARM-STANDOFF 12IN
TELEPHONE SUPPLY
POWER AND
TELEPHONE SUPPLY
POWER AND
TELEPHONE SUPPLY
POWER AND
TELEPHONE SUPPLY
POWER AND
TELEPHONE SUPPLY
POWER AND
000044882 G1MDA130AF H00.ARM-STANDOFF 30INCH
TELEPHONE SUPPLY
000041653 HUBBELL G5568M125S Arm Extension Fiberglass1-1/2x12IN
000041654 HUBBELL G5568M185S Arm Ext Fiberglass 1 1/2 x 18IN
95
Enterprise Standard
Illustration of an Epoxirod Stand-off Bracket usage at a node location to provide the

clearance to joint user facilities.
Figure 9-48: Epoxirod Clearances with OM6000 Node
Note: Clearances to power facilities MUST be met at the pole or the extension device.
9.7.8.4 Wooden Extension Arms

DO NOT USE wooden extension arms for new construction. It is shown as they may be
encountered in the field and MUST be maintained.
As an example of the non-use of wooden arms, highlighted in a pole owners’ guideline is
the following; The use of wood arms for any communication cable attachments is not
permitted for new installations, except with the prior written approval of pole owner’s
engineering personnel for each specific attachment location.
Note: If a wooden crossarm is specified for new construction it MUST be submitted to
Corporate CONNECT Engineering for use approval and MUST receive written approval
from the pole owner.
Figure 9-49: Wooden Extension Arm Illustration
96
Enterprise Standard
9.7.8.5 Extension Bolts

Extension bolts can be used in locations where clearance may be critical such as a street
or alley. They can also be used in locations where a pole may be slightly out of alignment
and the extra depth allows the strand to be straighter between poles.
Extension bolts can be used in locations where going higher than the communications
joint user is not an available option. The clearance of the communications joint user
equipment is meeting the minimum clearance from to the power joint user.
Note: Connecting to another joint user’s hardware will require additional permissions and
is NOT RECOMMENDED.
Figure 9-50: Extension Bolts and Reinforcing Straps
Figure 9-51: 4-inch Extension Bolt Example with Dimensions
97
Enterprise Standard
Figure 9-52: 8-inch Extension Bolt Example and Dimensions
Power and Cable Riser

Strand that is to be placed on a pole that has cable or power cable risers MUST meet the
required clearances. It is recommended that 2-inches of clearance is maintained.
• Lock the suspension clamp 3-inches from the pole on a support bolt.
• If 3-inches does not get the required clearance, use an additional means of getting
to the clearance by use a different means of attachment.
Figure 9-53: Power and Cable Riser
98
Enterprise Standard
Strand Installation
Correct installation of the strand is the backbone to building the Comcast aerial network.
It is not only a strength member of the network; it is the device that bonds the Comcast
network to the joint users on the poles and provides a component of the grounding
infrastructure.
The purpose of the strand is to safely support the load of the cable and strand mounted
equipment while meeting OSP structural requirements for local weather conditions within
a region. (Ice Loading or Wind Loading)
Strand tension is calculated using an industry approved strand tensioning tool to meet the
minimum tensioning requirements for the strand size and cable weight for the existing pole
line.
There are instances when tensioning strand to its recommended or full capacity could lead
to contact with an existing joint user plant. This is common when strand and cables are
placed between or below existing plant. In these cases, it is recommended to place the
strand at a tension that will adequately support the cable and provide enough sag to meet
the clearance requirements to the existing aerial cables.
• If a conflict occurs between the strand tension requirements and matching the sag
of adjacent plant, rearrangement of existing plant may be required such as moving
the plant up or down on the pole.
• At all times, clearances MUST be maintained over roadways and from the power
network.
Strand Installation Specifications

• Always install all anchors and guys before installing the strand. Proper guying
attachments require a preform at the pole and a two-bolt clamp and a serving sleeve
at the anchor.
• Load the strand on the trailer so the strand pulls from the top of the reel over the
front of the trailer.
• Always attach the strand to the same side of the pole (field or street) as the
telephone cable. If there is no telephone plant, attach the strand to the same side
of the pole as power (including neutral) of the pole. This is subject to local power
company or pole owner requirements.
• Adjust the strand tension to provide a consistent clearance is maintained between
the Comcast strand and other joint user’s cable throughout the span.
• Always meet all required clearances, at poles and mid-span, including local codes
in the area you are working.
• Where no telephone cable exists, tension the CATV strand as follows:
Where the normal annual temperature excursion is from 0⁰ to 50⁰ F, use a sag ratio of
0.5% at 60⁰F.
99
Enterprise Standard
o Where the normal annual temperature excursion is from 50⁰ to 80⁰F, use a sag
ratio of 1% at 60⁰F.
o Where the normal annual temperature excursion is in excess of 80⁰F, use a sag
ratio of 1.5% at 60⁰F.
Example: Where the annual temperature excursion is 80⁰F, the mid-span sag of 100' span
would be 1'.
• The strand tension is governed by existing utility sag. Always maintain proper
clearances when the weight of the cable is added. Also, consider existing guys when
tensioning any down or overhead guys. NEVER OVER TENSION. There is a
potential to slacken existing non-Comcast strand or guys.
• Never pull the strand tight enough to violate power line clearance requirements with
the intent of sagging it in when the cable is placed.
• Never "box" the pole with the strand route. Boxing refers to running strand in a
previously open quadrant of the pole. This creates a closed-in pole with no free
climbing space or route for pole replacement or removal for any reason by the
owner.
• Exercise caution while pulling strand to prevent damaging joint user’s equipment
and public property.
• Maintain all clearances across streets, alleys, driveways, etc. while installing the
strand.
• Strand may be placed using a vehicle if it is done using a safe method; (i.e., using
a lanyard not tied off hard and fast), and using an approved tension release device
at the vehicle.
• All anchors and guys MUST be installed prior to strand tensioning.
CAUTION: During strand installation never pull strand directly by hand.
• Always isolate the strand, from the puller.

• Hand pull it with a lanyard, rope, etc.
Use false dead-end strand attachments, accompanied with guying, whenever necessary.
This technique is required when it is impossible to place a terminal anchor on the final
pole. It is also required when significant differences in pulling tensions are needed to
maintain proper clearances and to prevent raking un-guyed poles.
• Where slight differences of pulling tension are required between pole spans, tighten
the suspension clamps after the strand is sagged properly.
• If strand splices are required use only approved splices. Place strand splices no
more than 18-inches from the end of the three-bolt clamp at the pole.
• Always use an approved traveling ground when installing the strand. THERE ARE
NO EXCEPTIONS!
100
Enterprise Standard
Equipment Protection
• Every reasonable precaution shall be taken to ensure that all pole mounted utility
equipment is protected from abrasion caused by the support strand during
installation process.
• Every reasonable effort MUST be taken to prevent damage to the galvanized
coating on the support strand during installation.
Anchors and Guys

Anchors and guy wires shall be installed and tensioned prior to strand installation. Proper
tensioning of the support strand creating the appropriate strand sag at the mid-point of the
spans can happen after or in some cases during the strand placement process.
Down-guy tails, at the anchor level, shall be trimmed to a maximum length of two inches
from the preformed grip loop.
Guy and anchor details can be found in Section 8.
Climbing Space
Climbing space is an unobstructed vertical space along the side of a pole. In general, it
consists of an imaginary box 30-inches square, extending at least 40-inches above the
highest communication cable or other facility and 40-inches below the lowest cable.
Figure 9-54: Climbing Space (Top View) Figure 9-55: Climbing Space (Side View)
101
Enterprise Standard
Support Strand
All support strand shall be installed as one continuous piece to the anchor attachment
whenever possible. When it is not possible to install continuous support strand the
appropriate bonding clamp shall be used to provide the correct electrical connection.
• Where short junctions occur in the placement of the strand, use the appropriate
pulley to pull the strand into the junction and follow all normal support strand
installation processes. This will prevent multiple set-ups, speed up production and
improve waste of the support strand.
• All support strand shall be tensioned and sagged to ensure that the proper mid-span
clearance(s) from utility conductors are maintained after the installation of the
coaxial and/or fiber optic cable(s).
• Continuity and electrical bonds shall be formed into the suspension clamp to
prevent accidental injury.
• Where it is not possible to place the bond in the preferred position, the bond MUST
be placed in a location to minimize the possibility of injury, and the wire ends ought
to be cut as closely to the side of the bonding clamp as possible.
• Where a vertical bond is required the copper wire MUST point down the pole with
a minimum amount of wire extending beyond the clamp to prevent injury.
Note: Grounding and bonding details can be found in section 6.
• Support strand shall always be under tension when being installed. Precautions
shall be taken to ensure that no damage occurs to other joint user’s utility equipment
and/or wires, and to maintain proper clearance across walkways, driveways,
streets, ally-ways, roads, highways, and railroads.
• Pole mounted strand brakes shall be installed on the first pole after crossing, but
not limited to; all streets, roads, alleys, highways, railroads and highly trafficked
areas to prevent the support strand from sagging between poles when the pulling
tension is taken off the support strand. Once the support strand is terminated and
secured at the first pole with a hoist, all strand brakes MUST be removed in order
to properly sag the support strand.
• Strand MUST NOT be pulled in with a vehicle that is not equipped with a tension
release device designed for that purpose.
• When installing support strand place the strand trailer or strand reel support device
no closer to the utility pole then the distance from the pole attachment to the ground.
The preferred distance is twice the distance from the ground to pole attachment
distance.
• When pulling the strand, DO NOT jerk the strand. This can easily whip the strand
up into the power lines or cause damage to an adjacent facility
102
Enterprise Standard
Traveling Ground
A traveling ground shall be installed at the trailer or the first pole attachment in order to
ensure electrical safety. The traveling ground shall be attached to an existing vertical
ground or a temporary vertical ground rod. Always use an approved traveling ground when
installing strand. THERE ARE NO EXCEPTIONS.
• Traveling grounds MUST NOT be attached to other utility support messengers.
o DO NOT make a ground connection above the space allocated for Comcast
attachments on the pole.
o Using a traveling ground to ground the strand shall be considered as
supplemental to, and not a substitute for, insulating gloves and other protective
measures.
o On longer pulls, place a traveling ground every 1500 feet.
o Test any vertical power ground conductor to which the grounding roller on the
traveling ground is to be connected.
o An attachment to other utility support messengers can be done with an approval
from the utility or in writing from Regional Engineering.
o DO NOT make a ground connection above the space allocated for Comcast
attachments on the pole.
Under no circumstance shall the placement of a traveling ground violate any of the
codes, ordinances, regulations, or practices set forth in the opening statements of this
document.
Figure 9-56: Traveling Ground
**LEAVE GROUNDING ROLLER IN PLACE UNTIL THE STRAND IS TENSIONED,

DEADENDED, AND PERMANENT GROUNDS ARE ATTACHED!
103
Enterprise Standard
Strand Bonding and Grounding at the Time of Installation

All continuity and electrical bonds as well as all vertical grounds shall be installed at the
same time the support strand is installed.
• Additional vertical grounds or electrical bonds may be required.
• Note where additional grounding and bonding is required, so these locations can
be identified on network design prints.
• Where amplifier and line extender bonding or ground are required, the wire shall
pass through the strand bonding clamp and fasten to the amplifier housing
mounting bracket or to another bonding clamp on the opposite side of the device.
• When constructing support stand to transmission poles where the voltage is sixty-
nine (69) kV and above, the support strand shall be bonded or vertically grounded
at every pole.
• Bonding or grounding clamps shall be fastened to the support strand as close to
the side of the suspension clamp as possible. However, the bonding clamp shall in
no way cause damage to any coaxial and/or fiber optic cable(s) lashed to the
support strand.
• Support strand bonds and vertical grounds shall be installed every first, last, tenth
pole, plus or minus one pole. Additional bonding and grounding may be required,
however, in no event shall the distance between bonds/grounds exceed twelve
hundred (1200) feet.
Note: Additional bonding and ground detail can be found in section 7.
Measuring Strand Tension

After the strand is placed in the pole-line hardware, it MUST be tensioned so that the final
sag with the cable loading will not be less than the required separation from other joint
users of the pole space. Minimum vertical clearances MUST be maintained at the pole
and at the mid-point of each span.
When tensioning strand for the use of supporting cable(s), the strand shall be tensioned
to:
• Provide sufficient support for the cable(s) and cable apparatus under the expected
Outside Plant weather conditions (i.e., heat, cold, ice, and wind)
• Meet clearance minimums stated in Section 9.4 Cable Clearances, of this
document.
Strand tension is temperature dependent. Measure the air temperature or secure an air
temperature by using a measuring device that is local and experiencing the same
atmospheric conditions as to where the strand construction is taking place. Use the
temperature to determine the tension that can be applied to the strand line.
104
Enterprise Standard
Table 9-5: Stringing Tension Pounds vs Temperature / Span Length
Temperature Stringing Tension in Pounds

Span Under 250 Spans 250 Feet Spans Over 450
⁰F ⁰C
Feet to 450 Feet Feet
0⁰ -18⁰ 900 850 775
20⁰ -7⁰ 800 750 725
40⁰ 4⁰ 700 675 650
60⁰ 15⁰ 600 600 600
80⁰ 27⁰ 500 525 550
100⁰ 38 425 475 535
Use a dynamometer to determine the tension of the suspension strand.

For best results, first pull the strand until it is tighter than the desired tension; then slack
off until the desired tension is obtained. This extra tension MUST NOT exceed 125% of
the designed stringing tension or 500 pounds, whichever is less.
Figure 9-57: Dynamometer

Tension Measurement Points
The points at which strand tension SHOULD be measured under various conditions are
as follows:
• Straight sections free from changes in grade:
o 1 to less than 10 spans - Measure the tension near the middle of the section of
strand.
o 10 to 20 spans - Measure the tension first at a point about two-thirds of the
distance from the pulling end; then, at a point about one-third of the distance
from the pulling end.
o Over 20 spans - Measure the tension first at a point about three-fourths of the
distance from the pulling end; then at a point about one-half of the distance;
finally, at one-fourth of the distance.
• Sections including changes in grade or corners:
105
Enterprise Standard
o Measure the tension first at the far side of the farthest corner or pole where
change in grade occurs; then at each corner or change-in-grade pole, working
toward the pulling end.
o As the desired tension is obtained in each portion of the strand being pulled,
tighten the bolts of the suspension clamps.
Bending and Cutting Strand

Do not make small radius bends in the strand at areas marked by bands of paint. These
painted areas signify the location the factory spliced the individual wires of the strand.
• Secure both sides of the strand before cutting it to prevent it from flipping into
something or someone. Bind both sides of the strand with tape or wire to prevent
the strand from spreading and unraveling.
• Cut the strand as far as possible from any temporary attachments holding it.
• At points where the strand can be used for bonding, leave enough extra strand to
bond with KUL clamps.
Strand and Cable Installation Complete

Upon the completion of strand installation, verify that all waste and extra components have
been picked up and secured. All waste MUST be placed in an approved disposal location
for potential recycling.
106
Enterprise Standard
10. Aerial Coaxial Cable Construction

Summary
Proper care and handling of coaxial cables during installation is critical to the long-term
reliability of a broadband coaxial cable network. The quality of the initial installation is a
major determining factor in the longevity of the system and the degree of continuing
maintenance required during the life of the network. During construction, proper attention
MUST be given to the mechanical and environmental factors which can cause degradation
and failure.
The cable is subject to daily mechanical stresses resulting from day-to-night temperature
changes and the consequent forces of expansion and contraction. These effects can be
offset to a large degree with proper awareness of sag and tension factors and properly
formed and placed expansion loops. Additional mechanical stresses are induced during
the rigors of installation and handling.
Comcast Specifications Summary

The installation of aerial fiber cable requires:
• Comprehensive engineering.
• Care when pulling and handling the cable.
• Good installation methods and equipment.
• Diagrams of aerial hardware placement specifications can be found in Section 09.
• DO NOT USE pre-lashed strand and cable.
Aerial Coaxial Cable Bonding and Grounding

• Any conductive cables and strand installed near high voltage lines MUST be properly
grounded and bonded.
o Fiber cables that contain a metallic component, shield, armor or corrugated steel
tape MUST be grounded and bonded.
o If equipped the steel messenger shall be grounded and bonded. See Section 09
for details.
Aerial Clearances
• Maintain proper clearances between the fiber optic cable and the power cables.
• Allow for sag changes of the steel messenger wire (strand) in various weather
conditions.
o Steel messenger wire will expand and increase sag in warm weather.
o Steel messenger wire will contract and decrease sag in cold weather.
107
Enterprise Standard
• The steel messenger and fiber MUST be kept on one side of the pole. Avoid
transitioning from one side of the pole to the other on subsequent poles. Follow
existing utilities. Do Not Box-in a pole.
Coaxial Cable Installation

• When the coaxial cable will be supported by strand, the cable will not be installed
until all strand is secured to the support structure. All dead-ends and down guys are
tensioned properly, and the support strand is grounded and bonded.
• Cable size, number of cables, and length of spans, MUST follow the plant design.
• Cable shall be lashed with lashing wire to the suspension strand by means of a
suitable lashing machine.
• Cable will be secured to the strand using lashing wire. Size (.045”)
• The pitch of the lashing wire MAY be from 10 to 15 inches and MUST be constant
for any section of cable of the same size.
• The cable shall be snug against the suspension strand throughout the span. It shall
be supported in a position directly below the strand where possible.
• Double lashing is required for single or multiple cable installations.
• Double lashing is required in an overlash installation.
• Maintain proper tension with the lashing wire and avoid excessive tension.
• Lashing wire will be terminated at a lashing wire clamp.
• Spacers and straps will be used at specified locations.
Coaxial Cable Expansion Loop

• Expansion loops will be placed at each pole.
• Expansion loops will be placed before and after an active device.
• For cables ≤ 0.750” cable expansion loop 12" flat bottom will have a length of 43"
• For cables > 0.750 cable expansion loop 15" flat bottom will have a length of 50"
• Expansion loop depth MUST be, minimum 5” and maximum 6”.
• Diagrams of aerial hardware placement specifications can be found in section 9.
• DO NOT USE pre-lashed strand and cable.
Construction and Maintenance Safety

Construction and maintenance of a Comcast coaxial plant requires a substantial amount
of manpower, tools and equipment. Aerial construction will expose the manpower, tools
and equipment to hazards, dependent on field conditions and circumstances.
108
Enterprise Standard
Only a qualified employee can be assigned duties that could cause harm or potential harm
to the construction crew, general public, cable plant, and other utilities. OSHA defines a
qualified employee as "any worker who by reason of training and experience has
demonstrated his ability to safely perform his duties."
Personnel MUST be familiar with the operation of the tools and equipment in variable field
conditions. Construction personnel performing the work MUST be qualified Comcast or
OSHA, NEC, NESC.
systems or work that involves their respective properties and rights-of-way. Pole lease
agreements often stipulate specific practices related to safety and construction.
Maintain proper clearances between the coaxial cable and the power cables.
Note: These codes, regulations, and specified practices should be understood.
Safety Equipment and Personnel

Aerial cable installation can be hazardous as personnel can work at considerable height
above the ground on ladders, bucket trucks or even climbing poles. This work might place
the worker near electrical transmission wires. All personnel MUST have proper training
and personal protective equipment before being allowed to work on aerial installations.
To Reduce the Chance of Accidental Injury:
• All Comcast and business partner personnel involved with aerial installation MUST
be thoroughly familiar with the operation of the equipment and construction
apparatus being used.
• Verify that all equipment (ladders, bucket trucks, reel trailers, etc.) are in proper
working condition. Inspect for defects and replace if found in an unsound condition.
• Use only Comcast-approved equipment for lighting, heating, and other operations.
• Arrange or secure any material in a bucket truck or on a ladder so that it cannot fall.
Materials and equipment MUST NOT unnecessarily impede pedestrian or vehicular
traffic.
• Allocate the appropriate number and type of safety personnel and equipment called
for following Comcast’s safety procedures. Follow all local guidance, codes and
permit restrictions to comply with safety requirements.
• Such personnel and equipment MAY include flagmen, pilot vehicles, roadside
barricades, warning signs, traffic cones, beacon lights, etc.
• Always have ABC-rated fire extinguishers on board all Comcast and business
partner vehicles.
109
Enterprise Standard
Safety Equipment Usage

To Reduce the Chance of Accidental Injury:
• Use protective leather gloves and, if necessary, lineman’s rubber gloves.
o Use leather gloves when climbing or descending a pole, and when working with
sharp instruments or materials.
o Wear rubber gloves when working near exposed electrical circuits.
• Safety boots with steel toes.
• Protective clothing with long sleeves.
• Gloves.
• Hardhat.
• Use a safety harness on all bucket trucks and aerial lifts. A body belt and safety strap
for the bucket or platform MUST be used when the equipment is in operation to
minimize the chance of falling and or injury.
Climbing Poles or Ladders
• Before climbing a pole, inspect it for significant deterioration and safety hazards
(splintering, insect nests, sharp protrusions, etc.).
• Always keep hands free when climbing or descending a pole or ladder. DO NOT
CARRY TOOLS or CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS when ascending or descending
a pole or ladder.
• Always lower line equipment from strand level with a handline.
• Ladder MUST be in a good condition.
• Ladder MUST suit the application.
• Ladder MUST be positioned correctly (1-4 ratio).
• Ladder MUST be properly secured (strapped and held).
• Climbing up or down ladders always face the ladder and maintain a 3-point contact.
This effectively means that 2-hands and 1-foot or 2-feet and 1-hand MUST always
be on the ladder.
• A worker MUST be correctly positioned on the ladder.
• A safety harness MUST be worn and secured to the pole once the working position
is reached.
• Never climb intermediate poles if the span they support is being placed under
tension.
• Do not step on cables, cable enclosures, or suspended equipment which might
provide unsafe footholds.
• Personnel normally MUST NOT remain in an area where a cable is being pulled
around a piece of hardware under tension. A craftsman can remain in such an area
(for example, to observe the alignment of a cable around a corner block), if they stay
clear of the hardware under tension and have a clear path to safety.
110
Enterprise Standard
Clearances
Clearances established during strand construction MUST be maintained when adding
fiber cable and equipment. Clearances are covered in Section 9, Subsection 9.4.
Lashing and Handling Coaxial Cable

Mechanical stress causing damage to the cable is of great concern during the cable
placement process. The cables can be damaged by lashing the cable overly tight,
exceeding the maximum allowable pulling tension or exceeding the minimum allowable
bending radii. Deformation of the physical geometry of the cable may immediately affect
the electrical performance of the cable and may shorten the life expectancy of the cable.
Deformation of the physical geometry of the cable usually results from impacts, elongation,
flattening, kinking or longitudinal indentations. Coaxial cables are affected by
deformations of the cable geometry based on the impedance being a direct function of the
concentricity of the conductors.
Lashing Coaxial Cable

The following itemization of tasks and concerns are specific to lashing coaxial cables.
• A cable positioner may optionally be arranged ahead of the lasher to position the
cables that enter the lasher.
• A length of coaxial cable, i.e., a tail of at least 3 feet, MUST be left at all splicing
locations. The length of the cable tail is dependent on the splicing that MUST be
done. Design schematics MUST be reviewed to determine the length of tail that is
required. It is typical to pull a cable tail across the face of the pole to 48-inches on
the opposite side of the pole. This practice eliminates errors related to cable tail
lengths. The end of the cable MUST be capped and loosely tied to the strand.
• New cables lashed to the strand MUST be double lashed (use two lashing wires).
• A lashing wire clamp MUST be properly positioned, and the lashing wire secured to
the clamp.
• Lashing MUST NOT be started until the cable tails are secured, expansion loops are
formed, or the cable is formed around hardware as needed.
• If expansion loops are made in the cable, the expansion loop bender MUST be kept
inside of the loop as the lasher is started down the span.
o The bender MUST NOT be removed until the entire span is lashed.
o Tension in the cable caused by the lasher may cause the loop to be deformed if
the cable bender is removed to early.
Note: Coaxial cable MUST NOT be lashed tightly.
111
Enterprise Standard
• As the lasher approaches cable blocks, the cable blocks ought to be removed from in
front of the lasher with a cable block lifter or the cable blocks may be pushed to the
next pole by utilizing a cable block pusher.
• It is important to minimize the tension on cables as they enter the lasher. This is done
by leaving the cable blocks in place until the lasher is adequately close to support the
cable.
• A lineman MUST remove the cable blocks from in front of the lasher and from the
pole as the lasher is pulled to a pole to prevent the lasher from binding the cable
blocks.
MAKE EVERY EFFORT TO AVOID DAMAGE AT THE CABLE TAILS.
A lineman MUST pass the lasher across the pole-face to the strand and cable on the
opposite side of the pole.
• The lasher cannot be pulled backward along the strand while the gates to the lasher
are closed. The lineman will cut the lashing wire from the lasher and secure the
lashing wire to a lashing wire clamp while ensuring that the lashing wire is not allowed
to loosen from around the cable.
• The lasher gates MUST be opened. The lineman ought to pass the lasher across the
pole-face and set the lasher on the strand on the opposite side of the pole. The cables
MUST be pushed into the lasher and the gates closed.
• Lashing should continue until reaching the cable reel located at the final or setup pole.
Special considerations may need to be made at the set-up pole depending on the
equipment configuration.
• The cable reel MUST be rotated to take up any excess slack that develops when
lashing cables.
Bending Radii
The shield of the cable is made of aluminum. Aluminum is a

soft metal and will not withstand much bending before the
metal crystallizes and breaks. The shape and size of the
loop determines its life cycle.
A loop life is defined by the number of expansion and
contraction cycles the loop is subjected to before it breaks.
It makes no difference if the cable is bare or jacketed, it will
break prematurely if not correctly formed.
Figure 10-1 Bending Radii
112
Enterprise Standard
Cables are often routed around corners during cable placement. As cables are routed
around the corners, pulling tension MUST be increased to apply adequate force to bend
the cable around the corner. Tension is directly related to the flexibility of cable. Flexibility
is a function of cable size and design.
Static Bending Radius
The static bending radius of coaxial cable is the minimum radius that cable can be formed
without electrical or mechanical degradation of the cable. Bending the cable in this
manner is usually only done during splicing or final forming of the cable. The minimum
bending radius of cable as specified by the vendors is the static bending radius of the
cable, i.e., the minimum bending radius when the cable is not loaded.
Dynamic Bending Radius
The radius of the bend in the cable, as the cable is being pulled, is the dynamic bending
radius. The dynamic bending radii of cables during the construction process are controlled
by construction techniques and construction equipment. Corner blocks and set-up chutes
have large radius bends and low friction surfaces that minimally contribute to the increase
in pulling tension that is required to pull the cable through this equipment.
Expansion Loops
As temperature rises and falls, coaxial cable will expand and contract at almost twice the
rate of strand. This is due to the difference in materials used to manufacture the strand
and cable. Expansion loops allow the cable to move and allow for stress caused by
thermal changes and strand creep. An expansion loop MUST be formed per these
guidelines. It is critical to cable life expectancy.
Note: A properly formed expansion loop can last more than 30 years or >10,000
expansion and contraction cycles.
For consistent and properly formed loops, use mechanical forming tools instead of forming
loops by hand. Hand-forming is risky due to a lack of consistency of loop depth and form
throughout the system, resulting in damage to the cable and reduced loop life expectancy.
NEVER form a loop by hand! THERE ARE NO EXCEPTIONS!
Based on the forming tool or method used, proper bending techniques MUST be
employed.
• Expansion loops not formed properly may not have adequate depth or form.
• During construction, if a portion of the cable is pulled out of the loop after the tool has
been removed, the expansion loop may not have adequate depth. This may cause
premature sheath cracking and shorter loop life.
• Properly formed and shaped expansion loops:
o Will exhibit no signs of wrinkling on the outer conductor of the cable.
113
Enterprise Standard
o Will have an expansion loop depth, minimum 5-inches and maximum 6-inches,
regardless of the number of cables at any given location.
o Are at least 43-inches in length for cables up to 0.750”.
o Are at least 50-inches in length for cables 0.750” and larger.
Note: Expansion loops will use no more than an extra 2 - 3-inches of cable.
10.4.3.1 Make the Expansion Loop Prior to Lashing.

When an expansion loop is required, attach the mechanical bender to the strand and form
the loop per the manufacturer’s directions. Do not remove the bender until at least 50 feet
or 1/3 of the distance to the next pole, whichever is greater, of the cable has been lashed
beyond the bender.
NOTE: ALWAYS REPAIR OR REPLACE ANY DROPPED OR DAMAGED FORMING
TOOL BEFORE CONTINUING WORK!
10.4.3.2 Flat Bottom Expansion Loops

The expansion loop MUST be formed using a mechanical bender using the following
criteria. The bend radius and dimensions MUST comply to the form shown in Figure 10-3
and Figure 10-4.
Figure 10-2: Expansion Loop Bend Radius
Figure 10-3: Flat Bottomed Expansion Loop Dimensions
114
Enterprise Standard
Figure 10-3 is a typical 12-inch flat bottom expansion loop with dimensions suitable for
cables up to 0.750-inches in overall diameter. The excess cable placed into the loop with
these dimensions is located within the four 11-inch radius bends and places approximately
3.1-inches of additional cable into a span. Overall length is 43-inches measured from the
beginning of the loop to the end.
Figure 10-4: 12” Flat Bottomed Expansion Loop < 0.750 Cable Dimensions
Figure 10-5 illustrates a 15-inch flat bottom expansion loop with dimensions suitable for
cables 0.750-inches and greater in overall diameter. The excess cable placed into the
loop with these dimensions is located within the four 14.8-inch radius bends and places
approximately 3-inches of additional cable into a span. Overall length is 50-inches
measured from the beginning of the loop to the end.
Figure 10-5: 15" Flat Bottomed Expansion Loop > 0.750 Cable Dimensions
10.4.3.3 When to place expansion loops

Loops are formed prior to lashing in the back-pull method and during lashing in the drive-
off method.
• Keep the bender in place as the cable is being lashed.
• Remove the bender only after the cable has been lashed to the strand.
115
Enterprise Standard
10.4.3.4 Where to place expansion loops

• At each pole form expansion loop(s);
o Place on the input and output of active device, amplifiers and line extenders,
o Place on the left and right sides of a node,
o Place on the output side of a tap or passive device.
• Form two loops at a pole where the span length exceeds 150 feet on a street or
railroad crossings and in spans with little to no mid-span sag.
• Running multiple cables, do not bind them together in the same loop. Do not use
straps at the bottom of the loop with multiple cables. Cables MUST expand and
contract independently.
• When both trunk and distribution cables are located on the same strand, the
expansion loop will contain both cables. Placement of the loop will be based on the
distribution cable.
• An expansion loop is supported on the strand by a strap fitted with a spacer that
separates the cable from the strand. The strap MUST NOT be more than hand
tightened.
• At turns greater than 45⁰ and 90⁰ corners always place input and output expansion
loops.
• Whenever the cable changes height at the pole or the strand is double dead-ended,
install both input and output loops (such as false dead-ends, strand crossover at the
pole, etc.).
• Slack spans of 30 feet or less require a loop on the output side after the equipment.
o All locations where the cables are spliced during construction require input and
output expansion loops.
o Always put the splice on the output side of the pole.
• Splices are not permitted in straight cable runs.
o Use splices only where required because of multiple turns or corners.
o Do not use splice blocks as a splice substitute.
o Straight splices are designed for specific cable sizes only.
Exception: The single exception to this rule is, a splice block may be used when
necessary to make a transition from one size cable to another size. (A female splice
adapter is recommended).
• Install all taps, splitters, and directional couplers (DCs) on the input side of the pole
with expansion loops on the output side of the pole from the DC.
Note: See section 14 Rebuild Construction for an exception to the loop placement on the
output side of the passive device.
116
Enterprise Standard
Straight Line Construction

Pole line construction where the poles are in a line that varies less than five degrees from
straight is Straight Line Construction.
Figure 10-6 shows the proper placement of the bolt, washers, nut, and suspension clamp
for straight line construction.
Figure 10-6 Straight Line Construction
Figure 10-7, illustrates straight line construction on a non-wood structure.
Figure 10-7: Straight Line Non-Wood Pole Construction
117
Enterprise Standard
10.4.4.1 Active Locations

All active locations require full input loop before the active device and an output loop that
MUST be on the opposite side of the pole from the active device.
• The input requires at least 8" to 10" of lashing wire around the strand only before the
strap and 10" to 12" to the bug nut. Always place the strap and spacer at least 4"
from the first bend of the loop.
• The loop MUST then go back up to the strand with a strap and spacer 4" minimum
from the last bend of the loop. The cable will then be straight for at least 4" from the
strap before it is bent to go down to the input connector. With a minimum 6" straight
section between the last bend and the connector of the active device.
• There MUST then be at least a 6" straight section from the output connector of the
active to the first bend back up to the strand. Place a strap and spacer at least 4"
from the last bend in the cable and about 4" from the three-bolt clamp.
• The cable then passes under the three-bolt clamp with another strap and spacer
about 4" from the three-bolt clamp and at least 4" before the first bend in the output
loop.
• On the output side of this loop, all hardware is placed normally with the lashing wire
wrapped around the strand only 8" to 10" before the strap. Place the strap and
spacer at least 4" from the last bend in the loop and the bug nut 10" to 12" into the
loop from the strap.
Figure 10-8 illustrates an amplifier location with dimensions for the loops, spacers,
hardware, etc.
Figure 10-9 illustrates a node location with dimensions for the loops, spacers, hardware,
etc.
Figure 10-10 illustrates hardware spacing with dimensions for the loops, spacers,
hardware, etc.
118
Enterprise Standard
Figure 10-8: Expansion Loop Amplifier
Figure 10-9: Expansion Loop Node
119
Enterprise Standard
Figure 10-10: Hardware Spacing
10.4.4.2 Mechanical Bender

Used to bend and form expansion loops into coaxial cable prior to lashing or during
splicing. Some mechanical benders are adjustable to provide for variation in loop size.
Mechanical benders can be specific to cable diameters.
Figure 10-11: Mechanical Bender (Lemco Example)
10.4.4.3 Forming the Loop

Attach the mechanical bender to the strand at the appropriate location. Place the cable in
the bender and form the loop according to the manufacturer’s directions. Carefully inspect
the cable for any damage due to misalignment of the bender.
DO NOT REMOVE THE BENDER until the cable has been lashed at least 50-feet or to
the next pole, as tensions imposed during lashing may deform the loop. Once the cable
is lashed and the lashing wire tied off, the bender may be removed. Double lashing is
recommended for two or more cables.
Attach straps and spacers. Do not overtighten the straps.
120
Enterprise Standard
10.4.4.4 Expansion Loops – Various Configurations
Figure 10-12: Expansion Loop Configurations
121
Enterprise Standard
Cable Placement Back Pull Method

The back-pull method of strand installation is the most common used. It will be used when
placing strand and the coaxial cables onto the strand, because of the existence of the joint
users on the pole line and easements that are not accessible to vehicles. The trailer and
reel are set at one end of a pole line and the strand is pulled down the pole line from the
reel.
The cable is run from the top of the reel up to the strand, pulled by a block that only travels
forward. Additional cable blocks are placed on the strand, periodically spaced, to support
the cable. Cable is then cut, and expansion loops formed. Lashing takes place after the
cable is pulled.
Note: Verify all down guys at corners and dead ends are installed and tensioned prior to
strand or cable placement.
Figure 10-13: Back Pull Stationary Reel
10.4.5.1 Set-up Chute or 45⁰ Roller Corner Block Placement

The set-up chute or 45⁰ roller corner block MUST be positioned on the first pole of the
cable route or attached to the strand at the first pole for cable placement. The placement
of the set-up chute or corner block MUST keep the cable from rubbing on the reel, pole,
or cause undue friction on the set-up chute or corner block.
Note: It is suggested that a 45-degree corner block is used in place of a set-up chute. If
used the set-up chute can cause damage to the coaxial cable.
122
Enterprise Standard
10.4.5.2 Cable Puller Set-up

• An appropriate cable grip MUST be placed on each cable.
• A break-away swivel MUST be placed between the pulling grip and the cable puller.
• An in-line dynamometer may be placed between the pulling grip and cable puller.
• The cable puller MUST be placed on the strand and the puller gates closed to secure
the puller to the strand.
• A pulling line will be attached to the cable puller.
• The cable will be pulled out along the strand and cable blocks placed to support the
cable as the cable is pulled. The cable puller has an internal strand brake to prevent
the tension in the cable from pulling the cable puller backward on the strand when the
pulling tension is released.
10.4.5.3 Cable Block Placement

• Cable blocks can be placed on the strand at approximately 30 to 50-foot intervals.
• A cable lifter MUST be used to lift cables into cable blocks as needed.
• At corners greater than 45-degrees, corner blocks MUST be placed.
• At corners less than 45 degrees, cable blocks can be placed on the strand several
feet from and on each side of the pole-line hardware.
• Cable blocks should allow the cable to move through the corner without undue
bending or drag.
• Place corner blocks at all corners greater than 30° in the pole line.
• NEVER pull cable over the end rollers of corner blocks as they will flatten and deform
the cable.
• At corners less than 30°, cable blocks can be placed on the strand several feet from
and on each side of the pole/line hardware.
• Cable blocks should allow the cable to move through the corner without undue
bending or drag.
10.4.5.4 Passing the Cable Puller at Poles

The cable puller will have to be detached from the strand and passed across pole-line
hardware by line men.
• The cable puller MUST be pulled to the pole. Tension in the pulling line can be
released. A lineman will pull the cable across the pole face and attach the cable puller
back to the strand. Some assistance may be given by the ground man in pulling the
cable across the face of the pole. Under direction of the lineman, the ground man
can apply tension to the pulling line and pull the cable across the face of the pole after
the lineman removes the cable puller from the strand. The cable puller strand brake
123
Enterprise Standard
will keep the cable from pulling back across the face of the pole after it is attached to
the strand. The pull can be continued.
• Cable blocks ought to be placed at the pole.
• At corner block locations, a lineman will pass the cable puller to the opposite side of
the pole and route the cables through the corner block as done at other pole hardware
locations.
Cable Placement Drive off Method

The drive off method can be used in new build areas with vehicle access to the aerial
plant. Drive off can be used if other joint user facilities cannot be damaged. Drive off is
not recommended if other joint use facilities are on the poles, particularly if they are below
Comcast construction.
Note: Verify all down guys at corners and dead ends are installed and tensioned prior to
strand or cable placement.
10.4.6.1 Strand
During the drive off, the strand is secured at an anchor point in the network. The strand
is then payed-off a reel moving away from the anchor point. The strand is lifted to the
pole-line hardware that had been previously placed. When at the end of the strand pull
the strand is tensioned and anchored.
10.4.6.2 Coax
During the drive-off the cable is attached to the strand and payed-off a reel moving away
from the secured cable. The cable is lashed as it is being pulled - cuts and expansion
loops are made during lashing.
10.4.6.3 Trailer set-up

• The cable MUST pay-off the top of the cable reel and to the rear of the cable trailer.
• Reel braking ought to be minimal.
10.4.6.4 Set-up Chute Placement

• The set-up chute MUST trail sufficiently behind the trailer to prevent the cable from
binding on the set-up chute.
• The set-up chute will be positioned in front of the lasher. The set-up chute may be
attached directly to the lasher dependent on chute and lasher type.
• The cable ought to move through the chute and only contact the chute section. If the
pole-line is offset from the reel, close observation MUST be made of the cable moving
through the chute. Off-set of the cable reel from the set-up chute may cause the cable
on the reel to drag on the reel flange and the cable in the chute to bind on the chute.
124
Enterprise Standard
Figure 10-14: Drive Off Method
A length of coaxial cable, i.e., a cable tail, MUST be left at all splicing locations. The length
of the cable tail is dependent on the splicing configuration done at each location. Design
schematics MUST be reviewed to determine the length of cable tail that is required. It is
typical to pull a cable tail across the face of the pole to 48-inches on the opposite side of
the pole. This practice eliminates errors related to cable tail lengths. The end of the cable
MUST be capped and loosely tied to the strand.
• Stop the lasher about 6 feet from the pole. If an expansion loop is required, attach
the mechanical bender to the strand in the appropriate position.
• A lashing wire clamp MUST be properly positioned, and the lashing wire secured to
the clamp.
o Lashing MUST NOT be started until the proper cable tails are prepared,
expansion loops formed, and the cable is formed around hardware as needed.
o If expansion loops are made in the cable, the expansion loop bender MUST be
kept inside of the loop as the lasher is started down the span.
o The bender MUST NOT be removed until the entire span is lashed. Tension in
the cable caused by the lasher may cause the loop to be deformed.
10.4.6.5 Make the Expansion Loop Prior to Lashing.

When an expansion is required, attach the mechanical bender to the strand and form the
loop per the manufacturer’s directions. Do not remove the bender until at least 50 feet (15
meters) of the cable has been lashed.
Figure 10-15: Drive-off Cable Lashing Configuration
125
Enterprise Standard
• Keep the bender in place while lashing the first 50 feet (15m)
• Pull the lasher toward the reel
• Watch the set-up chute for possible binding
• Use appropriate-sized spacers to prevent the cable from rubbing against the pole
hardware.
A lineman will pass the lasher and set-up chute across the pole-face as the lasher
encounters poles in the cable route.
• Tension MUST be released from the set-up chute pull line to allow the removal of
the set-up chute from the strand. The set-up chute will be placed on the strand on
the opposite side of the pole.
• The cables will be placed in the set-up chute.
• The set-up chute will be pulled outward from the pole to allow space for the lasher
to be placed on the strand.
• Tension MUST be released from the lasher pull line. The lashing wire will be
secured to a lashing wire clamp. The lasher will be moved across the face of the
pole.
• Lashing wire will be pulled from the lasher and secured to a lashing wire clamp.
Lashing MUST NOT be started until the proper cable tails are prepared, expansion
loops formed, and the cable formed around hardware as needed.
Lashing will continue in this manner until cable placement is complete.
Note: It is essential that double lashing is used with all cable bundles and all street and
railroad crossings.
Place the cable within the lasher. A cable positioner may be arranged ahead of the lasher
for extra guidance as the lasher is pulled toward the reel. Pull the lasher toward the reel
with a wire or rope.
Note: It is important to minimize the sag on cables as they enter the lasher. Leave the
cable blocks in place until the lasher is close enough to support the cable. As the lasher
approaches cable blocks, either remove them with a cable block lifter or push the cable
blocks to the next pole by utilizing a cable block pusher.
Power Winching Methods

A pull line can be pulled into the block system in place of the cables. This method is often
used when the pole line is obstructed or is in extremely rough terrain. The cables are
winched into place using the pull line.
• The pull line MUST be tensioned.
• Reel brakes MUST be adjusted to prevent undue tension in the cables.
• Real time tension monitoring is required.
• Intermediate cable handling may be required as the pulling grips approach cable
blocks and corner blocks. Radio communication between the lineman observing
the pull-out and the winch operator is required.
126
Enterprise Standard
Figure 10-16: Power Winch Diagram
Overlash Cable Placement

Overlashing cables onto existing cable plant is accomplished in much the same manner
as installing cable onto new strand. Unique aspects of overlash cable placement are
reviewed in this subsection.
• Loading of the strand by an additional cable MUST be considered. Sag and tension
analyses MUST be done to account for the additional cables added to the bundle.
• Overlash cable pullers MUST be used to pull cables into place. Attention will have to
be continuously given to the pulling line tension of the overlash cable puller. Tension
MUST be maintained at all times on the pulling line.
Note: Overlash cable pullers do not have a strand brake and will be pulled backward on
the span by the tension in the cables being pulled.
• Pole-line hardware configurations common to lashed cable construction are used. All
guys and anchors MUST be installed and tensioned prior to the cable placement task.
• Cable blocks can only be positioned at poles. The cable blocks are attached to the
pole hardware dependent on the type of cable block used.
• Cable blocks designed specifically for overlash applications can be placed onto the
cable bundle with a cable block lifter and the cable lifted into the cable block with a
cable lifter. During lashing the cable blocks MUST be removed from the cable bundle
with a cable block lifter. Pushing the cable blocks in front of the lasher may damage
existing cables.
• Bands and spacers MUST be removed from the existing cable bundle during lash-up.
New bands and spacers will be installed to bundle all cables.
Delashing and Relashing

Depending upon the construction requirements delashing of the existing plant may be
required. Circumstances that may require delashing are based on the lashing wire
condition or the number of lashing wires present. Multiple lashing wires on a span may
lead to the decision to delash/relash to reduce the clutter and to assist with maintenance.
127
Enterprise Standard
• Delashing MUST be performed in a manner that does not damage the strand or
cable.
• If the existing cable is to be relashed, provide support like that outlined in section
10.3.1.
• If additional cable is added to the existing cable during relash use the lashing
guidelines presented in section 10.3.1
• Bands and spacers MUST be removed from the existing cable bundle during lash-
up. New bands and spacers will be installed on all cable bundle all cables.
Bonding and grounding MUST be maintained during delashing and relashing operations.
During the delash/relash process, cable that is no longer supported by the strand MUST
NOT be allowed to contact or encroach into other joint users’ plant space. Clearances
MUST be maintained.
In overlash situations where the existing span contains both coax and fiber and a new
coax is to be added, overlash the new coaxial cable. DO NOT delash and relash to
position the fiber on the outside of the coax cables.
Lashing Aerial Duct

Duct may be lashed to an aerial support strand. Duct may be required in situations
such as aerial railroad or highway crossings and as required by agreement. The duct
may contain two to seven innerducts within the over sheath. The duct MUST be
ordered with an aerial over sheath. The over sheath can be composed of carbon black
polyethylene. The duct over sheath MUST contain a UV inhibitor. UV treatment MUST
provide twenty (20) plus years of protection. Other additives are included which help
prevent thermal degradation.
Note: The terms “Duct” and “Innerduct” will be used interchangeably within this
section.
Figure 10-17 and Figure 10-18 illustrate the aerial duct and innerduct construction.
critical dimensions.
• The outer diameter (Nom. OD) will be used to calculate the wind and surface
area for ice loading and for correct sizing of the lashing equipment.
• Innerduct diameter MUST be sized for the fiber that is to be placed within the
innerduct. The fill ratio MUST NOT exceed 75%.
• It is recommended that the outer sheath of the duct is ribbed. Dura-line
FuturePath® aerial duct outer sheath has a ribbed design for gripping of the
lashing wire.
128
Enterprise Standard
Figure 10-17: Aerial Duct 2-way Thru 7-way (Duraline)
Figure 10-18: Aerial Duct Construction (Duraline)
Placing duct in an aerial application MUST be engineered correctly considering storm

load conditions, ice, wind, and thermal loads.
Figure 10-19: Lashing Duct
129
Enterprise Standard
NESC Section 250 specifies that a cable and strand MUST support the load resulting from
radial ice thickness and a horizontal wind pressure. The actual load is a function of the
duct or cable diameter.
• Transverse load on a large diameter cable or duct will be higher than that on a small
diameter cable.
• The storm load on the aerial innerduct is about 60% higher than the storm load on
cable lashed directly to the strand.
• The does not add tensile much stiffness to the supporting structure.
• The axial strain of the strand/innerduct/cable composite will be significantly higher
than that of the cable lashed directly to the strand.
• The maximum allowable span lengths for fiber optic cable in aerial innerduct will be
less than those permitted for cable lashed directly to the strand.
Depending upon the ice and wind load, aerial duct and strand will also be subjected to the
weight of water that may accumulate in the duct. Adding the weight of water in the storm
load calculation will increase the total transverse load. The load MUST be calculated.
Depending upon the load a larger strand may be required.
Note: The load of the duct with cable may reduce the maximum permissible span length.
If span requirement is longer than can be supported by 1/4“ strand a larger strand and
support materials, guys and anchors are required.
As described earlier for fiber aerial installation, before starting an aerial placement
operation, all personnel MUST be thoroughly familiar with Comcast safety practices
governing but not limited to the following:
• Wear appropriate safety equipment. Guard and protect work areas.
• Establish and maintain adequate two-way communication between construction
personnel prior to starting any operation.
• Do not allow workers or equipment to enter the "power space" on the pole.
• Workers MUST be knowledgeable with bonding and grounding practices.
• Perform all work in accordance with applicable National, State or Local Codes and
Standards.
10.4.10.1 Areal Conduit Installation Method

There are two Comcast approved methods to place duct in an aerial application, are
the moving reel or stationary reel methods. A third method, pre-lashing, is described
in vendor documentation and is not to be used within Comcast projects.
Note: Prelashing MUST NOT be used on Comcast Plant
130
Enterprise Standard
10.4.10.2 Moving Reel Method

As with coaxial and fiber placement, complete all preliminary work associated with
placing, tensioning, guying, and grounding the support strand.
• The moving reel is used to place duct on the existing strand.
• Use a cable reel brake to prevent the overspinning of the reel.
• Load the reel to payout the duct from over the top of the reel.
• Position the reel carrier about 20 feet ahead of the first pole.
• Attach separate pulling lines to the guide and lasher.
• Position the lasher and guide about three (3) to four (4) feet apart.
• Pull enough duct from the reel to pass through the guide and lasher. Allow excess
duct for routing to the splice location.
• At splice locations, coil the duct and secure it to the strand.
Tension the duct uniformly during the lashing operation.
Double lash the duct.
• At the end of the reel maintain tension on the duct until the lashing operation is
complete.
• Lash the aerial duct to the support strand in the same manner as cable and
standard aerial innerduct.
Place spacers and supports as per local practice
Figure 10-20: FuturePath® Double Lash
10.4.10.3 Stationary Reel Method

As with coaxial and fiber placement, complete all preliminary work associated with
placing, tensioning, guying and grounding the support strand.
Use the stationary reel method when the strand is located on the field side of the pole or
there are obstructions to maneuver around.
• Use a cable reel brake to prevent the overspinning of the reel.
131
Enterprise Standard
• Load the reel to deploy the duct from over the top of the reel.
• Position the reel carrier to payout the duct about 20 feet behind the first pole.
• Pull enough duct from the reel to pass through the first cable block.
• Attach the pull line to the duct.
• Pull the duct through the cable blocks along the route.
When the duct has been pulled double lash the duct. At the reel, maintain tension
on the duct until the lashing operation is completed.
Prelashing Cable Placement Methods

Prelashing cable placement methods are NOT allowed. Cable can only be lashed to
strand that has been installed onto the pole and properly tensioned.
Lashing Wire Tension

Put a lashing machine into place on the strand and begin lashing the individual spans.
The tension of the lashing wire is controlled by routing the lashing wire around one or two
wheels inside the lashing machine or according to the individual manufacturer’s directions.
• Routing the lashing wire around only one tensioning wheel usually provides enough
but not excessive tension.
• Do not adjust the tension to the maximum possible since cable damage can occur
and the lashing wire itself might break.
• The lashing wire MUST support the cable to the strand and SHOULD NOT restrict
cable movement as the cable expands and contracts differentially to the steel strand.
• Lashing wire applied tight can cause the cable to be bound tightly to the strand not
allowing for movement during temperature changes. Being bound tightly will cause
the cable to undergo cyclical daily stresses which can cause the cable to become
brittle leading ultimately to metal fatigue and fracture.
Lasher Pull Angle

The lasher MUST be pulled in a straight line. If the angle of pulling is changed abruptly
the cable will be pulled off to the same side as the lasher and the cable will appear to have
a bend or be off center.
• Local obstructions can prevent the lasher from being pulled in a direct straight line or
at a constant angle for the entire span.
• To the extent possible, smooth transitions in the lasher pulling angle can minimize
cable appearance problems.
132
Enterprise Standard
Cable Pushers and Straighteners

A cable block pusher (“shotgun”) in combination with a cable straightener attached to or
pushed ahead of the lashing machine can be used to push the cable blocks and help
straighten the cable in front of the lashing machine, resulting in a clean and straight looking
cable span.
• The lasher MUST NOT be allowed to slip backward or the pulling tension to be
released until the lasher has reached the end of the span being lashed and is under
the control of a worker positioned at the pole.
Cable Block Pusher (Shotgun) Cable Straightener
Figure 10-21: Cable Guidance Tools
• The lashing wire MUST be wrapped two or three turns around the strand, starting 8
to 10-inches from the clamp, before feeding it through the clamp washers for
attachment.
• To avoid snapping or breaking the lashing wire, do not allow the lashing wire to
overlap itself.
Expansion and Contraction

The expected life and reliability of a cable plant are a function of daily temperature
changes, length of spans, amount of sag, and the shape and location of expansion loops.
Since there can be no control over temperature changes and only some control over span
lengths, care MUST be taken to assure proper sag, and that properly shaped and located
expansion loops are installed.
10.4.15.1 Coaxial Cable

The aluminum outer conductor of coaxial cable has a linear coefficient of thermal
expansion (and contraction) approximately twice that of the steel strand. Cable expands
and contracts with changes in temperature twice as much as the strand.
133
Enterprise Standard
10.4.15.2 Strand
As the strand expands and contracts with changes in temperature, increases and
decreases in sag become evident unless the initial sag was so tight that the sag could
change only a small amount. The expansion and contraction of the strand accommodates
only some of the change in length of the cable with the remainder coming from cable
expansion (and contraction) through loops periodically placed along the route.
Note: The recommendation is to place an expansion loop at each pole.
To understand the expansion and contraction extremes for any geographic area, it is
important to determine the range of temperature extremes to be encountered. Table 10-1
represents regional temperature variances:
Table 10-1: Temperature Extremes
Region High (⁰F) Low (⁰F) Mean (⁰F)
Texas 113⁰ -16⁰ 55 - 70⁰
California 118⁰ -8⁰ 40-70⁰
North Dakota 109⁰ -50⁰ 40⁰
Another contributor is daytime solar heating which can cause a temperature rise of 45°F
above ambient for black jacketed cable, and about 24°F above ambient for unjacketed
aluminum-sheathed coaxial cable.
• At night, the temperature of the black jacketed cable can be about 8°F below ambient,
and 4°F below ambient for unjacketed cables.
• For black jacketed cables in Texas, the extreme temperature range becomes: 158°F
high, -24°F low with a total variance of 182°F.
Cable Movement
Table 10-2 illustrates the net cable movement that occurs for a single 0.750-inch trunk
cable lashed to a 1/4-inch steel strand with a pole spacing of 150 feet. The tables are
from TFC Technical Note: /1038 Aerial Cable Construction.
134
Enterprise Standard
Table 10-2: Cable Movement 750 cable 150' Span
Initial Sag @ 60° F @ -40°F @ +130°F
0.5 percent -2.68-inches 1.75-inches

Cable movement due to temperature can be substantial based on cable size and length.
If the sag is less than the recommended 1.5% minimum sag at 60°F substantially more
movement will be experienced.
Note: Cable has a better chance of providing extended reliable operation if expansion
loops are used at every pole location.
Cable and Center Conductor Tension

If expansion loops are omitted, or if cable movement is restrained, cable length changes
that occur result in relatively severe tension forces at low temperatures. Table 10-3
references a single 0.750-inch diameter trunk cable installed at 60°F with zero initial cable
tensions will generate the following forces at -40°F.
Table 10-3: Tension pounds at -40⁰F
Initial Sag@ 60° °F Strand Sheath Conductor

(pounds) (pounds) (pounds)
0.5 percent 1658 1123 387

1.0 percent 954 967 345
1.5 percent 474 712 277
2.0 percent 48 713 202
This data illustrates the problems encountered when installing a cable with too little sag
and insufficient or ineffective expansion loops. The resulting tension on the aluminum
sheath and center conductor is very high. Predictable consequences include severe
stress on both fittings and electronic devices, center conductor and/or radiation sleeve
pullout, broken conductors and housings, intermittent or degraded signal quality,
reflections and other interference, and power failure.
Note: Thermal expansion as temperature increases can cause unsightly cable waves or
if the sag is too tight, buckling can occur.
135
Enterprise Standard
Thermal contraction problems become progressively worse when the initial installation is
done at temperatures of greater than 60°F, when pole spacing is greater than 150 feet,
and if the sag decreases to less than 1.5 percent.
Proper sag in a span acts as an oversize expansion loop, providing excess cable for
contraction during cold weather. This pulls less cable from the loop, extending loop life.
If less sag is used, less cable is available for contraction. Contraction of the cable MUST
then come from the expansion loop which decreases loop life.
If proper sag is not available, excess cable MUST be provided by additional expansion
loops. Additional loops can also be provided when installing cable and loops at
temperatures above the mean temperature for the area.
Bands and Spacers

After the loop is formed, the band and spacer are installed. Spacers separate the cable
from the strand and hardware attached to it such as lashing wire clamps and three-bolt
strand clamps. This separation is needed to allow the cable to expand and contract without
abrading against the strand hardware and damaging the cable. The band is used to hold
the cable and spacers against the strand. Bands MUST NOT be tightly drawn down but
should only cradle the cable. See Figure 10-22.
The cable is now lashed over the spacer and the lashing wire secured on one side.
Do not remove the expansion loop tool from the cable until the lasher has been moved
over to the other side of the pole and has lashed about fifty feet from the loop. This
prevents the action of the lasher from pulling out the loop, rendering it ineffective and more
shallow than desirable.
Figure 10-22: Strap and Spacers
136
Enterprise Standard
Band and Spacer Location

As previously stated, the cable needs to be free to migrate into and out of the expansion
loop, so the band MUST NOT be tightly installed. Bands and spacers can be located
between 4-inches and 6-inches outside of a 6-inch deep, 12-inch flat bottom expansion
loop, or approximately 25-inches to 27-inches from the center of the expansion loop,
whichever is greater.
Since excess cable in the loop MUST migrate, the band and spacer MUST always be
placed outside the outer radii of the expansion loop. This allows cable to be pulled from
the loop during the coldest seasonal contraction.
For multiple cables, do not place straps in the flat part of the expansion loops. They will
restrict free movement of cable in and out of the loop, especially when multiple cables are
of different sizes, or the spans feeding into and out of the loop are different lengths.
Lashing Wire Termination

Lashing wire tension and termination MUST allow for free movement of cable along the
strand. The lashing wire MUST be wrapped around the strand three times and then tied
off at the lashing wire clamp (bug nut).
Note: it is essential that double lashing is used with two or more cables, all trunk cables
and at street and RR crossings.
Place the cable within the lasher. A cable positioner may be arranged ahead of the lasher
for extra guidance as the lasher is pulled toward the reel. Pull the lasher toward the reel
with a wire or rope.
Note: It is important to minimize the sag on cables as they enter the lasher. Leave the
cable blocks in place until the lasher is close enough to support the cable. As the lasher
approaches cable blocks, either remove them with a cable block lifter or push the cable
blocks to the next pole by utilizing a cable block pusher.
Figure 10-23: Bender and Lasher (Back Pull)
Lashing can start immediately after the cable pull is completed.

• Lash-up ought to start at the end of the cable pull.
• Pull the lasher toward the reel.
137
Enterprise Standard
• Lashing wire clamps will be secured to the strand at the appropriate locations.
• Lashing wire clamp location varies with equipment and expansion loop configurations.
• When creating an expansion loop, keep the bender in place while lashing the first 50
feet (15m).
• Push along or remove cable blocks as lasher approaches.
• A cable positioner may optionally be placed ahead of the lasher to position the cables
that enter the lasher.
Note: Only personnel that are trained and are qualified to work with the lasher
DO NOT lash the cable too tightly. Temperature and environment loading changes MUST
be accounted for. Coaxial cable MUST be permitted to contract and expand along the
strand or the cable might buckle and fail.
10.4.20.1 Lashing Wire Clamps

Lashing wire clamps will be secured to the strand at the designated locations. The
location of the lashing wire clamp varies with equipment and expansion loop
configurations.
Lashing wire preparation at lashing wire clamps varies. Common practice is:
• Cut the lashing wire from the lasher,
• Wrap the lashing wire twice around the strand in the same direction as the twist in
the strand and in the lay of the strand.
• Pass the lashing wire between the washers of the lashing wire clamp without
overlapping the wire.
• The wire will then be wrapped around the clamp to the post on the opposite side
of the clamp and wrapped twice around the post.
• The wire will be cut and tucked between the halves of the lashing wire clamp.
• The washers will be pressed together when the nut is tightened with a nut driver.
• Bands and spacers will be installed as required.
Figure 10-24: Lashing Wire Clamp
138
Enterprise Standard
Figure 10-25, illustrates the cable placement in relationship to the three-bolt clamp, lashing
wire clamp, Aerial support (Spacer), and strap. The lashing wire clamp is expanded to
show the mechanics of the installation.
At a straight through location:
• Lashing wire will be wrapped twice around the strand following the pitch of the strand
wire before terminating at the clamp.
• The strap and spacer are placed on the pole side from the lashing wire clamp.
• The three-bolt clamp will be spaced from the pole to keep the cable from rubbing the
pole.
Figure 10-25: Cable Placing - Lashing Wire Clamp, Strap and Spacer
139
Enterprise Standard
Cable Protection
When a cable pull has been completed, remove any damage from the end of the cable
and make sure approximately 30-inches of undamaged cable remains for future use or
splicing.
Plastic end caps MUST be used to protect the cable (both on the line and on the payout
reel) from exposure to moisture.
Plastic Endcaps 30-inches of cable overlap
Figure 10-26: Cable End Caps
140
Enterprise Standard
11. Integrated Messenger (Figure 8) Cable Installation

Summary
Installation of integrated messenger (IM) or figure 8 coaxial distribution cable is covered
in this section. Integrated messenger cables are recommended to be used only on short
cable runs or in locations where the placement of strand and coaxial cable are not
required. Stress placed on the IM cable from construction equipment and construction
equipment configurations limits the practical lengths.
Proper care and handling of coaxial cables during installation is critical to the long-term
reliability of a broadband coaxial cable network. The quality of the initial installation is a
major determining factor in the longevity of the system and the degree of continuing
maintenance required during the life of the network. During construction, proper attention
MUST be given to the mechanical and environmental factors which can cause degradation
and failure.
All potential scenarios or conditions cannot be identified or discussed. The objectives of
this section are to:
• Provide a general guideline for installing IM cable in an outside plant aerial facility.
It is assumed that the installation personnel already understand IM aerial cable
installation practices.
• Prevent damage to the Comcast and joint user’s equipment and facilities during the
setup, handling, and installation of IM cable.
It is intended that this guideline is used in conjunction with vendor provided procedures
that describe in detail the operation of IM cable handling equipment.
nuts, etc.
• All hardware and equipment clearances MUST meet all required specifications.
• Through bolt length after tensioning:
o When installed excess bolt length will not be less than three (3) full threads
beyond the square nut.
o When installed excess bolt length will be no greater than 1 1/2-inches beyond
the square nut. Through bolts will not be cut to achieve this specification.
degrees.
• Always install all anchors and guys before installing the strand.
141
Enterprise Standard
• Bonding and grounding MUST be performed during construction and secured after
the correct tensioning of the plant. IM cable MUST be grounded. Steel messengers
MUST be grounded.
• #6 ground wire will be used to bond and ground the Comcast and joint user plant
components.
• Preferred clearance between the cable strand and other communication facilities
on the same pole is 18". The minimum clearance is 12".
• Recommended strand finished sag is 1.5% at 60°F.
• Cable MUST be placed on the same side of the pole along a pole-line. Avoid
zigzagging along the pole line.
• Cable MUST NOT be twisted during installation.
• Expansion loops are not required at each pole.
• Diagrams of aerial hardware placement specifications can be found starting in
section
• MUST NOT exceed the cable’s stated maximum pulling tension.
• MUST NOT exceed the cable’s stated minimum bending radius.
• MUST NOT exceed the cable’s maximum crush load.
Integrated Messenger Safety

Construction and maintenance of a Comcast coaxial plant requires manpower, tools and
equipment. Aerial construction will expose the manpower, tools and equipment to multiple
hazards, dependent on field conditions and circumstances.
Before starting any aerial cable installation, all personnel MUST be familiar with applicable
OSHA, NESC, state and local regulations, and Comcast safety practices and policies.
Failure to do so can result in life-threatening injury to employees, business partners or the
general public.
Only a qualified employee or business partner can be assigned duties that could cause
harm or potential harm to the construction crew, general public, cable plant, and other joint
user facilities. OSHA defines a qualified employee as "any worker who by reason of
training and experience has demonstrated his ability to safely perform his duties."
systems or work that involves their respective properties and rights-of-way. Pole Lease
Agreements often stipulate specific practices related to safety and construction.
The following precautions always apply when handing IM coaxial cables.
• Construction personnel performing the work MUST be qualified Comcast or
• Follow all work and equipment safety practices.
142
Enterprise Standard
• Follow all national, state, local and joint use requirements.

• Three sets of national codes and standards apply to the construction of cable
systems, OSHA, NEC, and NESC.
Before work begins:
• All personnel MUST be thoroughly familiar with the operation of all equipment and
procedures to be used during the installation.
• Prior to use, all equipment, especially safety gear, MUST be inspected and tested
for proper operation. Replace or repair as necessary.
• Secure any loose equipment that will be lifted above ground level to prevent a falling
hazard.
• Construction personnel working above ground level MUST wear a safety harness
or body belt and safety strap at all times. Additional safety gear, including insulated
or lineman’s gloves, eye protection, hard hats, and other protective clothing MUST
be worn as necessary.
• Be observant to pole conditions. Do not climb or work on a pole that appears unsafe
or has been tagged for replacement. Before climbing, inspect the pole for
significant deterioration, insect nests, and other potential safety hazards.
• If work near power lines is required, appropriate caution MUST be exercised.
• Read the entire procedure before starting an IM cable installation. Thoroughly
understand the installation process, precautions, and the tools and equipment
required before starting work.
Personnel MUST be familiar with the operation of the tools, equipment and hardware in
variable field conditions.
Poles and Pole line Hardware

From a Comcast perspective, poles are the structures that provide the support for the
placement of hardware, strand, cable, and communications network equipment. These
structures are typically owned by others. Comcast is a joint user of the poles and MUST
abide by all clearances required to not interfere with or cause harm to other joint user
equipment.
Pole Conditions Specifications

Prior to construction, check the condition of the pole.
• Look for tags indicating an unsafe pole condition, rotten or broken, etc.
o Do not climb or place Comcast hardware on a tagged or pole deemed to be
unsafe.
o Consult with the pole owner to determine when the pole will be replaced.
143
Enterprise Standard
• Thump the pole with a two-pound hammer (known as "pole sounding"). If there is
a hollow sound, the pole is rotten.
• If the pole condition is suspect, probe the pole about one foot under the ground to
check for rot.
• Check the pole for shell rot and cracks. This type of safety hazard requires
replacement by the pole owner.
• Report pole issues found to the pole owner.
Note: It is important to remember that Comcast rents, as a joint user, poles from the utility
companies. It is the pole owners responsibility to maintain them.
Pole-Line Hardware Specification

Self-Support cable will have an integrated galvanized steel strand describes as a
messenger. Use hardware that is made for the IM cable and the messenger size.
Messengers are available in sizes ranging from 0.109” to 0.188”. Larger diameter IM
cables may have a 0.188” stranded galvanized steel messenger. A larger integrated
messenger that has a diameter of 0.250” is made up as a seven-wire strand as compared
to one wire.
Note: Based on specifications from CommScope.
• It is critical to determine that the hardware used to attach the strand to anchors and
pole are compatible and the correct size to support the diameter of the strand.
o Wire vises, strand vises, strand grips, and strand clamps need to properly grip
the galvanized surface of the strand to maximize bond or holding strength.
o Using the wrong devices may cause extensive damage decreasing the effective
breaking strength of the strand.
square washers, nuts, etc.
• Washers MUST be placed square to the pole, not angled or diamond (twisted 90⁰).
degrees. When framing for a curved suspension clamp, break the angle for proper
fit of the strand.
o For angles under 10 degrees, use a straight suspension clamp.
o For angles 10 to 20 degrees use a curved suspension clamp.
o Use a back-strap with every curved suspension clamp.
o For angles over 20 degrees, always use dead-end construction techniques.
• Install the lip of the suspension clamps below the through-bolt and facing the pole.
• Place suspension clamps on the threaded end of a through-bolt.
• Place dead-end construction attachments to the unthreaded end of a through-bolt.
144
Enterprise Standard
• After installing the hardware and tensioning or tightening the outside nut on the
through-bolt,
o MUST have greater than three full threads of the through-bolt or suspension
screw extending beyond the outside face of the square nut or eye-nut.
o No more than 1.5 inches of the through-bolt or suspension screw thread can be
visible beyond the outside face of the square nut or eye-nut. Through-bolt or
suspension screw WILL NOT be cut to achieve this length. Corrosion / rusting
and premature failure of the bolt or screw will result.
• Eye nuts MUST be turned vertically, except when the angle exceeds 45 degrees. If
greater than 45⁰ the eye-nut MUST be turned horizontal.
• Use only KUL type clamps when bonding strand-to-strand-or strand-to-copper.
• Follow all manufacturer's application and safety procedures for all installed
equipment.
Hardware Integrated Messenger

There are three basic sets of hardware generally used to support integral messenger
cables.
Note: Mounting hardware size is determined by the size and weight of the integrated
messenger cable to be installed. Minimum sized hardware is 5/8”.
Table 11-1: Integrated Messenger Hardware
Multiple Page Table
J Hook with Suspension Clamp
One-Bolt Suspension Clamp

(Not recommended)
Three-Bolt Suspension Clamp

(Recommended)
145
Enterprise Standard
Three-bolt clamp configured for integrated messenger.
Additional Line Hardware for securing the IM cable
Strand Vise (Not Recommended)
Wire Vise (Not Recommended)
Wire Grip
Wire Strand Splice
Strand Splice (MUST NOT use)
Guy Hook
Double Guy Hook
IM Ground Bonding Clamp
146
Enterprise Standard
Extension Bolt
Thimble Eye Nut
Reinforcing Strap
Cable Clearances
Cable clearances are covered in Section 9.4.
Plant Equipment Cable Transition

Transitioning the cable around a corner or into and out of active and passive equipment
MUST be performed with great care. Do not kink or adversely stress the cable when it is
separated from the messenger.
Bending Radii / Diameter

The shield of the cable is made of aluminum. Aluminum is a soft metal and will not
withstand much bending before the metal crystallizes and breaks. It makes no difference
if the cable is bare or jacketed, it will still break prematurely if not correctly formed.
When transition the cable into the equipment, do not exceed minimum bend specification.
Figure 11-1: Bend Radius Integrated Messenger Cable
147
Enterprise Standard
Table 11-2: Integrated Messenger Cable Minimum Bend Radius
Quantum Reach 540 715 860
Inch 4.0 5.0 7.0
Note: CommScope Quantum Reach cable is used as an example. Determine the

minimum bend radius for the cable used.
Cables are often routed around corners during cable placement. As cables are routed
around the corners, pulling tension MUST be increased to apply adequate force to the
cable to bend the cable around the corner. Tension is directly related to the flexibility of
cable. Flexibility is a function of cable size and design.
The static bending radius of coaxial cable is the minimum radius that cable can be formed
without electrical or mechanical degradation of the cable. Bending the cable in this
manner is usually only done during splicing or final forming of the cable. The minimum
bending radius of cable as specified in by the vendors is the static bending radius of the
cable, i.e., the minimum bending radius when the cable is not loaded. The radius of the
bend in the cable, as the cable is being pulled, is the dynamic bending radius.
The dynamic bending radius of cables during the construction process are controlled by
construction techniques and construction equipment. Corner blocks and set-up chutes
have large radius bends and low friction surfaces that minimally contribute to the increase
in pulling tension that is required to pull the cable through this equipment.
Expansion Loop
Integrated messenger plant is not susceptible to the same expansion and contraction
concerns as lashed plant. The webbing binds the coaxial cable to the strand, so the two
expand and contract as a unit. As such, integrated messenger plant does not require the
installation of expansion loops. Expansion loops are optional on very short runs.
Placing an expansion loop in the cable run:
• For cables ≤ 0.750” cable expansion loop 12" flat bottom will have a length of 43"
• For cables > 750 cable expansion loop 15" flat bottom will have a length of 50"
• Expansion loop depth MUST be, minimum 5” and maximum 6”.
In all cases, expansion loops MUST always be formed with a tool designed for the purpose
and never by hand.
Expansion loops may be placed at equipment locations that have a width greater than 6”.
The width requirement is based on the displacement for the expansion loop. A flat-bottom
loop will use three inches of cable. Additional cable may be required to transition to the
equipment.
148
Enterprise Standard
Figure 11-2: Expansion Loop
Straight Line Construction

Pole line construction where the poles are in a line that varies less than five (5) degrees
from straight is Straight Line Construction.
Figure 11-3 shows the proper placement of the bolt, washers, nut, and suspension clamp
for straight line construction. Figure 11-4 illustrates straight line construction that can be
applied to a non-wood pole.
Figure 11-3: IM Straight Line Construction
149
Enterprise Standard
Figure 11-4: IM Straight Line Construction Non-Wood Pole
Table 11-3: Integrated Messenger Construction Configurations
One-bolt suspension clamp Three-bolt Curved Clamp for up to 30⁰

Angle
150
Enterprise Standard
Pole Cross-over Configuration Mid-span Cross-over Configuration
False Dead End (Slack Span) J-Hook Clamp Dead End Hardware
151
Enterprise Standard
J-Hook Dead end Hardware Dead End Cable Placement
Double Dead End
Integrated Messenger Installation

IM cables are also referred to as figure-eight or self-support cables. The integrated
messenger is a steel support wire encapsulated with the coax in a polyethylene (PE)
jacket. The steel wire is used for the cable strength and stability. Figure 11-5 shows the
configuration of the IM cable. The steel messenger is separate from the coax but within
the same jacket. The jacket is also known as webbing.
Note: Messengers are typically solid galvanized steel and are available in sizes ranging
from 0.109 inch to 0.188 inch. Larger diameter IM cables have a 0.188 to 0.250 inch 7-
wire stranded galvanized steel messenger. Specifications are from CommScope.
152
Enterprise Standard
Conventional strand installation of jacketed and non-jacketed cable provides for additional
mechanical protection than an IM cable. Where strand installation is not possible, IM
provides a comparable alternative.
Figure 11-5: Integrated Messenger Cable
Installation of IM coaxial cables MUST be performed with caution. Maximum sag and
tension recommendations for the cable MUST be observed. Tensional forces are
introduced to IM cable in a manner quite different from lashed type construction.
Aerially installed coaxial cable is subject to many forces. These forces are developed due
to wind and ice loading, materials expansion and contraction, and the cables own weight.
Correctly installed cable will survive these forces for years. Vibration and wind effects can
strain the cable at a pole passing. Separating the cable from the strand at the pole
attachment, radial cracks can be eliminated.
Integrated messenger plant is not susceptible to the same expansion and contraction
concerns as lashed coaxial cable plant. The webbing binds the coaxial cable to the strand,
so the two expand and contract as a unit.
Unique aspects of IM cable placement:
153
Enterprise Standard
• IM coaxial plant does not require the installation of expansion loops at each pole.
• Expansion loops can be placed where there is equipment to be spliced or where
the messenger is cut.
• Expansion loops are only required at active and passive splice locations.
• Active locations require an input and output expansion loop
• Insulated gloves MUST be worn by all personnel that are in contact with the cable
and messenger that is being pulled into place.
• Insulated gloves MUST be worn until the messenger is bonded to the grounding
network. During construction care MUST be taken to ensure that the messenger
or cable is not directly contacted by construction personnel. (Potentially Lethal
Electrical Shock)
• Routine inspection and certified testing of insulated gloves is required.
Down Guys
All down guys MUST be placed prior to tensioning the self-supporting cable. Where
grounding of down guys is required, it will be necessary to bond the down-guy to the strand
/ messenger. Review section 8 for anchor and down guy installation.
Dead Ending
Self-supporting cable is dead ended at the first, last, and corner poles.
• Stranded steel, attach with a Strand-Dead End (Preform),
• Solid steel messengers use a wire vise.
• Sufficient cable and strand separation will be required at dead-end poles to allow
for splicing if necessary.
A corner pole is defined as a pole where the strand will have an angle of 30° or greater
from the pole line. The strand MUST be dead-ended or false dead-ended at corner poles
in both directions. If the strand continuity is broken, bonding will be required at this time.
Note: It is not necessary to cut the strand if B false dead ends are used.
Cable and Strand Separation at a Dead End
At the time of tensioning the cable and strand MUST be separated before making a
permanent attachment. When a strand vise, wire vise or strand grip is used on IM at dead-
end locations, the cable and strand MUST be separated in the web. The web can be slit
to a point 6 inches beyond the far end of the vise or strand grip.
Note: Do not use a utility knife for slitting the web on IM Cables.
Remove the poly jacket from the steel and attach the grip. Make sure the sag is correct
before cutting the excess steel.
Note: It is not necessary to remove the tar flooding from the steel if present.
154
Enterprise Standard
Use cable guard or spacers at all hardware locations.
Figure 11-6: Dead End Wire Vise Configuration
Pole Attachment
After the self-supporting cable has been placed and properly tensioned, it MUST be
attached permanently. Any twist (360° rotation) in the IM cable should be removed at this
time.
The “C” Cable Clamp can be used for attaching the jacketed strand. This is a 3-bolt clamp
with serpentine grooves to prevent slippage of the jacketed strand. Install the clamp after
the web has been slit.
Measure from the clamp center bolt out 24 inches plus the width of the device plus another
24-inches beyond the device. Mark the cable at these locations for separation.
Use the appropriate size web slitting tool to separate the steel and cable.
A minimum of 24-inches of cable and messenger separation (web removal) is required at
each pole passed. Measure from the clamp center bolt twelve inches from each side.
155
Enterprise Standard
Figure 11-7: Cable Separation at Pole Passing
Web Removal
The web MUST be removed on cable leaving a smooth round cable for splicing. DO NOT
use a knife.
Prior to removing any cable, remove the web. The web can be removed the length of the
separation or 2-inches beyond the shrink tube length.
Cable Transition to Equipment

Attach the device to the strand with main body of connectors installed. Make the cable
transition into the device. A minimum of 6 inches of straight cable MUST be maintained
behind the connector to allow for splicing and flexing.
Figure 11-8: Integrated Messenger Cable Transition
• Start on the span side.

• Web removed before splicing cable.
When hand forming the transition into the equipment, do not exceed minimum bend
specification.
156
Enterprise Standard
Hardware and Block Placement

Extension brackets, strand clamps and roller blocks MUST be in place prior to cable
placement for each installation method described.
The C strand suspension clamp is used on jacketed strand. It is a three-bolt clamp with
serpentine grooves to prevent slippage of the jacketed strand through the clamp. The
suspension clamp MUST be a type recommended for the size of strand used. It MUST
be placed so the strand groove is below the suspension bolt.
Figure 11-9: Three Bolt Clamp Serpentine Groove
Place a cable chute on the first pole using a B or C frame without the swivel bracket. Use
a bolt through the chute mounting bracket in place of the swivel bracket on the B or C
frame.
Figure 11-10: Pole Frames
Place a pole mount block or equivalent on all in line poles. Blocks and frames listed
previously may be used. Use a multiple roller block for 45- and 90-degree angles. Place
a non-metallic pull line in the roller blocks.
Figure 11-11: Pole Blocks
157
Enterprise Standard
Cable Placement Drive-off (Moving Reel) Method

The moving reel method of placing self-support cable is used where a cable will pay-off
the reel directly onto the pole line where it is to be attached. The vehicle and/or trailer can
be moved alongside the pole line. Along the pole line there are no obstructions to prevent
the cable from being raised into position.
Figure 11-12: Moving Reel Cable Placement
Prior to placing the cable:

• All guys and anchors MUST be in place prior to the start of construction.
• Required pole line hardware MUST be in place.
• The messenger MUST be attached to pole-line hardware at the first pole of the
cable run.
• The messenger MUST be grounded and bonded at the first pole when using the
drive off method.
• Cable blocks MUST be installed at all poles not framed with dead-end hardware.
• Cable pay-off from the reel MUST be slow and uniform to prevent uneven tension
being applied to the IM cable.
• The cable MUST pay-off the top of the reel and be lifted into the cable block with a
cable lifter.
• The trailer can be stopped approximately 50 feet beyond the pole where the cable
will be anchored or placed.
• The cable MUST be tensioned at locations with dead end hardware configurations.
Bonding and grounding MUST be completed at this location after the cable is
tensioned.
• The cable will be lifted from the cable blocks and placed into the suspension clamp
when the cable route has been tensioned. Bonding and grounding at the
suspension clamp MUST be completed when the messenger is placed in the
suspension clamps.
158
Enterprise Standard
Loading the Cable Reel

The cable reel MUST be loaded to allow the cable to pay-out, (or pay-off, to unroll from
the reel) from the top of the reel. The vehicle and/or trailer ought to be aligned very close
to the pole-line path.
• During pay-out the cable MUST NOT touch the sides of the reel.
• Use one of the blocks and frames shown in section 11.6.6 for this placement
method.
If trees or other obstructions restrict the use of this method for a few sections close to
either end of the run, proceed as follows. Pull the cable beyond the obstruction and lift
into place. Resume the moving reel method once the obstruction is cleared.
Where it is necessary to clear street or driveways use a Strand Puller attached to the pole
with a sling. Do not remove the strand puller until the cable has been pulled to final sag
at the dead ends or tensioning locations.
The cable and strand MUST be separated before using a strand puller to prevent damage
to the cable. A strand dead end or wire vise may be used to pull IM cable.
Caution: J-hooks may be used to temporarily place IM cable for support only. IM cable
should never be pulled over J-hooks.
Placing the Cable in Blocks

If a bucket truck is not available, the cable MUST be raised into place using a cable-lifting
tool.
• Cable block rods are placed into the suspension clamps and a cable block (roller)
is hung onto each rod.
• If J-hook hardware is used, then cable blocks (rollers) are only required at points of
stress.
Note: Do not tension cable around cable blocks. Tension can only be applied from
corner or anchor poles outward.
Hardware and Cable Placement

Detailed IM installation processes can be found at the vendor’s website or may be
available directly from the vendor.
• After all the hardware has been attached to poles, the crew goes back to the cable
trailer and reconnects it to the truck.
• Truck and trailer are pulled approximately 50 feet beyond where the cable is to be
attached to the first pole.
• The IM cable support strand or wire is then attached to the first poles hardware.
• Messenger MUST be grounded at the first pole.
159
Enterprise Standard
• Truck pulls forward placing tension on the cable. The cable will start to unreel as
the truck proceeds to a point approximately 50 feet beyond the next pole
attachment.
• Truck then stops, backs up to release tension on the cable and with a cable lifting
tool, the cable is placed on the "J" hook or cable block previously installed.
• Truck and trailer then proceed to the next pole.
Crossing Intersections during the Installation

IM cable crossing intersections subjects the cable to being hit by passing traffic. Workmen
MUST stop and temporarily sag the IM cable, then place and tighten the messenger into
the suspension clamp. This holds the cable up clear of the intersection during the balance
of the stringing time.
The crew should use another cable hoist with two strand grips and should place a grip on
each side of the pole where the expansion loop or slack is required and tension the
messenger until slack occurs.
Splicing Locations
Placing cable at splicing locations or where an expansion loop or slack is required, two
cable hoists and grips MUST be used to support the cable by the messenger wire.
• Appropriate slack MUST be pulled to support the splicing or expansion loop
requirements.
• Where the messenger will be cut, the webbing between the messenger and cable
is cut away between the two grips.
• At splice locations the coaxial cable is also cut. The appropriate amount of cable
will be crossed at the messenger till splicing can occur.
• A portion of the messenger is removed with bolt cutters. The amount of messenger
to be removed is determined by referencing the following messenger removal chart:
SLACK FOR EQUIPMENT Cut and remove messenger equal to 100% of the desired slack.
Cut and remove messenger equal to 75% of the desired expansion

EXPANSION LOOPS
loop depth.
• After the appropriate length of messenger has been removed, prepare the
messenger for a splice. Install the splice and release the tension on the messenger.
As portions of the messenger are removed for the expansion loops and/or slack for
equipment installation, additional slack from the end of the run position is required.
• After all expansion loops and slack for equipment installation have been provided,
the messenger is tensioned at the end of the cable run.
• Start at the first pole of the run,
160
Enterprise Standard
o Remove the cable block and block rod,

o Place the messenger into the suspension clamp,
o Sag the IM cable span for proper tension
o Tighten the hardware to secure the IM cable in place.
o Each pole and span to the end of the cable run is completed accordingly.
Note: At all locations where the cable ends are cut to accommodate equipment, the cable
protection caps MUST be placed on the cable ends to protect the cable.
Figure 11-13: Protective Cable Caps
Cable Placement - Stationary Reel Method

The Stationary Reel a method is used when reel-carrying vehicles cannot drive
most of the cable installation route. Other issues requiring a stationary reel
placement;
• IM cable MUST be pulled into position over other existing facilities.
• Majority of the route is in backyard easements,
• Majority of the route is in areas inaccessible to vehicles
Before placing IM cable from a stationary reel, all strand hardware, cable blocks, frames
and down-guys MUST be in place prior to pulling the cable. Permanent down guys MUST
be in place at the first, last, and any intermediate poles (corner poles) before installing and
tensioning.
Note: All spans MUST be tensioned and placed in clamps during the workday.
Note: Spans MUST NOT be left unsecured.
161
Enterprise Standard
Figure 11-14: Stationary Reel IM Cable Installation
Trailer set-up
The trailer MUST be positioned and secured in-line with the strand at approximately twice
the height of the hardware attachments for the first pole set-up chute.
• For a straight pull, the reel can be set-up at either end of the pull. If possible, pull in
the same direction as traffic flow.
• The cable reel SHOULD always be located at the end nearest a 45/90-degree pull
to reduce tension.
• The center of the cable reel MUST be as near in-line with the pole line as possible
to prevent the cable from rubbing the reel flanges as it pays off the reel.
• If the trailer cannot be positioned in-line with strand route, the set-up chute and
cable trailer MUST be aligned to prevent the cable from rubbing on the reel or pole
or causing undue friction on the set-up chute.
• Wheels of the trailer MUST be chocked.
• The cable MUST pay-off the top of the cable reel.
• The pay-off of the cable from the reel should cause a downward force at the hitch
of the trailer.
• Reel brakes MUST be adjusted as needed.
Cable block placement

• The cable will be pulled along the pole line and placed into the cable blocks with a
cable lifter.
• The force of the cable on the cable block is a concern. Excess pressure on the
cable will deform the cable outer conductor and cause impedance performance
degradation in the coaxial cable.
162
Enterprise Standard
Cable puller set-up

• An appropriate strand grip can be used to pull the cable. Attention MUST be given
to the tension that is being placed on the cable. There is not a practical method to
monitor the tension in the cable itself.
• A non-metallic pulling line will be attached to the integrated messenger.
• A swivel eye pulling grip MUST be used between the cable and the pulling line.
• An automatic tension relief device, break-away swivel, MUST be used if the IM
cable is pulled with a vehicle.
Cable Placement
Place a swivel eye pulling grip on the messenger of the IM cable to be pulled into place.
A pulling line is attached to the swivel eye pulling grip and the cable is positioned across
the cable chute rollers. The pulling line is connected to the truck and the IM cable is pulled
into place span by span. As the cable passes each pole location, the tension is released,
and the integrated messenger cable is placed over the cable block or "J" hook with the
cable lifting tool.
• As the IM cable is pulled in at locations where the cable crosses the street or is
angled from 10° to 45°, a 45° cable block assembly is installed on the pole.
• The 90° cable block is utilized at all locations greater than 45° and up to 90°.
Note: The IM cable MUST NOT be pulled around more than one 90° turn.
Figure 11-15: 90 Degree Turns
163
Enterprise Standard
Note: Installation of a traveling ground onto the messenger of an IM cable is impractical.

Safe placement of this cable type by the back-pull method MUST be critically reviewed.
Follow all safety requirements.
Pulling the Cable

This is a quick overview of the basics of pulling IM cable into place.
Prepare self-supporting cable for pulling by separating the strand and cable with a web-
slitting tool.
• Remove the jacket from the strand. Removal length will depend on the length of the
strand grip or pulling device.
• Place the pulling grip of choice on the strand and then tape the cable to the grip.
Tape the cable end in a taper so it will not lodge on the rollers or attachments.
• Attach a swivel between the grip and pull line. Pull by the messenger only!
• Start each pull very slow to remove slack in the pull line and cable. Never start with
a sudden jerk, as this will damage the cable at the blocks.
o While pulling, monitor the cable for binding in the blocks / rollers, and rubbing
against the poles.
o Use cable reel brakes as necessary. During the cable placing operation do not
exceed the maximum rated pulling tension of the steel. See Table 11-4. After
the cable has been placed, tension MUST be applied to the strand only.
Table 11-4: IM Maximum Rated Loads (lbs)
Strand Diameter Weight Maximum Rated Load

(inches) lbs. / ft (lbs.)
0.109 0.032 1800
0.134 0.048 2680
0.188 0.073 3990
0.250 0.121 6650
o Follow clearance guidelines found in the current NESC Rules 250-252.
Note: When placing cable above or between existing plants, match the sag!
164
Enterprise Standard
Tensioning the Cable

The length of IM cable that can be tensioned at one time will depend on several factors;
corners, span length, changes in grade, and maximum pulling tension. Lengths up to
1000 feet can generally be tensioned in straight sections of the pole line. Use a chain
hoist, strand puller, and sling to remove slack and tension the strand. The strand puller
can be used over jacketed messenger.
Permanent down guys MUST be in place at the first, last, and any intermediate poles
(corner poles) before tensioning to final sag to prevent unbalanced loads. All spans MUST
be tensioned and placed in clamps during the workday.
Note: Strand and cable at corner poles and grade changes MUST be in the clamps or
dead ended prior to tension being applied. When the span/s are tensioned and sagged,
move from pole to pole separating the messenger and cable prior to clamp placement.
To prevent damage to the cable, separate the cable and strand before using a strand
puller. A tension-meter may be used to monitor tension on the strand. The tension-meter
is placed between the hoist and strand puller so the tension can be read directly from the
scale as the cable is being sagged. This method is very useful on long lengths to prevent
undue stress on the steel messenger.
DO NOT leave the cable suspended in roller blocks from one workday to the next.
• The cable will be tensioned with a hoist and strand grip at all dead-end hardware
locations.
• The cable will be lifted from the cable blocks and placed in the suspension clamps
after tension is placed on the messenger from the dead-end.
• Bonding and grounding at anchoring locations MUST be completed when the cable
is tensioned.
• Bonding and grounding at suspension clamps MUST be completed when the
messenger is placed in the suspension clamps.
Cable Placement Stationary Reel with Winch Assist

A winch may be required when the length of the run being pulled requires additional pulling
power to accomplish. These are typically longer runs or where there may be obstacles
that hinder non-winch methods.
Set-up Chute and Hardware Placement

• The set-up chute MUST be positioned on the first pole of the cable route.
Placement of the set-up chute MUST keep the cable from rubbing on the reel or
pole or causing undue friction on the set-up chute.
• Hardware is placed on the first pole and the pole chute bracket is installed along
with a 45° corner-block.
165
Enterprise Standard
• Hardware is attached to the poles in the balance of the run and cable block rods
and cable blocks (rollers) are installed.
• Where "J" hook hardware is utilized, cable block rods and cable blocks are only
required at points of stress.
Trailer set-up
The trailer MUST be positioned and secured in-line with the pole line at approximately
twice the height of the hardware attachments for the first pole set-up chute. (Approximately
50 feet from the first pole in the run.)
• For a straight pull, the reel can be set-up at either end of the pull. If possible, pull
in the same direction as traffic flow.
• The cable reel SHOULD always be located at the end nearest a 45/90-degree pull
to reduce tension.
• The center of the cable reel MUST be as near in-line with the pole line as possible
to prevent the cable from rubbing the reel flanges as it pays off the reel.
• If the trailer cannot be positioned in-line with strand route, the set-up chute and
cable trailer MUST be aligned to prevent the cable from rubbing on the reel or pole
or causing undue friction on the set-up chute.
• Wheels of the trailer MUST be chocked.
• The cable MUST pay-off the top of the cable reel. The pay-off of the cable from the
reel will cause a downward force at the hitch of the trailer.
• Reel brakes can be adjusted as needed.
Figure 11-16: Cable Trailer Positioned Aerial Feed
166
Enterprise Standard
Hardware Placement
• The set-up chute MUST be positioned on the first pole of the cable route. Placement
of the set-up chute MUST keep the cable from rubbing on the reel or pole or causing
undue friction on the set-up chute.
• Hardware is placed on the first pole and the pole chute bracket is installed along
with a 45° corner-block.
• Hardware is attached to the poles in the balance of the run and cable block rods
and cable blocks (rollers) are installed.
• Where "J" hook hardware is utilized, cable block rods and cable blocks are only
required at points of stress.
Winch Setup – Pulling the Cable

The winch MUST be located at the anticipated end of the run. Set the winch in line with
the pole line and on the side of the pole the hardware will be placed.
Figure 11-17: Winch Operation Communications
Note: Personnel MUST be placed along the cable run and each MUST be capable of
communicating pull issues to the winch operator. In all phases of the construction process,
communication is important.
• String the winch cable along the cable run and is placed under all the cable blocks
(rollers) at all non-stress locations. The winch line MUST run across steel winch
line block (rollers) at all corners and other points of stress to avoid damage to the
rubber or plastic rollers that are used in the cable roller blocks.
• After the winch line has been connected to a rotating pulling grip attached to the
messenger of the IM cable and after the cable has been placed across the rollers
of the stationary chute the winch operator may tension the line.
• The reel brake on the cable trailer is adjusted so that the pulling tension on the
cable does not exceed recommended pulling tension per individual cable
specification.
• A dynamometer MUST be utilized on all long cable pulls or where the tension on
the cable might exceed the cable specifications.
• Pull the cable into place with a winch. Observe the progress span by span to the
point where the cable run ends.
167
Enterprise Standard
• As the cable passes the locations where the winch line is running across steel winch
line blocks, tension on the cable should be released and the cable placed across
the cable or corner blocks (rollers).
Tensioning the Cable

When the winch has pulled the IM cable to the end of the cable run, the IM cable is
tensioned and sagged and secured to the anchor pole. Tension the IM cable the same
as described in section 11.8.6.
Underground Transitions
At locations where it is necessary to transition to underground cable follow equipment and
hardware placement guidelines shown in Figure 11-18.
• Underground cables MUST be Comcast approved.
• Splices made on underground dips should be made on the poles at the strand level
on each side of the dip, or in pedestals, never underground or unprotected.
Figure 11-18: Aerial to Underground Transition
168
Enterprise Standard
Overlash Cable Placement

Overlashing an IM cable is not recommended. In locations where more than one cable is
required, there are two procedures which can be followed:
1. After the IM cable installation has been completed additional cables may be lashed
to it. The number and sizes of cables that the IM cable can accommodate is
determined by the size of the messenger used when the IM cable is manufactured.
2. Do not install IM cables in the areas that require multiple cables. Instead, place
separate strand or wire then lash the multiple cables required to the separate
messenger.
Lashing another cable over the IM is accomplished using similar methods as with lashing
multiple cables on a strand.
• Select the proper lasher. The wrong lasher may damage the IM cable.
• Existing hardware, straps and spacers MUST be removed and then replaced with
lashing hardware after the lashing is complete.
• Overlash support rollers MUST be placed on IM cable at intervals of 25 – 30 feet.
Note: Passive devices MUST be placed on hanger brackets
Caution MUST be used when transferring the lasher around a pole not to damage the IM
cable. Dropping the lasher may cause damage.
169
Enterprise Standard
12. Underground / Subsurface Construction

Summary
Underground construction is a major component in building the Comcast network. This
section will focus on the construction procedures.
A trench or a bore will be required to support the underground infrastructure installation.
Construction processes and procedures MUST be followed to reduce the impact of
construction on the environment and other communication companies or utilities that may
chute the trench or easement. These Comcast guidelines MUST be followed in
conjunction with municipal, local, State, and federal codes, including power and telephone
company requirements.
Subsurface cables are divided into two major categories. The categories are referred to
as underground cable systems and direct buried cable systems. Both will be encountered
in the field. Direct buried coaxial plant in greenfield or rebuild applications is NOT allowed
in the Comcast network.
Underground cable or conduit systems are those systems that interconnect manholes and
vaults or support a transition from a subsurface application to and /or from an aerial
application.
Direct buried conduit systems are constructed by trenching or plowing conduits into the
earth. Trenching and plowing methods will be reviewed.
Subsurface cable and or conduit systems may be installed in an existing duct. The duct
system may have been constructed as part of a civil engineering project. The construction
of the existing duct system is beyond the scope of this manual and accordingly will not be
reviewed. Placement of cables into underground duct systems will be reviewed.
While it is common practice to use the terms duct and conduit interchangeably, in this
section they have distinct definitions.
• Duct is a single enclosed raceway for conductors or cable:
• Conduit is a structure containing one or more ducts.
• Conduit system is the combination of duct, conduit, conduits, manholes, handholes,
and/or vaults joined to form an integrated whole.
Note: Definition from NESC 2017 Part 3 302
The term conduit may be used in place of duct when referencing to a specific technology,
such as Cable-in-Conduit.
170
Enterprise Standard
Ordinances Codes and Permits

Observance of all local codes, ordinances and public regulations is required.
Obtain all required permits for subsurface work before any construction work is started.
Work crews MUST have a copy of the permit for immediate reference during the progress
of work. Keep the original permit on file in the local office construction department or other
designated location.
Permits are usually required for the following:
• Opening streets (Trenching)
• Boring under a street or railroad
• Closing a thoroughfare to traffic
• Excavating on private property
• Pushing a pipe under streets or railroads
• River or stream crossing
• Construction in Public Right of Way
Comcast Subsurface Specification

Subsurface equipment specified and used MUST comply with the standards outlined in
the in this section. Each part used MUST have a CIFA number. If a part to be used in
subsurface plant does not have a CIFA number, then it MUST be brought to the attention
of Comcast Corporate CONNECT Engineering.
Comcast does NOT approve of the Direct Burial of Coaxial Cable.
• Conduit can be rigid or flexible. Materials can be PVC, HDPE or galvanized steel.
Descriptions in section 12.2.3 and section 12.2.4.
• Conduit MUST be Sched 40 or Sched 80. Descriptions in section 12.2.3 and
section 12.2.4.
• Minimum sweep for conduit is 36”
• Maximum 90⁰ bends or sweeps for conduit is two.
• Maximum of five sweep bends with a 36" minimum radius in a conduit path.
Combined bends will not exceed 180⁰ before installing a pull point.
• 90⁰ bends with less than a 36” radius is NOT ALLOWED!
• Conduit transitioning to above ground MUST have 4” minimum available above the
finished ground level.
• Always keep conduit ends sealed! Keeping them sealed will keep dirt, moisture
and other critters from entering.
o Cap the conduit ends when the cable has not been placed.
o Foam fill the conduit ends if cable has been placed. Foam MUST be removable
if additional cables are to be added in the future.
171
Enterprise Standard
Muletape or Pull Tape

• Muletape or a Comcast approved pull tape MUST be maintained in the conduit.
Three feet minimum MUST be available at each end of the conduit run. This applies
to all transport and distribution conduit installations or cable replacements.
o Mule tape MUST be detectable. Use standard safety practice in the field when
using detectable mule or pull tape. Use a foreign voltage detector to determine
the presence or absence of voltage.
o At a location where the conduit is empty and cable is being installed a muletape
MUST be installed with the cable.
o At a location where the conduit has an existing muletape and cable is being
installed a new muletape MUST be installed with the cable.
Conduit Burial Depth

• Conduit top MUST be placed 24” (minimum) below the final grade, unless the depth
is required to be different based on permitting. Refer to the Statement of Work
(SOW) for the burial specification for the project.
o If the depth of the conduit cannot meet the 24” depth a waiver is required.
o The waiver MUST be issued from the local CONNECT construction director
citing the specific reasons the 24” depth cannot be met. See section 17 for
waiver requirements.
• Radial separation to other joint-use utilities is 12” in well tamped earth.
• Highways, streets, bridges, tunnels and railroads MAY require different conduit
separations. Refer to the Statement of Work (SOW) for the for the project.
• Joint-use separations MUST comply with NESC 2017 section 32 Underground
conduit systems.
Rigid Conduit:
• Four-inch (4”) diameter
o MUST be schedule 40 compliant, PVC or galvanized steel
o Minimum sweep for 4” conduit is 36”
o Maximum 90⁰ bends for 4” diameter conduit is two.
o Maximum of five sweep bends with a 36" minimum radius in a conduit path.
o A bend or sweep with less than a 36” radius is NOT ALLOWED!
o Muletape or a Comcast approved pull tape MUST be maintained in the conduit.
Three feet minimum MUST be available at each end of the conduit run.
• Two-inch (2”) diameter
o MUST be schedule 40 compliant, PVC or galvanized steel.
o Minimum sweep for two-inch (2”) conduit is 36”.
172
Enterprise Standard
o Maximum 90⁰ bends for a 2” diameter conduit is two.

o Maximum of five sweep bends with a 36" minimum radius in a conduit path.
o A bend or sweep with less than a 36” radius is NOT ALLOWED!
Flexible Conduit:
• MUST be High Density Polyethylene (HDPE)
• MUST be either 2” or 4” diameters based on design requirements
• MUST be schedule 40 or equivalent minimum
• Color MUST be orange or terra-cotta
• Minimum bending radius MUST NOT be exceeded.
Conduit Innerduct:
• Can be Medium Density Polyethylene (MDPE) or HDPE.
• One to multiple innerducts can be supported within a conduit.
• Various diameters for innerduct based on the design requirements.
• Minimum bending radius MUST NOT be exceeded.
Cable in Conduit
• Conduit MAY be ordered with coaxial cable pre-installed.
• The minimum conduit diameter is 2” for trunk and distribution construction.
Existing Conduit / Duct:

• Conduit MUST NOT be congested or obstructed.
• Keep conduit clear of obstacles prior to pulling cable in.
• Comcast subsurface equipment MUST be locatable after installation.
o Tone capable wire
o Warning tape 12” above the conduit.
Conduit Intercept
Conduit intercepts are used to tie new conduit into an existing conduit. When intercepting
an existing conduit,
• The location of the existing conduit MUST be known.
• Determine the infrastructure of the existing conduit.
o Determine if the conduit to be intercepted has active communication cables.
173
Enterprise Standard
o Determine if the intercepted conduit is clear. There are no obstacles to pulling

cables.
• Power Conduits with active cables MUST NOT be intercepted.
• Joint use communication conduits are not recommended for interception.
• If the conduit to be intercepted is concrete encased, carefully remove all existing
concrete.
Sealant and Duct Plugs

• Always keep conduit ends sealed, keeping dirt, moisture and other
critters from entering.
o Open conduit, no cable in the conduit, ends MUST be capped.
o With cable placed in the conduit, the end MUST be foam filled.
Subsurface Trenching Support

• Keep the trench bottom or plow line as straight and level as possible.
• Trench or plow depth to the top of the conduit is 24” (minimum) below the finished
grade level or as required by permit.
• Radial spacing to other joint users, power and telephone is 12”.
• Conduit ends MUST extend at least 4" above finished grade level.
• Cap or secure the ends of conduit to keep contaminates out of the conduits, i.e. dirt
and water from sprinklers or rain.
• Pedestals MUST be placed at the time the conduit or cable is installed.
o The cable ends MUST extend to the top of the pedestal with the input and output
clearly marked.
o If the pedestal cannot be placed at the same time, extend the cable ends four
feet above finished grade and attach them to a stake.
o If in an area of tall grass and brush, place a taller stake that can be seen over
any undergrowth. Paint the top of the stake orange.
Subsurface Construction and Maintenance Safety

Comcast and business partner personnel MUST be knowledgeable regarding safety
practices and procedures required by Comcast, as well as local, state, and federal
regulations which govern the scope of work being performed.
Note: All Comcast personnel expected to enter subsurface enclosures MUST have
passed CU training course, Confined Spaces (ILT 70002176).
174
Enterprise Standard
Construction and maintenance of a Comcast coaxial subsurface plant requires a

substantial amount of manpower, tools and equipment. Subsurface construction will
expose the manpower, tools and equipment to hazards, dependent on field conditions and
circumstances. Qualified employees and business partner personnel will perform the
subsurface construction of the coaxial plant.
Note: Only a qualified employee can be assigned duties that could cause harm or
potential harm to the construction crew, general public, cable plant, and other utilities.
All possible hazards that exist in the construction environment cannot be identified and
included in this section. Personnel MUST be familiar with the operation of the tools and
equipment in variable field conditions.
Before starting any underground cable placement operation, all personnel are required to
be thoroughly familiar with:
• Safety guidelines for guarding and protecting work areas.
• Guidelines for testing and ventilating manholes and confined spaces.
• Proper methods of removing and replacing manhole covers.
• Observe all precautions regarding smoking, use of open flames or sparks around
manholes. NO SMOKING!
• Position of any combustion devices; gasoline or propane driven generators, blower,
pumps, etc., so the exhaust fumes do not blow into or can be transferred into the
manhole. Work done with a vehicle that is not equipped with overhead exhaust
and is located near a manhole, position the vehicle so the exhaust gas will not blow
into the manhole or be picked up by the manhole blower.
• Use care when working in manholes to prevent damage to other cables and facilities
while settling pulling devices.
• MUST be knowledgeable on the operation of the equipment and ancillary devices
that are used for subsurface construction.
• MUST be familiar with the hand or mechanical signals used in construction work.
• Always maintain adequate communication between the cable feeding location and
the pulling equipment operator.
• MUST be familiar with utilities spotting or location designation, i.e. color paint, flags,
etc.
• Knowledgeable regarding the procedures that MUST be taken if a “HIT” to another
utility or service occurs.
Note: No one can enter a manhole or remain in a manhole while cable is being placed or
removed. With the proper equipment and guards in place, it is advisable to station a
person at the manhole to monitor the safe execution of the pull.
Regulatory Entities
OSHA, NEC, NESC.
175
Enterprise Standard
systems or work that involves their respective properties and rights-of-way. Pole Lease
Agreements often stipulate specific practices related to safety and construction.
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) guidelines for excavation and
tunneling MUST be reviewed and followed.
All work MUST meet the latest NESC requirements, which is the NESC 2017 Edition,
Rules 350 to 354 of Section 35.
Note: The more restrictive code or regulation MUST be practiced.
Note: Trenching may require the use of shoring to reinforce the soil when working in
excavations beyond a certain depth. Failure to comply with these regulations may result
in injury or death should a collapse occur. Stiff fines may be implied by OSHA inspectors.
These fines may be levied upon Comcast, the business partner or other individuals in
violation of these safety practices.
Traffic Control
It is the responsibility of the personnel on-site to ensure that the appropriate traffic control
is performed at any location where applicable. Follow all control measures based on
governing authority regulations when traffic may pose an imminent threat or danger to the
workers or when the general public is present.
• All barricades and/or warning devices MUST be setup in a manner that conforms
with the most stringent of;
o Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD), document issued by the
Federal Highway Administration.
o Federal, state, or local laws, rules, regulations or ordinances.
• All traffic control devices MUST be in good repair.
• Barricade warning lights and/or reflective devices shall be provided on any
equipment used during hours of darkness.
• All traffic control devices MUST be picked up at the conclusion of the work.
To be effective, a limited application traffic control device or warning MUST meet the
following basic requirements:
• Fulfill a need;
• Command attention;
• Convey a clear, simple meaning;
• Command respect from road users and pedestrians or the general public near the
worksite; and
• Give adequate time for proper response.
176
Enterprise Standard
Open Trenches and Pits

Subsurface excavation locations are rarely inaccessible to the public. The danger and
liability of open trenches and pits MUST be of high concern. Barricades, warning devices
and covers will be used anytime a trench or pit is left unattended.
Properly cover and barricade all trenches and boring pits as required by all governing
bodies.
• Limit all openings into the ground to what can be closed up the same day.
• Exercise all safety precautions to protect personnel and the public during
construction and overnight.
• Limit all trenching, plowing and boring to the amount of conduit that can be placed
within two days.
• Complete all restoration work within the scope of the SOW.
Fencing Guidance
Fencing may be required for the project. Fencing can be defined as temporary or
permanent. They are set up as a barrier to keep unauthorized personnel from entering
the work area.
12.3.3.1 Temporary Fencing

Temporary fencing shall be erected to protect the site when it is anticipated that the site
will be left unattended. This is to protect the site from encroachment by unauthorized
personnel and to protect the general public.
• Temporary fencing shall meet or exceed the requirements of the governing
authority.
• Fencing shall be a typical bright orange plastic safety fencing a.k.a. “snow fence.”
• Fencing may include caution or warning tape, typically yellow. (Probably should
not say “crime scene” in the description of the warning.
• When finished, all temporary fencing or warning tape MUST be removed from the
site and disposition shall be based on the potential for reuse.
Warning / Caution Tape Orange Snow Fence
Figure 12-1: Temporary Fencing
177
Enterprise Standard
12.3.3.2 Permanent Existing Fencing

If an existing fence is to be cut or removed to gain access to install or maintain facilities,
written permission MUST be granted by the landowner and/or tenant prior to commencing
the work. The grantor may have requirements that MUST be followed when modifying the
fence for the work being performed.
Any loss incurred due to a failure of adhering to the landowner’s requirements will be the
responsibility of the business partner.
Subsurface Plant Bonding and Grounding

Grounding
Lightning damage is typically caused by a low-impedance path that exists from the aerial
plant (which usually takes the strike) to earth potential through the CATV cable (which is
underground). Additionally, lightning damage can be caused through induced currents
generated when a lightning strike hits the ground in the near vicinity of the underground
cable.
• Damage to underground CATV plant by lightning is unusual, it is not rare. It
normally manifests itself in blown fuses or module failure, usually in the amplifier
power supply. Lightning damage in underground plant is most often limited to
active electronic components.
• The proper grounding of underground CATV plant can greatly reduce both the
incidence of lightning damage and corrosion through electrolysis. Lightning
damage is reduced by providing a greater number of dissipation points to true earth
ground, while electrolysis is inhibited by removal of DC potentials from the CATV
plant relative to true earth ground.
Grounding requirements for underground CATV plant are as follows:
• Install all grounds with a 5/8" x 8' ground rod (minimum size). Connect the ground
rod to the plant with #6 bare copper wire and AMP C-LOK clamp. Never mount
amplifiers directly to the ground rod.
• Where the CATV plant is co-located with other utilities, complete the coordination
to determine their placement prior to installing ground rods.
Note: Take particular care where power is located underground.
LOCATE – LOCATE – LOCATE
178
Enterprise Standard
Pedestal/Flush Mount Ground Placement
12.4.1.1 Pedestal-mount plant

Compliant grounds MUST be placed:
• All risers.
• All active components, including nodes, trunk amplifiers, line extenders, and power
supplies.
• All line splitter and directional coupler locations.
• All distribution termination points.
• In no event shall there be greater than 750' of cable between grounds.
12.4.1.2 Flush-mount plant

Compliant grounds MUST be placed:
• At all risers.
• At all active components, including nodes, trunk amplifiers, line extenders, and
power supplies.
• At all line splitter and directional coupler locations.
• At all distribution termination points.
• In no event shall there be greater than 750' of cable between grounds.
12.4.1.3 Grounding methods:

• Bonding to an existing power or telephone ground with #6 copper wire.
• Driving an eight-foot ground rod in undisturbed soil and connecting with #6 copper
wire using an AMP C-LOK type clamp.
• Ground rods MUST NOT be shortened to accommodate locations that are difficult
to drive.
• If the ground rod cannot be driven follow recommended practices from the
easement or trench owner. Consult and confirm with Division or CONNECT
Corporate Engineering the practice that will be used. Comcast options:
o The ground rod can be placed horizontally in the bottom of the trench. Verify the
depth requirement of the trench.
o The ground rod can be placed at an angle with the top placed just underground.
Verify that an approved ground rod drive angle is used. The drive angle should
not be greater than 45⁰ from vertical.
o The full length of the ground rod MUST be in contact with the earth.
179
Enterprise Standard
Figure 12-2: Ground Rod Drive Angle
Note: For additional information see NEC 250.53(G) and 2017 NESC 094.B.2.3
EXCEPTION (3).
Bonding
Bond all power supplies to the power company ground with a #6 copper wire and a KUL
clamp.
Always bond all metal enclosures to the equipment they enclose. Accomplish this by
either of these methods:
• Attaching the bare metal surface of the line equipment to the bare metal surface of
the enclosure mounting bracket.
• Attaching a #6 copper wire from the line equipment or cable to the enclosure
bonding/grounding lug.
Bond all Comcast equipment and enclosures with exposed metallic parts to power and
telephone equipment and enclosures that are within 8' vertically or 5' horizontally of each
other.
Where the power and Comcast lines are randomly separated in a trench, bond the cable
to the effectively grounded power conductor at least every 1000'. (Random separation is
placing all cables in the trench intermingled).
Manhole Bonding
Bonding reduces the overall resistance to ground and equalizes the potential differences
between cable systems within the manhole. The equalization of the potential differences
between cable systems protects the technician from shock hazards and helps prevent
damaging the two plants.
180
Enterprise Standard
Local conditions and requirements from the licensing or government body may require
special requirements not covered in this section.
Location of Bonds
• Bond unjacketed cables pulled through the conduit at every manhole.
• Bond jacketed cables at every splice or connector location.
12.4.3.1 Wire Requirement

Cables and equipment in manholes are usually bonded with tinned copper bonding ribbon,
a bonding clamp for cable and bolts and flat washers on equipment. Normal ribbon width
is minimum 3/8" wide and about 1/16" thick.
• A KUL bonding clamp and #6 soft drawn copper wire is preferable if it is acceptable
to the licensing company.
• When placing cables in locations where the communications company will complete
the bonding, leave enough ribbon to reach a communications company installed
splice case or bonding ribbon.
12.4.3.2 Connection to Ground (Earth)

In general, the communications and power supply facilities can occupy separate structures
in the underground plant. When separated, underground communications cables are not
exposed to power contact. Indirect exposure to power lines is possible because the
communication cables may become part of aerial or joint-buried plant.
The maintenance of electrical continuity through the bonding schemes identified above
provides adequate protection in the underground manhole. The bonding scheme MUST
include a connection to the manhole grounding system. Apart from conductive
conduits/ducts connected into the manhole, a typical manhole grounding system can
consist of several of the following elements arranged in an interconnected network:
• Rebar elements (metallic re-enforcing rods) within the cast concrete manhole walls
• Conductive metallic mounting hardware (e.g., Unistrut)
• A bare copper cable (e.g., size #4/0) positioned around the interior wall of the
manhole
• Several (2 or more) driven copper clad steel ground rods outside of the manhole.
Do Not Disturb any of these bonding or grounding connections or leave them
disconnected after installation, construction, or maintenance work within the manhole.
181
Enterprise Standard
Subsurface Construction General

Whether the project is new (Greenfield) or has existing subsurface utilities or conduits
(Brownfield), Comcast MUST identify what is in the ground that may be a hazard. The
primary concern is the location of existing subsurface entities such as power, gas, water
and other communication and data circuits.
Note: During the design phase, reliable subsurface utility information may be an issue.
Pre-construction Notification
Before subsurface construction is started contact;
• The “One-Call Center” or “Call Before You Dig” number, 811 is preferred
• A local utility location and coordination committee that is active in your area
• MUST be notified of scheduled construction activities no less than 48 hours before
work begins.
NOTE: : On a local basis additional notification time may be required. Notification time
MUST be verified in the planning stages of the job.
The purpose of the One-Call Center is to notify other facility operators to locate and mark
their underground plant in the vicinity of the route before construction. Calling 811 will
connect to a one call center in your area within the United States. See
www.call811.com/811-your-state for additional details on each 811 center as well as
specific guidelines for your state.
Note: 811 was created to protect the public from unintentional damage of underground
utility lines while working on digging projects.
Recently, some utilities have begun using GPS (Global Positioning Satellites) equipment
to map their facilities. Positions of cables and manholes can be recorded and referred to
later for locate and design purposes.
GPR (Ground Penetrating Radar) can also be utilized to pinpoint buried facilities. GPR
uses electromagnetic radiation to produce a signal and transmit it into the ground.
Materials that have different dielectric constants (ducts, cables, and pipes) than the
surrounding soil reflect back to the receiver. Their position below ground is identified.
Utilities have individually colored flags or marking paint for identification. The American
Public Works Association (APWA) has designated the following color code for marking
utilities. See Table 12-1.
182
Enterprise Standard
Table 12-1: APWA Color Code for Marking Utilities
Red Electric power lines, cables, conduit, and lighting cables
Orange Telecommunication, alarm or signal lines, cables, or conduit
Yellow Natural gas, oil, steam, petroleum, or other gaseous or flammable material
Green Sewers and drain lines
Blue Drinking water
Violet Reclaimed water, irrigation, and slurry lines
Pink Temporary survey markings, unknown/unidentified facilities
White Proposed excavation limits or routes
Note: Always call 811 before any digging, boring or trenching project is started!
Prior notification will help avoid injury, expense, embarrassment and a very
inconvenient day without critical services like electricity, internet or phone for the
public and business and Comcast potential customers.
Locating Subsurface Utilities

LOCATE – LOCATE - LOCATE – LOCATE - LOCATE - LOCATE
Comcast cable construction is typically done within a right-of-way dedicated for the routing
of municipal and utility pipes, wires, cables and conduits. Excavation within any right-of-
way will often reveal a multitude of underground infrastructures. The integrity of existing
subsurface plant MUST be ensured during any excavation activity. Damage to one of
these utilities may cause a disruption of services provided by the owner of the pipe, wire,
cable or conduit, or may cause catastrophic harm to the excavating party and surrounding
property.
12.5.2.1 Contact Subsurface Plant Operators

Subsurface plant operators MUST be contacted prior to the start of any excavation. The
contact of subsurface plant operators is normally required by law.
• Contact MUST be made for all excavations, including those that are out of the right-
of-way.
183
Enterprise Standard
• The subsurface plant operator will indicate the vertical location of their plant with a
flag or paint mark.
o The flag or paint mark is commonly called a locate mark.
o Subsurface plant owners are typically required, by law or ordinance, to locate
their respective plants within a defined time period and to ensure that the locate
mark is correctly positioned.
Note: The recovery of damages resulting from excavation work is generally decided with
high consideration given to the locate marks. The subservice locates primary intent is to
PREVENT damage to existing plant, not to define liability.
12.5.2.2 Subsurface Plant Locators

Subsurface plant locators are handheld equipment that use electronic transmitters and
receivers. The transmitter will couple a signal onto the plant at an accessible location and
the receiver will be used to detect the electric field emitted along the length of the plant.
• Depth (not normally given) and vertical location of the plant can be established.
• Electronic locators only work on conductive pipes, wires, cables or conduits.
Owner(s) of real estate located within the proposed subsurface route MUST be contacted
prior to excavation. There may be water sprinkler, closed circuit television or
communication systems buried in or around the right-of-way.
12.5.2.3 Potholing Subsurface Utility Location

Subsurface utility locates are becoming more accurate, it's still important to see exactly
where the line or pipe is located. To determine the exact location and depth of the
subsurface infrastructure requires the physical removal of the utility cover.
Potholing is the practice of digging a test hole to expose underground utilities to ascertain
the horizontal and vertical location of the facility. The horizontal and vertical position of
the exposed facility MUST be tied to a survey benchmark or permanent above grade
feature. The position may be identified by GPS or traditional survey coordinates or by
measuring the distance, with a tape measure, to permanent features in three horizontal
directions. In addition, the vertical distance below grade MUST be obtained.
Potholing is accomplished through various types of excavation methods and
equipment. Procedures and practices associated with specific equipment MUST be
based on manufacturer’s recommendations.
Potholing activities may occur immediately preceding or in conjunction with
construction activities. Potholing can also be utilized during the planning and design
phases of the project.
184
Enterprise Standard
Some municipalities and utility companies do not consider potholing to be an option.

Rather, it is viewed as an essential phase of underground construction for all types of
excavation including horizontal directional drilling (HDD) operations. This practice
applies to all potholing activities for both construction and design applications.
When the initial location and marking of the subsurface infrastructure is complete a test
hole MUST be dug to determine the exact location of the utilities. NO ONE is allowed to
dig in the safe zone, which may be from 18 inches up to 3 feet from either side of the
marked line. The required distance varies by state. Personnel are only allowed to dig by
hand or use a non-destructive method like vacuum excavators in the safe zone.
12.5.2.3.1 Backhoes
The use of backhoes is not the preferred method of potholing. Using a backhoe to
create potholes can destroy the very line they need to protect. If a backhoe is utilized, it
is essential that a “spotter” be present for the entire excavation. A spotter is a person
that observes the excavation and communicates to the backhoe operator when a
buried facility is sighted.
12.5.2.3.2 Hand Dig

Hand digging a test hole is the method of digging a pothole by manual means with
handheld equipment such as a shovel. Shovels are problematic as they can slice through
electric or phone lines just as a backhoe. Hand digging is labor intensive and time
consuming. The advantage to hand digging is that it does not require expensive
equipment and is relatively safe for locating most facilities. As with any excavation,
extreme caution MUST be practiced if digging near hazardous utilities such as electric
cable.
12.5.2.3.3 Vacuum Excavation

Vacuum excavation is the preferred method for non-destructive exposure of buried
utilities. Vacuum excavation utilizes either air or water pressure to break up the soil and a
vacuum device to collect the spoil. Of the two methods, air vacuum excavation is generally
preferred, though specific site and environmental characteristics may lead to a decision to
use water vacuum excavation.
12.5.2.3.4 Air-Vacuum
Air vacuum excavators utilize the kinetic energy in a high velocity air stream to penetrate,
expand and break-up soil. The loosened chunks of soil and rock are then removed from
the hole using a powerful vacuum. In this way a test hole is created that reveals the buried
utility.
185
Enterprise Standard
Dry or air excavation may be faster in most soils and eliminates the need for mud disposal.
Since the spoil remains dry, it can immediately be used for backfilling. Air units are not
effective in all soil types, especially wet, heavy clay and caliche.
Note: Caliche, a surface deposit consisting of sand or clay impregnated with crystalline
salts such as sodium nitrate or sodium chloride.
12.5.2.3.5 Water Vacuum

Water vacuum excavation systems dig the pothole using high-pressure water to reduce
and loosen the soil. The wet soil and mud slurry is removed to a spoil tank using a powerful
vacuum. Like air systems, a hole typically one-foot square or 6 to 8 inches in diameter is
common. The maximum hole depth for both systems is dependent on the vacuum
limitations.
The higher density of water produces powerful forces that are effective in most soils
including wet heavy clays. Heated water systems can be used to excavate frozen ground
allowing efficient potholing year-round. Operational caution is also necessary as high-
pressure water systems have the potential of cutting through cables or damaging pipe if
not used with care.
12.5.2.3.6 Protecting Exposed Facilities

Facilities exposed during potholing or other methods of discovery MUST be protected
throughout the project. Exposed facilities can shift or sag when the soil that was
supporting and protecting the utility is removed. Utilities that are rendered
unsupported due to potholing MUST be temporarily supported by shoring or other
means. The utility MUST be protected from heavy and sharp items falling into the
excavation which could crush or cut the facility.
12.5.2.3.7 Pothole Backfill and Restoration

After the underground utility has been located, the pothole MUST be restored within
24 hours or as otherwise directed. Appropriate sediment controls MUST be utilized
during all potholing activities to prevent storm water pollution. The pothole MUST be
clean and dry prior to backfilling. Backfilling of the excavation and the restoration of
pavement or surfacing shall be in accordance with the governing authority’s standards
and specifications.
Drilling mud or remaining spoil MUST be cleaned up and the area restored to original
condition or better. The contractor is responsible for disposing of any drilling mud or
remaining spoil in an environmentally suitable manner.
186
Enterprise Standard
12.5.2.3.8 Mis-Designated Facility

During the process of potholing it is found that a subsurface facility has been mis-
designated or not accurately located and the facility is exposed during potholing or other
excavation, the facility owner and/or the state One Call system MUST be notified. The
entity that exposed the facility MUST document the position of the facility and
communicate the information to the facility owner.
Permitting and Easements

Comcast or business partner personnel MUST ensure the appropriate permit or easement
has been approved for any work that is done in or around a public Right-of-Way (ROW)
or on private property. A copy of the permit MUST be maintained at the work site at all
times.
Working on Easements within Private Property

Before starting work on private property, obtain all necessary permits in accordance with
local codes and ordinances.
• Avoid damaging fences, trees, shrubs, flowers, etc.
• Keep disturbance of the ground surface by equipment to a minimum.
• Do not let pets out of fenced yards.
Follow local guidelines for notifying property owners along the proposed subsurface
installation path. Notify each resident prior to construction work. Include in this notification
the type of work, why Comcast is going through their property, and approximately when
Comcast or business partner will be working in their area two weeks and then 48 hours
prior to any construction.
Residential Trenching Guidelines

When trenching in a homeowner's lawn, remove the sod carefully so it can be replaced
when the work is completed.
• Cut the sod into long strips.
• Roll up or cut the sod into pieces and stack with grass to grass and soil to soft.
Keep the sod wet from the time it is removed until at least three days after it is
replaced.
• Leave a door hanger with each resident explaining that the sod should be watered
daily for at least two weeks.
To reduce damage to the lawn, place tarp or burlap along the side of the trench to place
the dirt removed from the trench. Do not use sheet plastic because it will kill the grass.
In areas where it is acceptable to the city and homeowner, the trench can be filled, and
the soil reseeded instead of removing and relaying the sod.
187
Enterprise Standard
Avoid having more trench open than is necessary and close as much trench as possible
before the end of each workday, using proper backfill methods.
• Conduct all work in a way that reduces any inconveniences to the property
occupant.
• When complete, restore the property as close as possible to the original condition.
Restoration
The right-of-way or easement shall be restored to its original or better condition as facilities
are placed or as soon as feasible.
All areas disturbed by the construction activities in public right-of-way shall be restored
and reseeded per the specifications of the governing authority. In areas of improved
landscape, lawns, shrubs, and hedges removed or damaged shall be repaired to like or
better condition. Any mulching of reseeded areas or sodding of disturbed areas shall be
per the specifications of the governing authority.
• Construction sites MUST be returned to pre-construction surface conditions.
Network equipment placed during construction will be maintained (not removed)
post construction.
• Soil conservation systems encountered during construction shall be restored to
their pre-construction condition or better. Terraces which were removed or
damaged shall be replaced to original or better condition as soon as feasible
following cable placing operations.
• Stumps, trees, limbs, and brush shall be removed and disposed of appropriately.
• Property damaged during construction shall be promptly repaired or replaced.
Construction Debris Removal

Construction debris will be removed from any affected properties, private or public.
Conduit installation debris and materials not there before the installation started and which
is not an integral part of the cable system MUST be removed and disposed of.
• All rock and debris brought to the surface and left after backfilling shall be removed
and disposed of.
• Proper disposal of all soil, concrete, asphalt or other debris.
Pavement debris shall be removed. An approved disposal site MUST be secured and
used.
188
Enterprise Standard
Underground Cable Route Marker Placement

During the construction of the Comcast underground plant the cable route MUST be
identified and clearly marked. Markers MUST be visible from multiple directions. The
markers are designed to provide a warning to potential excavators and other maintenance
crews of the presence of an underground cable/conduit containing communication cables.
Marker Minimum Requirements

OSP markers MUST follow state, local, DOT and/or jurisdiction having authority (JHA)
requirements. Requirements may vary. Always check with JHA to determine proper
marker placement.
• In ‘non-residential areas’ all underground routes MUST have markers that identify
the presence of the Comcast cable routes.
• Markers MUST be placed on highways, county roads and other thoroughfares
showing where Comcast equipment, vaults, pedestals, manholes, handholes, and
other equipment are located. The markers do not take the place of an 811 call or a
call to the local Comcast office to have the Comcast underground plant precisely
located.
• Cable route markers are to be placed on all individual fiber and coax cable in
manholes, handholes, vaults or pedestals.
• Along with route markings cables MUST be identified in manholes, handholes or
pedestals
• The cable markers will provide an estimate of the general direction of the cable route.
Geography and visibility from one marker to the next will assist with the marker
placement.
o Rural route MUST have marker posts, soil marker or curb markers placed every
1000 feet (or within line of sight) and at road intersections and changes to the
route direction.
o Metro route MUST have marker posts, soil marker or curb markers placed every
500 feet (or within line of sight) and at road intersections and changes to the
route direction.
• A marker MUST be installed at each location where the cable direction changes by
greater than 30-degrees.
• Markers MUST be placed on each side of a road crossing, railroad crossing,
intersection, or water crossing. The far marker ought to be visible from the near
marker.
• Additional markers MUST be used to identify the locations of cable vaults or hand
holes for cable storage or splicing.
• Markers MUST be placed at all hand-holes and splice locations. Exclusions from this
are paved streets and sidewalks in city environments.
189
Enterprise Standard
• Install all markers within 24 inches of the conduit placement (Horizontally)

• When placed next to a vault, pull or splice box, the marker MUST be mid-way along
the long side and the marker placed away from traffic or possible harm. The marker
MUST NOT interfere with the opening or closing of the vault or box lid.
Marker Post Physical Requirements

• Marker MUST be made of composite reinforced thermoplastic.
• Marker MUST be >60-inches in length.
• Marker MUST be 2.5 to 3.0 inches wide or diameter.
• Marker MUST be white and orange with black lettering. (Examples below)
Figure 12-3: Marker Examples
• Marker may be flat, round or domed on top.

• Marker MUST NOT be easily pulled out or removed.
• MUST be viewable from three sides. See Figure 12-3.
Figure 12-4: Marker Visibility
190
Enterprise Standard
• The viewable message MUST read (minimally)

o WARNING FIBER OPTIC CABLE (Buried Fiber Cable).
o WARNING CATV CABLE (Buried TV Cable)
o CALL 811 BEFORE DIGGING
o Include contact information to call the local Comcast office or call center.
o Include direction to contact local 811 services.
• Marker MUST be flexible when impacted and MUST recover after the impact has
been cleared.
• MUST perform within a temperature range of -40⁰ F to 150⁰ F.
• MUST be UV stabilized for > 10-year operational life.
• Additional signage attached to the marker may use the orange background with black
and white lettering.
Figure 12-5: Marker Warning Language Example
Marker Placement General Requirements

• Markers MUST be placed where indicated by the engineering design.
• Markers MUST NOT be placed >24” from the conduit trench or subsurface path.
o Record the location of the marker and distance from the underground
cable/conduit in field notes and transferred to the as-built drawings.
o Markers can be installed during the placement of the conduit.
o Markers MUST be installed no later than 3 days following the installation of the
conduit.
• Safeguard the conduit and cables during marker installation. If damaged report the
incident to the local Comcast construction team.
191
Enterprise Standard
Figure 12-6: Cable Route Marker Placement
• The marker MUST NOT be used for identifying the exact route of the cable. Use a
cable locator to determine the location and depth of the cable.
• Limit the use of flat marker post.
o Flat markers are hard to see from all angles.
o Using flat markers may require the use of multiple markers to provide the
required visibility.
• Warning decal may be on only one side of the marker post.
• Marker to marker viewability may be limited.
o If flat markers are existing, do not change them unless there is a maintenance
need.
Figure 12-7: Flat Marker
192
Enterprise Standard
Marker Post, Ground Level Solution

Where vertical markers cannot be used, the use of a ground level marker is acceptable.
Ground level includes legible markers that placed in concrete, sidewalks or road
infrastructure. The marker SHOULD contain.
• Warning information
• Indicate the type of infrastructure, Buried Cable / Fiber
• Ownership (Comcast), Phone Number
• Before Digging call 811
• Provide a double headed arrow showing the general direction of the cable route.
Figure 12-8: Ground Level Markers
Ground Level Marker (Road, Sidewalk, and Vault)

As in section 12.6.4 where vertical markers cannot be used, the use of a ground level
marker is acceptable. Vertical markers may be used along with the ground marker. Ground
level includes markers that can be placed in concrete, road infrastructure or to identify a
Comcast vault. The marker SHOULD contain:
• Warning information
• Indicate the type of infrastructure, Buried Cable / Fiber
• Ownership (Comcast), Phone Number
• Before Digging call 811
Figure 12-9: Ground Marker (Road, Sidewalk, and Vault)
193
Enterprise Standard
NOTE: Legible markers can be placed in road or sidewalk infrastructure.
• MUST be 3” in diameter (minimum)

• Material is 15 mil rigid vinyl
• MUST be UV resistant.
• MUST be Orange disk with Black lettering.
• MUST be secured to the surface using an adhesive. Verify with the vendor the
correct adhesive to use for the surface application.
• MUST be placed on the road or sidewalk infrastructure.
• MUST be placed on the vault lid. If the vault is placed in a sidewalk or road
infrastructure the marker MUST be placed on the vault lid.
Figure 12-10: Vault Lid Marker
194
Enterprise Standard
Enclosures, Pedestals, Vaults, Handholes, Manholes and Risers

Comcast utilizes enclosures (cabinets), pedestals, vaults and manholes for protection and
access to the subsurface network infrastructure. Each of these devices provide a different
access means to the network based on the project requirements.
Enclosure (Cabinets) / Pedestals

Enclosures and pedestals are used to access the subsurface network power supply, node,
amplifier, and signal splitting or coupling equipment. Within the enclosure or pedestal the
cable is transitioned from an underground system to an above ground application.
Equipment is accessed above ground for installation and maintenance.
Pedestals MUST be installed following manufacturer recommendations, local ordinances,
and requirements of the easement owners.
• Pedestals MUST be placed within the easement.
• Pedestals MUST be accessible for the service of equipment housed within.
• Pedestals can be placed at the time the conduit is installed.
• Pedestals MUST be secured with a pedestal stake.
• Conduit will be used secure and protect the cable in the underground environment.
Conduit will be used to transition from the underground plant for above ground
access.
o Conduits will be placed in the pedestal with the conduit 4” (minimum) above the
finished grade.
o Sweeps will not be less than a 36” radius.
o Cable not present, the conduit will be capped.
o Cable present, the conduit ends will be sealed with a foam fill.
Figure 12-11: Pedestal Installation
195
Enterprise Standard
Enclosures and pedestals MUST be selected based on function and the site requirements
for color, size, shape, heat dissipation and security. There are multiple models and
designs. Each design accommodates a functional requirement of the subsurface system.
Each enclosure or pedestal MUST have a CIFA Number before use. A new design MUST
be approved by Comcast Corporate CONNECT Engineering.
Table 12-2: Pedestal Examples
Round Shaped Pedestal
Rectangular Shaped Pedestal
Louvered Rectangular Pedestal
Louvered Low-Profile
196
Enterprise Standard
Table 12-3 shows the approved pedestal configurations, sizes and colors that may be
used in a Comcast network. Always verify the CIFA number.
Table 12-3: Approved Pedestals, Size and Colors
COLOR Light Green Beige Green

Application
Size Vendor CIFA Vendor CIFA Vendor CIFA
Channell 300278 Channell 300279 Channell 300280

10"x10"x25"
Tap
(square)
Amphenol 300257 Amphenol 300258 Amphenol 300259

10"x22"
Tap
(round)
Amphenol 300260 Amphenol 300261 Amphenol 300262
Multiple
Passives,
12"x12"x25"
Optical
ABS 300263 ABS 300264 ABS 300265
Passives
Multiple
Passives,
12"x12"x32"
Optical
ABS 300266 ABS 300267 ABS 300268
Passives
Amps and Line
18"x36"
Extenders
Armorcast 300249 Armorcast 300250 Armorcast 300251
Armorcast 94263 Armorcast 300248 Armorcast 94264

Nodes and
24"x24"x42" Channell 300290 Channell 300291 Channell 300292
Amplifiers
ABS 94421 ABS N/A ABS N/A
Vault, Handhole and Lid Guidance, (Grade Level Enclosure)

The purpose of vaults and handholes is to provide access to
the subsurface system for installation and maintenance.
The functionality of each is similar. Each MUST adhere here
to the same structural requirements. As such, the terms
vault and handhole may be used interchangeably when
describing the subsurface structure.
Figure 12-12: Grade Level Enclosure
197
Enterprise Standard
Vaults and handholes MUST be selected based on use and the site requirements. There
are multiple designs. Each design accommodates a functional requirement of the
subsurface system. The choice is also based on local requirements.
Vault characteristics are based on the shape; rectangular, squared, round, straight or
flared wall, flared bottoms, etc. Selection of a vault for a project MUST be supported by a
CIFA number. Alternate vaults MUST be approved by Comcast Corporate CONNECT
Engineering.
Vault and vault-lid rating selection is critical in the support of the Comcast network. The
vault and vault-lid MUST be capable of supporting the loads that may be applied.
Selecting the wrong vault rating for a specific location may lead to physical harm to the
general public and potential catastrophic failure of the network requiring long down-times
as repairs are made.
The vault and vault-lid MUST support extreme loading. As an example, a vault placed in
a location where heavy vehicles, (fire trucks, disposal and delivery trucks) may transition
across the vault. The issue is a large vehicles potential extreme axle-weight and
downward force that can be placed on a structure and lateral forces are applied to the
vault by the vehicle that are more horizontal in nature as opposed to always being a
vertical load.
Load on Vault Cover Lateral Side Wall Force
Vertical Wall Load
Figure 12-13: Vault Wall Loading
198
Enterprise Standard
Note: A fire truck, construction or service vehicle may have an extreme loading potential
and MUST be accounted for when determining the load rating of the vault to be deployed.
NFPA 70 NEC 2017 314.30 states, handhole enclosures shall be designed and installed
to withstand all loads likely to be imposed on them. They shall be identified for use in
underground systems. 314.30 addresses issues related to enclosure size, wiring entries,
enclosure without bottoms, and bonding requirements.
https://www.nfpa.org/codes-and-standards/all-codes-and-standards/list-of-codes-and-
standards/detail?code=70
ANSI/SCTE 77 Specification for Underground Enclosure Integrity is referenced in the
specification.
https://www.scte.org/SCTEDocs/Standards/ANSI_SCTE 77 2017.pdf
12.7.2.1 Vault and Vault-lid Loading Standards

Each vault and vault-lid load rating MUST be sized based on the following:
• Light Duty Pedestrian Loading: Generally, between 250 to 350 lbs. per sq./ft.
applied over the entire area of the cover. This loading is generally specified for
sidewalks, planters and parkways where no vehicular traffic is anticipated under
any condition.
• 10K Loading: Specified for areas that could be subjected to incidental light
vehicular traffic. 10K loading has the same wheelbase as AASHTO H10, and
ASTM A-8 of 8,000 lbs. plus, a 30% load increase due to impact forces for a total
wheel load of 10,400 lbs.
• 20k Loading: Specified for areas subjected to occasional heavy traffic such as
driveways, alley and parking lots. 20K loading has the same base wheel loading
as ASHTO H20, HS20-44 and ASTM A-16 of 16,000 lbs., plus a 30% load increase
due to impact forces for a total wheel load of 20,800 lbs.
Note: A trash truck in an alley every week is not considered occasional heavy traffic
based on the rear-axle weight.
Figure 12-14: Heavy Vehicle Illustration
199
Enterprise Standard
12.7.2.1.1 ANSI / SCTE 77 Loading Specification Tiers.

These tiers are for non-deliberate vehicular traffic locations.
• ANSI / SCTE Tier 5 Loading: Specified for sidewalk applications for occasional
non-deliberate light vehicular traffic. Design load 5,000 lbs. and a minimum failure
load of 7,500 lbs.
• ANSI / SCTE Tier 8 Loading: Specified for sidewalk applications for non-deliberate
light vehicular traffic. Design load 8,000 lbs. and a minimum failure load of 12,000
lbs.
• ANSI / SCTE Tier 15 Loading: Specified for driveway, parking lot and off roadway
applications subject to occasional non-deliberate heavy vehicular traffic. Design
load 15,000 lbs. and a minimum failure load of 22,500 lbs.
• ANSI / SCTE Tier 22 Loading: Specified for driveway, parking lot and off roadway
applications subject to occasional non-deliberate heavy vehicular traffic. Design
load 22,500 lbs. and a minimum failure load of 33,750 lbs.
12.7.2.1.2 AASHTO American Association of State Highway and

Transportation Officials Standard.
AASHTO standards are for deliberate vehicular traffic vault loading requirements. These
vaults are located in streets and roadways.
• AASHTO H20-44 or HS20-44 Loading: Deliberate vehicular traffic installations
such as streets and highways (use in alleys where trash trucks and delivery
vehicles visit regularly). (H = highway, HS = semi-trailer)
• H-20 Design Load per each Drive or Tandem Axle 32,000 lbs. maximum or 16,000
lbs. per wheel.
Figure 12-15: H-20 Axle Load
200
Enterprise Standard
Figure 12-16: HS-20 Tandem Axle Loading
Note: Non-concrete enclosures MUST be designed to withstand AASHTO H20-44

loading. These vaults are fitted with a cast iron or steel frames and covers that can be
used in streets and highways where deliberate continuous traffic is anticipated.
Possible vault locations and load ratings are illustrated in the following diagram.
Figure 12-17: Vault Location Placement Examples
201
Enterprise Standard
12.7.2.2 Vault Specifications

Vault MUST meet the project requirements.
• Vaults shall be 36" minimum depth for assist locations. May be modified based on
local requirements.
• Open bottom MUST sit on a pea gravel base. (Application may require a non-open
bottom.)
• Vaults MUST mount flush with the final ground or walkway level. Place them at the
time the cable is placed.
• Use a minimum 2" PVC schedule 40 or schedule 80 poly pipe.
• Place warning tape 12" below grade.
12.7.2.2.1 Traffic Locations:

• Place concrete vaults with steel lids in locations accessible to traffic.
• MUST be traffic load rated.
12.7.2.2.2 Pedestrian Traffic Locations:

• Vaults accessible to pedestrian traffic MUST meet the appropriate load rating and
have a non-skid surface lid.
• Fiberglass vaults in pedestrian areas and in rear easements that are devoid of
vehicle traffic MUST have a non-skid lid.
12.7.2.2.3 Vehicular Traffic Locations

Vaults MUST be sized based on the type of loads expected. Refer to section 12.7.2.1.1.
12.7.2.2.4 Vault Lids (Based on Use)

Vault lids are used to secure and provide access to the network equipment, actives or
passives located within the vault. Dependent upon the service located in the vault will
determine the type of lid that will be used.
12.7.2.2.4.1 Splice and Passive Vaults
• Use a solid vault lid rated for the anticipated maximum load in splice and passive
locations that remain below the finish grade.
• Use a solid vault lid rated for the anticipated maximum load in splice and passive
locations that are placed in an enclosure or cabinet above the finish grade.
12.7.2.2.4.2 Actives
• Use a vented vault lid rated for the anticipated maximum load at active locations
that remain below the finish grade.
202
Enterprise Standard
• Use a solid vault lid rated for the anticipated maximum load where active devices
are placed in an enclosure or cabinet supported by the vault above the finish grade.
• Any nodes placed in vaults MUST use approved vented vault lids for proper thermal
venting.
12.7.2.2.4.3 Battery Vaults (Do NOT Use)
Battery vaults MUST NOT to be used in Comcast plant. Batteries MUST be housed within
the power supply cabinet. If a battery vault is existing, it MUST be SECURED.
UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS MUST BE PREVENTED.
12.7.2.2.5 Vault Extensions

Vaults that require a height extension to meet a change in the finished grade MUST be
capable of supporting the extension.
• Extensions are available in either top or bottom configurations.
• Extension MUST be designed for the existing vault.
• Extension MUST be secured to the existing vault. Makeshift securing options
should not be used.
• Extension MUST meet all load requirements.
• Vault MUST be capable of supporting the extension and maintain the designed load
requirements.
12.7.2.2.6 Vault Stacking

Vaults that require stacking to meet the project depth requirements MUST be capable of
supporting the stack.
• Stacking vaults MUST be designed to be placed and secured on the lower vault.
• Secure based on manufacturer specification. Makeshift securing options should not
be used.
• The stacked vaults MUST meet all load requirements.
• Lower vault MUST be capable of supporting the stacking vault and MUST maintain
the designed load requirements.
12.7.2.2.7 Vault Drainage

To support drainage of the vault, apply a two-inch (2”) to six-inch (6”) pea gravel base
below the vault. Level the pea gravel so the vault will set flat and secure.
203
Enterprise Standard
Figure 12-18: Vault Drainage (Gravel)
12.7.2.2.8 Vault Configurations

Vault configurations are illustrated in Table 12-4 and does not include all possible vault
configurations.
Table 12-4: Vault Configurations
Vault basic configuration

showing top is level with the
finish grade.
Drainage is accomplished with
a layer of pea gravel. The vault
sets on the pea gravel.
Vault transition to equipment in

a cabinet.
204
Enterprise Standard
Vault Extension
Vault Round, sidewalls may be

tapered or straight
Note: Additional vault design and specification guidelines can be found in the Vault –
Vault-lid Capacity Guidelines document on the Standards Document Portal,
https://community.teamcomcast.com/e/a5/Standards_Portal/Documents_Library/Vault -
Vault Lid Capacity Guidelines.pdf
Vaults may be made of concrete or High-Density Polyethylene (HDPE) and MUST meet
the loading requirements as shown in section 12.7.2.1. They also MUST meet the sizing
requirements in Table 12-5 and Table 12-6.
205
Enterprise Standard
Table 12-5: HDPE Vault Dimensions
Vault HDPE, High-density Polyethylene
Terminal Vault, Stackable/Straight Sides, Plastic Material
Vault Dimensions ANSI Tier Rating AASHTO
Width Length Height 8 15 22 H20-44

30" 48" 18" x x x x
30" 48" 24" x x x x
30" 48" 36" x x x x
24" 36" 18" x x x x
24" 36" 24" x x x x
24" 36" 36" x x x x
17" 30" 18" x x x x
17" 30" 24" x x x x
12" 24" 12" x x x x
12" 24" 18" x x x x
Round 10” 14” x NA
(Black, Gray or Green)
206
Enterprise Standard
Table 12-6: Concrete Vault Dimensions
Vault Concrete
Terminal Vault, Stackable/Straight Sides
Vault Dimensions ANSI Tier Rating AASHTO
Width Length Height 8 15 22 H20-44
30" 48" 18" x x x x
30" 48" 24" x x x x
30" 48" 36" x x x x
24" 36" 18" x x x x
24" 36" 24" x x x x
24" 36" 36" x x x x
17" 30" 18" x x x x
17" 30" 24" x x x x
12" 24" 12" x x x x
12" 24" 18" x x x x
Manhole
A manhole is a subsurface facility providing a confined workspace, allowing Comcast and
vendor partners to enter and access the network. A confined working space can be further
defined as:
• A space that is large enough for a worker to enter and perform the assigned work.
• Entry and exit are restricted
• Is not to be continuously occupied.
These facilities are normally leased from a telephone company. Personnel working in
leased facilities MUST abide by the lease agreement and have a good working knowledge
of the licensing company's work rules and practices. Permission MUST be obtained prior
to entry of non-Comcast owned facilities.
Note: Comcast personnel MUST have completed the Confined Spaces training prior to
entering a manhole.
Note: Licensing company = Owner of the manhole.
207
Enterprise Standard
12.7.3.1 Confined Workspace Definitions

A subsurface facility is a confined workspace if the configuration hinders the ability of the
occupant to freely move. Workers in confined spaces are exposed to an increased risk of
physical injury from entrapment, engulfment, and hazardous atmospheric conditions.
Comcast and vendor partner personnel working in manholes MUST comply with the OSHA
standards found in 1910.146 or 1910.268. The standard depends on the type of confined
space entered. If the business partner is entering a telecommunication only manhole or
vault or a joint power/telecommunication vault or manhole, they MUST comply with
1910.268. Any other type of confined space requires compliance with 1910.146.
12.7.3.2 Permit Required Entry

The licensing company recognizing hazards that may exist with a manhole MUST issue
the permit for access prior to entry. They are confirming the manhole to be safe for
worker’s occupancy for the duration that work is performed. For a permit required the
manhole.
• Contains or has the potential to contain a hazardous atmosphere.
• Contains a material with the potential to engulf someone who enters the space.
• Has an internal configuration that might cause an entrant to be trapped or
asphyxiated by inwardly converging walls or by a floor that slopes downward and
tapers to a smaller cross section; and/or
• Contains any other recognized serious safety or health hazards.
DO NOT ENTER a permit required facility without receiving the authorization to enter and
it is determined that it is safe to enter!!
208
Enterprise Standard
Figure 12-19 shows a man-hole configuration that ought to be classified as a permit

required is shown in the following illustration.
Figure 12-19: Permit Required Configuration
12.7.3.3 Non-permit Required Entry

The manhole does not have the hazards associated with a permit required entry.
Measures MUST be taken to determine that the workspace does not contain any hazards
particularly air quality.
The licensing company may require prior authorization prior to entering the subsurface
facility. They may require an owner representative to be present while work is being
performed.
Note: In most applications the licensing company’s work rules and practices are covered
in the Telcordia Blue Book 2011.
Comcast and business partner personnel working in manholes MUST comply with the
OSHA standards found in 1910.146 or 1910.268 and Comcast employee MUST be
certified by Comcast in proper confined space procedures. The particular standard
depends on the type of confined space entered. If the business partner is entering a
telecommunication only manhole or vault or a joint power/telecommunication vault or
manhole, they MUST comply with 1910.268. Any other type of confined space requires
compliance with 1910.146.
209
Enterprise Standard
If Comcast or a business partner personnel are required to enter any confined spaces that
fall under the 1910.146 standard,
• They are required to obtain any available information regarding permit space hazards
and entry operations from licensing company.
• They MUST also inform the operator of the permit space the program they will follow
and inform the operator of any hazards confronted in permit spaces.
• Operator will inform them of any known spaces that require permits.
• Operator will also appraise the Comcast and business partner personnel of any
known hazards within those spaces,
• Operator will appraise Comcast or business partner personnel of any precautions
that operator has implemented to protect employees in or near these permit spaces.
12.7.3.4 General Precautions and Work Rules

• Use a manhole guard on any uncovered manhole.
Figure 12-20: Manhole Guard
• Before entering a manhole

o Test the manhole atmosphere for the presence of combustible gas or toxic
vapors.
o If water is pumped from a manhole, retest the manhole for combustible gas and
toxic vapors after pumping.
o Ventilate the manhole. (The licensing company will normally provide specific
ventilation requirements for the manhole.)
o Ventilate the manhole before entering and maintain ventilation continuously
while anyone is in the manhole.
o Ventilation is a requirement of OSHA under the Telecommunication section
1910.26E.
Note: Perform a test with a standard hot wire gas indicator, or equivalent. This indicator
MUST measure the percentage of the lower explosive limit of the manhole atmosphere.
Initially calibrate all indicators on natural gas.
210
Enterprise Standard
• Use a ladder to enter and leave a manhole. Do not use mounted cables as steps.
• Except for protective screens, never place a cover over an open manhole unless it
is at least four feet above the level of the manhole opening.
• Do not use open flames in the manhole or near the manhole even if tests indicate
the atmosphere is free of gas. Minimum 10' from manhole opening.
• Smoking in a manhole or above ground near a manhole is not permitted. Minimum
10' from manhole.
• Combustible material shall not be stored in or allowed to accumulate in the
manhole.
• Spark producing equipment such as meggers, electric drills, electric hammers, etc.
are not permitted in the manhole.
• Use extreme care when working on a cable with voltage on it.
• Where artificial lighting is required, the bulb MUST have a protective covering to
reduce the possibility of breakage. If an infrared lamp is used, the lamp shall be
the heat-resistant type. All lights MUST be approved by the communications
company for manhole use.
• Properly rack, clamp or support all cables and associated equipment installed in a
manhole.
• Seal all ducts.
• Attach planks or other platforms to the cable racks when needed. Never install
them using cable as a means of support.
• When pulling in cable, ensure that sheaves, wheels, and other equipment are
secured in a position that will prevent any equipment or pulling lines from contacting
the existing cable.
• Seek the permission of the licensing company before storing surplus or excess coils
of cable in a manhole.
• Identify and bond all cable, as specified in section 12.4.3.
• Upon completion of work, remove all unused materials, cable sheathing, tools, and
debris from the manhole.
Note: Acquire a written agreement if power supplies or amplifiers are to be placed in

manholes.
Riser
The purpose of a riser is to provide a transition between subsurface and aerial
applications. The riser, when built correctly will provide protection to the cables contained
within the ducts.
211
Enterprise Standard
12.7.4.1 Riser Installation

All risers MUST have a 36" sweep from the trench level to the pole or building and MUST
extend 4" above ground level. The top of the sweep MUST be sealed to prevent water
penetration.
• On poles, use a minimum of 1/16" thick U guard with lag bolts, or if it is too close to
make a proper bend in the cables, use conduit from the ground level to at least 18"
from the strand, but no closer than 12".
• In back easements use PVC.
• If the riser is accessible to vehicle traffic, use metal conduit for added protection for
the first 8 feet .
• Place the riser at the time of cable installation.
On a building where feeder cable is placed, use U-guard or molding from ground level to
at least a five-foot level. At ground level, use an adequate guard or molding to protect from
lawn mowers and other hazards.
Figure 12-21: Pole Riser Figure 12-22: Wall Riser
Note: For protection, consider using steel pipe in heavy traffic locations. The steel pipe may
require standoff brackets.
• The riser MUST be installed with water protection. If water does ingress into the
conduit the water level MUST NOTstand in the riser conduit above the frost line.
• Cable MUST be installed to minimize the possibility of damage relative to movement
within the conduit.
• Risers MUST be placed on the pole in the safest available position with respect to
climbing space and exposure to traffic damage.
212
Enterprise Standard
• The number, size, and location of the riser ducts or guards shall be limited to allow
adequate access for climbing.
The plant may transition from underground to aerial plant and may tie into an active device.
Figure 12-23 shows an underground cable transitioning to an aerial active location with
the expected hardware and support equipment.
Figure 12-23: Underground to Aerial Riser Transition at an Active
12.7.4.2 Riser Standoff Brackets

Riser standoff brackets are used to place the conduit at a distance away from the support
structure, building or pole as examples. The standoff bracket may be configured to
support a single riser through multiple conduit risers. At a pole location, the upper limit on
collocated risers may be six.
• There are various standoff brackets that may be used. All brackets MUST comply
with Comcast’s and the owner’s requirements. Only install a riser where the owner
has agreed the riser can be placed and attached to the support structure.
• Standoff brackets MUST be hot dip galvanized.
• Standoffs MUST fit tightly to the structure, whether it is a building or a pole.
• Standoff brackets MUST be sized to fit and support the conduit.
• Standoff brackets should be firmly lag bolted to a wooden pole.
• Standoff brackets MUST be firmly attached to non-wood pole structures using the
appropriate hardware.
213
Enterprise Standard
• If standoff brackets are currently installed on the pole or building, new risers may
be supported by these brackets. Determine if this is acceptable to the current
owner. Placement of separate standoffs may be required.
• The lowest standoff bracket MUST be equal to or greater than 8 feet above the
ground or other surface.
• Conduits will be supported by brackets that are evenly spaced on the support
structure and no more than 10 feet apart.
• Spacing between the pole and conduits shall be a minimum of 4 inches.
• If multiple risers are placed, maintain a minimum distance between risers of 1 inch.
• The conduit riser MUST parallel the support structure. The conduit ought to follow
the taper of the support structure.
• Climbing space MUST be maintained.
The illustration shows an overview of the standoff bracket and riser placement.
Figure 12-24: Pole Riser Standoff Bracket
214
Enterprise Standard
12.7.4.3 Riser protection

Riser cables at heavy traffic locations or areas subject to possible impact from trucks or
other vehicles MUST have added protection.
• Use a steel bumper or steel bumper with a concrete pillar.
• Install all risers as soon as possible to protect fiber, etc.
Where applicable, all risers SHOULD have innerduct to sweep the cable from the riser
guard to the strand.
• Ensure the innerduct extends up to and onto the strand for approximately 36-inches
on cable only.
• Innerduct MUST extend beyond any existing equipment located on the strand.
• Minimum radius bends MUST NOT be exceeded.
Figure 12-25: Riser Protection
Coaxial Cable and Conduit

When placing coaxial cable underground, it MUST be installed in conduit. Comcast does
not approve of the direct burial of coaxial cable. In these locations, conduit is placed by
approved underground construction techniques and the cable is then placed in the conduit
or duct.
215
Enterprise Standard
There are two methodologies that are used to place coaxial cable underground, direct
bury or cable placed in a conduit. Comcast does not approve the direct bury of coaxial
cable. In these locations, conduit is placed by approved underground construction
techniques and the coax is placed in a secondary step unless Cable-in-Conduit (CIC) has
been selected.
Cable placed into conduit for subsurface installation is solely for use by Comcast. Conduit
capacity may be leased. Comcast and lessee cabling SHOULD NOT occupy the same
duct.
Comcast may refuse to occupy conduit:
• Existing conduit that is found to not meet Comcast requirements or SOW.
• New conduit that is found to not meet Comcast requirements or SOW
After the design phase is complete and moving into the construction phase, a decision is
required as to the type of UG installation. Common types of installation are:
• Direct burial of the coax (IS NOT ALLOWED)
• Cable-in-conduit, (CIC).
• Cable placement in rigid conduit or
• Cable placement in a flexible conduit.
• Cable placed into innerduct may be used to segment new or existing conduit
Cable Direct Buried (Not Approved)

Direct Buried Cable is NOT a Comcast approved method of new construction. The
description is included as it will be encountered in the field during maintenance or
troubleshooting. The process of placing the cable directly into a subsurface environment
MUST be understood so that maintenance of the direct buried network can be performed.
Great care MUST be used to not cause additional damage to Comcast or an adjacent joint
user plant during repair.
Direct burying of cables can prove to be relatively low in cost, compared to other methods,
but one disadvantage is that additional cables or capacity cannot be easily increased.
Cable placed directly into the ground MUST have the following characteristics to support
the application.
• All subsurface direct buried cable will have a flooding compound between the shield
and the jacket. The flooding compound is used to seal the jacket if it is damaged.
• Subsurface direct buried cable with an armor for added protection in a harsh soil
environment will have a flooding compound between the shield and the inner jacket.
A flooding compound may be used between the armor and the outer jacket.
Note: The flooding compound will not protect the cable from backhoe fade.
216
Enterprise Standard
The following are descriptions of the cable that are used in a direct subsurface installation.
Flooded Unarmored Coaxial Cable
Flooded, Unarmored Coaxial Cable, are used in areas where the chances of the soil that
will surround the cable is stable and rocks will not be an issue.
Flooded, Armored Coaxial Cable
Flooded armored cable is used in subsurface environments requiring additional protection
from rocks in the pathway and critters needed something to chew on. The armor provides
additional protection in the subsurface environment.
Table 12-7: Underground Armored/Unarmored Cable
Flooded Unarmored Cable
Steel Tape Armored Cable
Corrugated Steel Armored Cable
Note: All greenfield and cable that requires replacement subsurface cable MUST be
placed in a conduit for added protection and future maintenance.
IF EXISTING SUBSURFACE CABLE IS TO BE REPLACED, A CONDUIT MUST BE

INSTALLED.
Conduit / Duct
Most underground environments are extreme environments. Conduit and duct systems
are used to protect cables from objects that might be present in the trench or plow line.
These objects may be of concern during trench excavation or plowing, or they may be of
long-term concern due to frost heave or ground movement.
Conduit and duct systems are used to provide flexibility with pulling additional cables into
place, making repairs to, or replacing cables that exist inside the duct system. Conduit,
when properly installed will provide years of protection for the cables inside guarding
against rocks, rodents, dig-ins and backhoe fades.
The pathway provided by conduit can facilitate replacement and upgrade projects or future
installations of additional cable or duct.
217
Enterprise Standard
Comcast uses four main types of ducts utilized in coaxial underground construction. Each
is made from Polyethylene (PE).
• PVC Rigid Conduit
• High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Flexible Conduit
o Smooth wall
o Ribbed
o Corrugated
• Medium Density Polyethylene (MDPE) Inner Duct
• Cable in Conduit (CIC)
12.8.2.1 Rigid Conduit

Rigid conduit is typically placed in open trenches to protect coaxial cable. It is sold in
straight sections and sweeps and is available in multiple wall thicknesses. Comcast
specifications for rigid PVC are:
• PVC - Schedule 40 minimum
• Diameter 2” Minimum
• Diameter 4” Maximum
• Conduit Length 20’ (Typical) 10’ (optional)
• Conduit sweeps MUST have a 36” minimum radius
In harsher environments schedule 80 duct may be used. It has similar characteristics to
schedule 40. The major difference is thicker walls and additional external load capability.
Figure 12-26: Rigid Conduit 4” Diameter and 20’ Length
90-degree transitions are NOT approved for use in Comcast underground

construction.
Figure 12-27: NO Right Angle Transition
218
Enterprise Standard
Rigid Conduit Sweeps are available in 90⁰, 45⁰, 30⁰, 22.5⁰ and 11.25⁰.
30⁰ Sweep
45⁰ Sweep
90⁰ Sweep
Figure 12-28: Conduit Sweep Angles
12.8.2.2 Flexible Conduit

High Density Polyethylene (HDPE), Flexible Conduit
HDPE conduit can be installed below ground by a variety of methods, including open
trench, plowing, continuous trenching and directional drilling. Installation into existing
conduit systems is facilitated by the continuous coiled lengths conduit.
• Flexible conduit is wound onto reels up to several thousand feet long
• No manufactured bends are used in the installation, i.e. sweeps.
• Can be navigated around unexpected obstructions (in the ground or within existing
ducts).
• Flexible conduit is reliably joined through a few splicing options.
219
Enterprise Standard
• 2” and 4” schedule 40 HDPE smooth wall are the Comcast duct standard sizes. No
less than a 2” can be used to ensure future path space.
Figure 12-29: Conduit on Reel
Flexible conduit can be in the following configurations;

• Multiple ducts of different color/stripe combinations and sizes can be delivered on
one common reel based on the project requirements.
• Corrugated innerduct, flexible, lightweight with a low coefficient of friction.
• Ribbed conduit, (longitudinally or spiral), provides friction reduction in cable
installation.
12.8.2.3 Innerduct
Innerduct installation within a conduit system may be desired.
• Innerducts can provide additional protection and identification for cables.
• May be installed several at a time, minimizing labor costs and providing additional
pathways for future use.
Innerduct can be used for separation of, or provide alternate paths for, the cable in the
conduit.
An example of the space division within the conduit:
• 1” Innerduct standard
• 2” Conduit – (1), 1” Innerduct + (1) cable up to 0.50”
• 3” Conduit – 1” Innerduct + (1) cable up to 0.875” and (1) 0.625” cable
• 4” conduit – (4) 1” Innerducts
Figure 12-30: Conduit Innerduct
220
Enterprise Standard
12.8.2.4 Cable-in-Conduit For Distribution

Conduit may be ordered with cable pre-installed. This reduces total installation time and
minimizes the need for specialized cable placing equipment and skilled manpower. Cable
in Conduit (CIC) can be manufactured and shipped on reels, which allows placement in a
variety of environments. The conduit provides protection and a pathway for future
upgrades of the cable. Although the conduit is extruded over the cable, there is no
adhesion between the conduit and the cable.
• The minimum conduit diameter is 2” for trunk and distribution construction.
12.8.2.5 Multi-cell Conduit (FuturePath)

Multi-cell conduits are designed to meet special needs and unique job situations. There
are several designs available to meet most of these special needs.
• Can be installed as an innerduct inside of an existing conduit.
o Will maximize the available space in a vacant or occupied conduit,
o A fully assembled conduit with internal conduits that when installed provides a
multi-channel conduit without the need to install additional innerducts.
o Multi-cell designs can be direct buried like PE conduit using standard installation
methods (plowing or open trenching).
Table 12-8: Multi-cell Conduit Configurations
Two-way Cell Conduit
Three-way Cell Conduit

Three Way Flat
Three-way Flat Cell Conduit
Four-way Cell Conduit
221
Enterprise Standard
Four-way Flat Cell Conduit
Seven-way Cell Conduit
Flex 6-way Micro duct

Micro ducts are connected through a web structure
12.8.2.6 Armored (Rodent and Mechanical Protection)

When placing cables underground there is concern about the ability of the conduit to
protect the cable(s) inside. Concerns usually are for crush resistance and resistance to
cutting and gnawing by animals. This need led to the development of armored conduit.
Armored Conduit is standard PE conduit that has been wrapped with a second layer of
metal and jacketed to provide a barrier to the problem of gnawing by animals. Armored
Conduit also protects against cuts and abrasions from accidental strikes by persons
digging nearby.
12.8.2.7 Tone-able Conduit or Conduit Location

Tone-able conduit provides a means of locating the conduit after it is installed. The conduit
has an integrated wire attached to the outside of the conduit with a figure eight style web
providing access to the tone wire. A tone wire assists with precision locating of subsurface
facilities by allowing a tone-able signal to be transmitted across the tone wire over
extended distances and depths.
Conduit Specialty Applications

Rigid and flexible conduits are used in locations that typically transition from a subsurface
installation to an application that may be aerial, placed on a structure, or a waterway. Each
application is unique and requires the conduit to be handle in a much different way than
traditional subsurface placement.
222
Enterprise Standard
12.8.3.1 Submarine / Underwater Duct

The term submarine is also referred to as underwater or marine, applications. Conduit
may be installed underwater, crossing a tidal basin, lake, or river. A logical route MUST
be planned. A route survey MUST be done to determine actual terrain conditions, and the
route adjusted accordingly before construction is started.
• Research of the proposed crossing is required before a conduit lay is even planned.
• Regulatory approvals MUST be obtained, possibly from several authorities.
Three basic methods of placing conduit in waterways are:
• Laying and anchoring the conduit on the bottom of the waterway.
• Plowing and jetting the conduit into the sub-aqueous terrain.
• Drilling under the waterway.
Each method has unique requirements based on the type of waterway, length,
environmental issues, and federal, state and local requirements. There may be instances
when all three types of application will be required on the same installation.
Note: The use of conduit is suitable for this application and requires special installation
procedures to address the buoyancy of the conduit.
• Conduit placed in or under a water environment MUST be butt fusion spliced where
sections are joined. The splice MUST be watertight.
• Conduit MUST be placed to counteract external forces that may be present in the
environment. These forces can be, water current flow, tidal changes, dredging
activities, etc.
12.8.3.2 Sub-Aqueous Terrain Plowing

Construction with this method can be accomplished with one of several technologies
designed for this special task. Installation with this method can eliminate the issues of
buoyancy if the conduit is buried deep enough.
• Offers the best protection from fishing activity, boat anchors, tidal and current
effects, and other submarine hazards.
• Burial depths need to be varied based on the soil conditions to provide adequate
protection.
12.8.3.3 Self-Propelled Bottom Crawling Vehicles

Operated in the same manner as track driven plows. These are land-based bulldozers
with a sealed diesel engine outfitted with special snorkeling equipment for the air intake
and exhaust manifold. While most are operated manually, there is a growing number of
remote-controlled units.
223
Enterprise Standard
Large Sled-type Conduit Plows

Sled type conduit plows are designed to be
towed by a powerful boat. This has been the
standard plowing method for many years.
Plowing may be started and completed on the
shoreline. Shoreline finishes can be completed
using a tractor on the shore to finish the pull in
water too shallow for the boat. Figure 12-31: Sled-type Conduit Plow
12.8.3.4 Jet-assisted Plows

Jet-assisted plows are similar to the sled-type plows and are also towed by a powerful
boat. The difference is that jet-assisted plows use forward aiming high-pressure water
jets to fluidize the soil and rear aiming low-pressure water jets to direct the fluidized soil to
the rear. The forward water jets ‘open’ the trench for the conduit to be placed in before
the fluidized soil pushed back by the rear jets settles and starts the backfill process.
Bridge Structures Conduit Placement

Bridge structures can range from a conduit placed in
the bridge structure when the bridge is built to a major
retrofit of an existing bridge. To support conduit, bridge
structures require specially designed support systems
to ensure structural integrity and meet all federal, state
and local requirements.
DO NOT USE bridge crossings where the structure
rotates or lifts (draw bridge) to allow water traffic to
transit through or below the bridge. These bridge
structures do not provide a continuous path for the
installation of the conduit.
Figure 12-32: Bridge with Conduit
12.8.4.1 Bridge Expansion and Contraction

It is important to understand the dynamics of the bridge structure. Bridge expansion and
contraction MUST be accounted for during the design process prior to installing
conduit on bridges. The installed conduit MUST be capable of following the changes of
the bridge structure.
• Expansion joints MUST be installed in the conduit to prevent the conduit from either
separating or bending and kinking due to bridge movement.
• Expansion joints can use a serpentine path have been proven effective in reducing
bridge and conduit expansion/contraction issues.
224
Enterprise Standard
• Minimum radius bending MUST NOT be exceeded for the conduit or innerducts.
• Underground plant, temperatures, below a frost line, can range from 50⁰ to 70⁰
Fahrenheit (F), even in northern climates. Bridges can experience temperature
swings of 120⁰ to 150⁰ Fahrenheit. These temperature swings may be exceeded.
• Conduit is generally suspended below bridges or laid in cable trays attached to the
bridge sides.
• Conduit can be attached directly to the bridge or to standoff brackets.
12.8.4.2 Bridge Structure Conduit Attachment

Attachment of the conduit to the bridge structure MUST provide enough attachment points
and attachment points can be sized to provide potential for growth.
• Addition of future conduits can be very challenging to suspended systems. This is
due to limited access to the bridge hangers.
• Side-mounted trays provide the easiest access for additional duct installations and
are the easiest to inspect and maintain.
Conduit attached to bridges need to be designed to handle the expansion and contraction
of the conduit and the bridge structure through couplers and clamps or expansion joints.
Expansion and contraction MUST be understood when designing and placing the conduit
on a bridge structure to counteract the issue of the conduit pulling out of an expansion
joint. To control conduit motion in aerial and bridge applications:
• Forceful restraint captures the conduit between straight sections.
o Use anchors or restraints placed at regular intervals help to limit conduit
movement due to expansion and contraction.
o Bends MUST be restrained at the beginning and end of the sweep.
o Duct ends MUST be firmly affixed to splice box entry points with terminators.
• For very long sections of exposed duct, expansion joints or couplings may be
incorporated.
o MUST be designed to allow free lateral movement of the duct, both into and away
from the center of the expansion coupling.
o Duct MUST be secured every 24” to 48” along the tray, depending upon the
diameter and the construction of the duct.
• Secure the duct with UV-rated cable straps or galvanized steel straps. Due to the
lightweight of HDPE duct, it may be subject to being blown out of the tray in extreme
winds. Strapping MUST be strong enough and placed frequently enough to
safeguard against these forces.
225
Enterprise Standard
Flexible Conduit / Duct Splicing

Splicing of conduits at the joining of reels or due to cutting because of obstructions in the
pathway or extended distance requirements, several coupling choices are available for
completing these connections. Depending upon the design requirements, watertight
fittings are available.
• Pulling innerduct into a larger conduit, Do Not do so with couplings installed.
• Plastic twist-on couplings, which are of a low-profile design, can be used on the
feed end for minimal distances, if duct on the reel be too short.
• Limit introducing couplings into the conduit. There is no way to determine the forces
placed on the coupling as the duct is pulled.
o If a partial failure of the coupling occur, it could cause the loss of air pressure,
for blowing that may not be easy to detect. This coupling failure could also allow
water intrusion into an otherwise secure conduit structure.
Conduit can be joined by a variety of thermal and mechanical methods. Conduit does not
experience any long-term internal pressure and acts only as a pathway for cables,
effective coupling MUST be specified. An integral part of any conduit system is the type
and quality of joining method used. Proper engineering design of a conduit system will
consider the type and effectiveness of these joining techniques.
There are joint performance considerations that affect the system’s reliability well beyond
the initial installation. Some of these might include:
• Pull out resistance, both at installation and over time due to thermal contraction /
expansion, MUST be considered.
o Critical for “blow-in” cable installations, which will exert an outward force at joints.
o Pulling installations will tend to exert the opposite force.
• Pressure leak rates, for “blow-in” installations at pressures of 125 to 150 psi.
Consideration MUST be given to how much leakage can be tolerated without
reducing the distance the cable can consistently be moved through the conduit.
• Infiltration leakage, allowing water and/or silt to enter the conduit over time, can
create obstacles for cable installation and repair or cause water freeze compression
of cables.
• Corrosion resistance is important as conduit systems are often buried in soils
exposed to and containing alkali, fertilizers, and ice-thawing chemicals,
insecticides, herbicides and acids.
• Cold temperature brittleness resistance is required to avoid problems with
installation and long-term performance in colder climates.
PE-to-PE joints may be made using heat fusion, electrofusion or mechanical fittings.
Mechanical couplings are often preferred over fusion joints, due to the internal bead of a
butt fusion joint, which can interfere with cable installation.
226
Enterprise Standard
Consult with the conduit vendor for the recommended and appropriate style and type of
joining method for the conduit.
12.8.5.1 Mechanical Fittings

ASTM F 2176, “Standard Specification for Mechanical Couplings Used on Polyethylene
Conduit, Duct and Innerduct,” establishes performance requirements for material,
workmanship, and testing of 2-inch and smaller mechanical fittings for PE conduit.
Threaded Mechanical Fittings
Threaded mechanical fittings are available in various materials and configurations for
conduit sizes 2-inches and smaller.
• Only use connectors with sealing capabilities
• Internal thread designs of these fittings are typically tapered similar to pipe threads,
with a left-hand thread on one end and a right-hand thread on the other to cut thread
paths on the conduit’s outer surface. This thread design allows the operator to
thread the fitting onto the ends of both conduit sections simultaneously.
Compression Fittings
Compression fittings are available in numerous designs – some designs for conduit as
large as 8-inch and others for only 2-inch and below.
Internal stiffeners are not required in communications conduit systems. Stiffeners may
create obstacles for cable being blown through the conduit.
Consult the vendor for the appropriate fitting for the application.
12.8.5.2 Heat Fusion

The principle of heat fusion is to heat two surfaces to a designated temperature and fuse
them together by application of a force sufficient to cause the materials to flow together
and mix. When fused in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommended procedure
and allowed to cool to nearly ambient temperatures, the joint becomes as strong or
stronger than the conduit itself in both tensile and pressure properties. Three primary heat
fusion methods used in joining PE conduit are butt, socket and electrofusion.
Butt Fusion Joining
Butt fusion joints are produced without need of special fittings, using specially developed
butt fusion machines, that secure, face and precisely align the conduit for the flat face hot
iron fusion process.
• The butt fusion process produces an internal bead of equal or larger size than the
visible outer bead.
• If internal restrictions are a concern for the cable installation, alternative joining
methods may be more appropriate.
227
Enterprise Standard
Socket Fusion Joining

This technique requires the use of specially designed hot irons to simultaneously heat
both the external surface of the pipe and the internal surface of the socket coupling.
Specially designed hand tools are available to maintain alignment and stab depth of the
hot irons until the materials reach fusion temperature. These tools also help secure the
heated conduit end and coupling as the joint is made.
• Design requirements for socket fusion can be found in ASTM D 2683 for fittings and
in ASTM F 1056 for socket fusion tools.
• As with butt fusion, socket-fused joints may have an internal bead that can interfere
with cable placement.
Electrofusion Joining
Electrofusion involves the use of a special electrofusion fitting with an embedded wire coil.
Electrical current supplied to the wire coil by an electrofusion control box generates the
heat for fusion. Special training in equipment use and maintenance may be needed.
For additional information, consult the Plastic Pipe Institutes Polyethylene Pipe Handbook
chapter 9 PE Pipe Joining Procedures.
12.8.5.3 Repair Operations

Repair joints are often designed specifically for use in repair situations. The nature of the
damage will often dictate what types of joints are needed for repairs.
• A clamp-on style joint may be preferred when damage is limited and removal of the
cable for repair is not necessary.
• In severe damage situations, requiring new cable and conduit sections installed,
many of the joining methods described earlier may be suitable.
• The type of repair fitting or joint installed MUST:
o Maintain the integrity of the conduit system,
o Prevent infiltration
o Provide sufficient resistance to thermal expansion / contraction.
Innerducts to Micro Duct couplers are generally of the push-fit and lock design with an O-
ring seal and release collets to allow for re-use.
• With an internal center stop, the duct cannot be over inserted, and the couplers are
suitable to create an air and watertight seal.
• High internal pressures that may occur during air-blown fiber installations are
maintained by the couplers up to approximately 150 psi.
Follow vendor recommendations when preparing the repair couplers.
228
Enterprise Standard
Intercept Existing Conduits

When intercepting or placing the new conduit:
• Always call 811 before any digging, boring or trenching project is started!
Prior notification will help avoid injury, expense, embarrassment and a very
inconvenient day without critical services like electricity, internet or phone for the
public and business and Comcast potential customers.
LOCATE – LOCATE - LOCATE – LOCATE - LOCATE - LOCATE
Conduit intercepts are used to tie new conduit into an existing conduit. The existing
conduit may have been placed in anticipation of future capacity needs. Existing conduit
placement can be found;
• Under highways, streets, on bridges or other support structures
• Protruding through an existing building wall
• In an underground easement
To access these conduits Comcast or the business partner will determine the point of
access or intercept of the existing conduit. Different intercept applications are described
in the following subsections. Each conduit intercept will present unique challenges. Use
these guidelines to assist in determining the feasibility when intercepting an existing
conduit.
Determine if the conduit to be intercepted has active communication cables. Can the
conduit be intercepted without damaging existing active cables?
• An existing Comcast conduit.
o Are there active cables in the conduit?
• No power conduits with active cables are to be intercepted.
o An existing power conduit can be used ONLY if it has been abandoned or is set
aside for other uses such as a communications cable.
o All power separation requirements MUST be met.
• Joint use communication conduits are not recommended for interception.
o If used, are active cables in the conduit?
o Will an inner duct be used in the existing and new conduit?
The location of the existing conduit MUST be known.
• Excavation is required to find the conduit where the intercept is to be performed.
• Excavation is required to find the end of the existing conduit if the new conduit is to
be directly connected to the existing
If the conduit to be intercepted is concrete encased, carefully remove all existing concrete.
The encasement MUST be removed without damage to the existing conduit.
229
Enterprise Standard
12.8.6.1 Highway or Street Crossing Intercept

At the point of conduit intercept a pull-box, vault or manhole MUST be installed. In this
sub-section, these terms may be used interchangeably with the term vault being used
most. A specific reference to a term will be made as required.
• Determine the existing conduit is clear of obstructions.
• The existing and new conduits MUST meet in the vault.
o Conduit shall terminate not more than 3” inside the vault.
o Every effort MUST be made to run the conduit straight into the vault. Do not use
sweeps or bends to enter the vault.
o Secure the conduit where it enters the vault to keep out water, rock, soil and
critter intrusion into the vault.
• The two conduits may be of different sizes or diameters.
o Every effort MUST be made to size the conduits so they are the same and can
be easily joined.
o Use an adapter that will transition between conduit sizes and not provide a sharp
edge that can damage the cables. This is dependent upon the application.
• If the existing conduit has a large inner diameter, the conduit being placed can be
installed as an inner duct. Verify the installation requirements of the conduit owner.
• Highway and street crossing conduits MUST be sealed to prevent ingress of
moisture and soil content into the conduit.
Figure 12-28 shows the conduit in a pull box on either side of a street or roadway crossing.
Figure 12-33: Highway or Street Intercept
12.8.6.2 Building Intercept

To intercept an existing building conduit placed in anticipation of future connectivity use
the following guidelines to determine the conduit is suitable for the application.
• Determine the location of the existing conduit at the building.
• Determine the existing conduit is clear of obstructions.
• New conduit MUST be joined to the existing conduit.
230
Enterprise Standard
• Every effort MUST be made to run the conduit straight to the intercept point. Do
not use sweeps or bends to enter the vault.
• The two conduits may be of different sizes or diameters.
o Use an adapter if required to transition between the two sizes of conduits.
o Make every effort to plan for the same size conduit when making the joint.
• If the existing conduit has a large inner diameter, the conduit being placed can be
installed as an inner duct. Verify the installation requirements of the conduit owner.
• All buried joins shall be glued with cement as recommended by the manufacturer.
• Conduit connection MUST be sealed to prevent water and soil ingress.
Figure 12-34: Building Intercept
12.8.6.3 Existing Conduit “Y” to New Conduit

In this example a new conduit MUST intercept an existing conduit. “Y” connectors are
available in two types a one piece “Y” for new conduits and a split “Y” for existing conduits.
To run a lateral, a “Y” connection can be used if the following are observed.
• Determine if the existing conduit has active cables.
• Determine the point that the existing conduit is to be intercepted.
• Excavate to the existing conduit.
• Splitting the conduit MUST be done with extreme care.
• Install a “Split Y” adapter sized for the installed conduit.
• Install a conduit bend that is not less than a 36” minimum radius.
• New conduit MUST be joined to the existing conduit.
• Provide a pull line through the new conduit extending back to where the cable will
be pulled from. Do not disturb a pull line in the existing conduit.
• All conduit connections MUST be watertight.
231
Enterprise Standard
• A vault over the Y connection is optional.

• Conduit connection MUST be sealed to prevent water and soil ingress.
Figure 12-31 illustrates the Split “Y” conduit join. It is used to split an existing conduit at a
designated intercept point.
Figure 12-35: Split "Y: Adapter
The following diagram illustrates the “Y” conduit join. It is used to split an existing conduit
at a designated intercept point. The join will transition to a bend or sweep to the new
conduit.
• 36” Minimum radius.
• 6” of straight conduit prior to the beginning of the sweep.
• The existing conduit MUST be opened at the intercept point to accommodate the
join of the new conduit. Both the conduit and sweep MUST be cut precisely. Follow
manufacturers guidelines.
• Prior to joining of the conduit pieces install a pull rope
• Glue the existing conduit to the new conduit sweep.
• “Y” join MUST provide a watertight join to prevent moisture and soil ingress into the
conduit.
• All open conduit ends MUST be covered and sealed.
232
Enterprise Standard
Figure 12-36: "Y" Intercept Join Diagram
Subsurface Installation of Coaxial Cable or Conduits

Proper care and handling during installation is critical to the long-term reliability of the
buried coaxial cable network. The initial subsurface installation of coaxial cable is a major
determining factor in the longevity of the system and degree of continuing maintenance
required. During construction, proper attention MUST be given to the mechanical and
environmental factors which can cause degradation and failure.
Subsurface systems are divided into two major categories.
• Direct buried cable systems. (NOT ALLOWED)
• Underground cable systems, conduit / duct
o Underground cable systems are those systems that interconnect through
manholes and vaults.
o The cables of underground systems are normally connected via a conduit or
duct system that is constructed as part of a civil engineering project.
o The construction of the duct system is beyond the scope of this manual and
accordingly will not be reviewed.
o Placement of cables into underground duct systems will be reviewed.
Note: When working in a subsurface environment, review and follow OSHA guidelines
for excavation and tunneling.
Trenching
Excavation of the earth is fundamental to placing a subsurface conduit in trenches.
Trenching is advantageous to the placement of several cables in one operation and for
placement of cables of long lengths. Trenching is accomplished using tractors equipped
with trenching chains that travel on a trenching bar. The trenches are opened (cut) by the
233
Enterprise Standard
trenching chain while the tractor provides forward movement of the trenching chain. The
earth (spoil) is removed from the trench by the trenching chain and moved adjacent to the
trench by a horizontal auger driven simultaneously by the tractor.
Tractor size dictates trenching depth capability, general pace of the trench excavation and
the amount of restoration work required. Larger tractors increase trench excavation rate
and depth capability, but also cause greater disturbance to the area of excavation. The
tractor MUST be of a size that can fit through the appropriate gates, cut a sufficiently deep
trench, and excavate at an appropriate rate. Special trenching chains are available for
rocky or frozen soil.
Note: Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) guidelines for
excavation and tunneling MUST be reviewed and followed.
Note: Trenching may require the use of shoring to reinforce the soil when working in
excavations beyond a certain depth. Failure to comply with these regulations may result
in injury or death should a collapse occur. Stiff fines may be implied by Occupational
Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) inspectors. These fines may be levied upon
Comcast, the business partner or other individuals in violation of these safety practices.
12.9.1.1 Trenching Guidelines

When trenching, use extreme care.
• Be alert to the color and nature of the soil for changes. A presence of sand can be
an indication that an existing subsurface system may be near.
• If a gas odor is detected, shut off all equipment and notify the gas company
immediately. Do not start or move any equipment and keep everyone from the area
until the gas is shut off. If there are homes in the immediate area inform
homeowners that they should leave until the gas company informs them, it is safe.
Before trenching in any yard, determine where sprinklers or other subsurface utilities are
present.
LOCATE – LOCATE - LOCATE!

• Hand dig around identified sprinkler systems.
• Caution MUST be used near trees. The trencher can catch and stall on large roots.
• All bores and crossings MUST be installed prior to the start of the trenching process.
• The trench route MUST be carefully planned and be as straight as possible.
Only qualified personnel can operate construction machines and equipment.
234
Enterprise Standard
12.9.1.1.1 Trench Depth

• The trench MUST be excavated to allow a minimum depth of 24 inches to the top
of the conduit.
• Radial separation to other joint-use utilities is 12 inches in well tamped earth.
Note: Lesser separations may be used where the joint-use parties agree.
• Highways, streets, bridges, tunnels and railroads may require deeper conduit
depths.
• Joint-use separations MUST comply with NESC 2017 section 32 Underground
conduit systems.
Figure 12-37: Trench Depth Illustration
A warning tape is shown in the Figure 12-33. It is recommended that a tape is placed
approximately 12” below the grade. The tape should be 4” to 6” wide fiber reinforced
orange warning tape marked with a minimum as shown in Figure 12-33.
Figure 12-38: Trench Warning Tape
235
Enterprise Standard
12.9.1.1.2 Materials in the Trench
• Remove all rocks and large stones from the bottom of the trench to prevent damage
to the conduit in very rocky soil. This will prevent damage to the cable due to frost
heave.
o Throughout the excavation, the workers MUST be alert for changing soil
conditions, where large rocks or tree roots may affect the performance or path
of the duct.
o Material larger than 50% of the diameter of the duct being placed MUST be
removed. DO NOT use for backfilling around the conduit.
o Extremely rocky conditions may require a backfill and base material of fine
aggregate to maximize the duct performance.
o A level, six-inch base of sand or fine material is ideal for placing the duct upon,
continuing the use of this material on the sides and top of the duct for a distance
of 6 inches minimum to help limit the duct from contacting large rocks which
could affect the performance of the duct.
o It is recommended to backfill and tamp the soil after placing the initial 6 inches
of fill over the duct. This will help compact the soil equally around the duct and
provide the best support possible.
o Voids left in the soil along the duct may cause the duct to migrate toward the void
over time, degrading the path of the duct, increasing pulling tensions.
12.9.1.1.3 Trench Offset / Intersections

• Supplemental trenches MUST be made to all offset enclosure locations.
• Trench intersections MUST be excavated to provide adequate space to make
sweeping bends in the cable / conduit.
• Pedestals and handholes ought to be offset from the main trench
• Push clean fill into the trench to cushion the conduit.
Trenchers and Tractors

• The tractor MUST be operated to travel a preferred path and to advance at a pace
that allows the trenching chain not to be excessively loaded.
• The tractor cannot abruptly change directions or make sharp curves when the
trencher bar is lowered into the trench.
o Abrupt changes in direction undercut the side of the trench, making it unusable.
o This may over-strain and damage the trencher.
• A trench curve MUST be a long sweeping change anticipated in advance due to the
very large radius required.
236
Enterprise Standard
Figure 12-39: Trencher Preferred Path
Cable or Flexible Conduit Reels.

• The conduit trailer or pay-off device MUST be in line with the trench line to prevent
any unnecessary bending or potential damage to the conduit.
• Conduit MUST pay-off of the bottom of the reel to prevent any unnecessary
bending.
• Conduits MUST be pulled into place.
• Conduit MUST be carefully bent around corners and bent upward at enclosure
locations. DO NOT EXCEED the minimum bend radius for cable or conduit.
Figure 12-40: Conduit Placement in the Trench from a Trailer
237
Enterprise Standard
Open Trench
Trenching is accomplished with specialized trenching tractors which cut the trench and
remove the soil in a single action. Depending upon the width of the trench multiple conduits
can be placed over long or short distances.
• Trench MUST be as straight and level as possible. If there is a rapid grade change,
use backfill to support the conduit.
• Excavate the trench to the desired depth.
• Remove all rocks and large stones from the bottom of the trench to prevent damage
to the conduit in very rocky soil.
• Clean fill MUST be used in the trench to support and cushion the conduit.
• Supplemental trenches MUST be made to all offset enclosure locations.
• Trench intersections MUST be excavated to provide adequate space to make
sweeping bends in the conduit.
Figure 12-41: Trench Bend Radius
Dig out the inner section of the comer so the conduit has a large enough bend and won't
kink.
• The amount that the inner radius of the comer is dug depends on the width of the
trench and the type, size and number of conduits placed in the trench.
• It is very important that coaxial cable, conduit and cable in conduit (CIC) is not bent
sharply, IT WILL KINK and not work properly.
• Kinked conduit and cable are a major problem in underground installations because
the cable jacket hides kinks.
• Cable cannot be pulled properly through kinked conduit.
238
Enterprise Standard
Figure 12-42: Conduit Placement in Trench
• Avoid curves smaller than the conduit minimum bend radius.

• Undercut inside corners to increase the radius of the bend.
o The minimum undercut MUST be 12 times the diameter of the flexible conduit.
o PVC will use 36” minimum radius bends.
• If there is a rapid grade change, use backfill to support the conduit.
12.9.4.1 Rolled Duct and CIC Installation

There are two basic methods to pay out conduit and/or cable in conduit (CIC) into the
trench. These are stationary or moving reel methods. The duct has to pay off the bottom
of the reel for either method.
12.9.4.1.1 Open Trench or Bore– Stationary Reel

To use the stationary reel method, unroll the duct from the reel trailer.
A backhoe or other slow-moving vehicle may be useful when pulling out long lengths of
flexible conduit. A basket pulling grip and swivel are required on the duct when it is tied to
a rope or chain attached to a vehicle.
• Slowly pull the conduit from the reel and avoid over spinning the reel.
• Protect a duct or CIC that is laid out on the ground to avoid damage from traffic and
other sources.
Obstructions:
Obstructions such as a utility lateral may occur.
• Pull the cable or duct slightly past the obstruction.
• Disconnect the CIC or duct and place it under the obstruction.
• Reattach the duct to the vehicle and continue pulling.
239
Enterprise Standard
Corners:
When encountering a corner,
• Pull the CIC out in a straight line long enough to finish the run.
• Disconnect and pull the duct back around the corner.
• It can also be placed in a bull wheel at the comer and then pulled out to the end.
Remember, cable pulls easier through a straight section of duct than it does through a
duct with even the slightest bend or multiple bends. With the duct or CIC next to the trench,
place it into the trench as straight as possible. It is best to have one person place the CIC
or duct into the trench as they walk along the trench. See Figure 12-38: Conduit
Placement in Trench.
12.9.4.1.2 Open Trench – Moving Reel Conduit Installation

An open trench is ideal for placing the conduit. If the location provides the opportunity to
use a moving reel, proceed with caution observing installation guidelines.
Single Cable or Conduit
• The conduit MUST be capped.
• The end of the conduit MUST be secured outside the trench.
• Pay-off from the bottom of the reel.
• Every effort MUST be made to lay the conduit in a straight path.
• Moving the trailer forward, a worker will feed the conduit into the trench. Do not
allow the reel to overspin.
Multiple Cables or Conduits
• The conduits MUST be capped.
• The end of the conduits MUST be secured outside the trench.
• Pay-off from the bottom of the reel.
• Every effort MUST be made to lay the conduits flat and straight in the trench.
• Do Not allow a conduit to cross-over another conduit.
• Moving the trailer forward, a worker will feed the conduit into the trench. Do not
allow the reel(s) to over spin. To accommodate multiple conduits, multiple reels
may be simultaneously used. Multiple conduits may be on one reel.
Figure 12-43: Moving Reel Open Trench Conduit Placement
240
Enterprise Standard
Do not allow the conduit to “snake” in the trench.
Figure 12-44: Conduit Placement in Trench
12.9.4.2 Flooded Trench

Working in areas with a shallow water table, the trench may fill with water before
restoration is completed. PE and PVC duct is buoyant, and the following steps are
necessary for duct placement:
• Pump water out of the trench before placing the duct in the trench.
• Plan to restrain the duct in the trench after placement to prevent flotation.
• Returning the backfill to the flooded trench will not force a duct to remain in place
on the trench bottom.
• Duct organizers may be useful for restraining multiple ducts in the trench.
• For a single duct it may be more practical to use sandbags to restrain the duct.
Note: It is extremely advisable to place all materials (i.e., conduit cable, etc.) in an open
trench, as soon as possible.
12.9.4.3 Open Trench Backfill

It is best to place the softest soil directly on and around the conduit. DO NOT place large
rocks directly on the conduit. Allow at least 2 - 4 inches (5 - 10 cm) of dirt to cushion
the conduit.
• Select back-fill MUST be placed into the bottom trench to provide protection to the
cables in the trench.
• Changes in grade along the trench path may require backfill soil to support the
conduit.
• At bend or sweep locations additional backfill is required to support the conduit.
Best practice to ensure long-term protection of underground facilities is to utilize sand for
padding the conduit.
241
Enterprise Standard
• Sand provides a more stable

environment for the conduit
prohibiting damage from rocks and
allowing water to drain away easily.
• Sand provides protection during
future excavation near your facilities.
A change in soil condition provides
warning that there is a utility present.
Sand alone MUST NOT replace the
practice of using warning tape. Sand
SHOULD serve as a supplemental Figure 12-45: Trench Fill
protection practice.
• Bury warning tape above the cable during the back-fill process.
• Fill the trench and compact it as required. Tamp the trench to provide compaction
that will prevent the trench from receding or shrinking later.
• Enclosures MUST be placed as designed.
Conduit organizers can be used when placing multiple conduits in a trench.
• Organizers prevent the conduits from twisting over and around each other, by
keeping the conduits in alignment. Conduits in alignment offer reduced cable
pulling tensions.
• Water present in the trench or when using an extremely wet concrete slurry the,
floating of the conduit can be restricted through the use of conduit organizers.
Note: Backfilling in lifts of about six inches, compacting each lift before starting the next,
will help prevent the trench from sinking.
12.9.4.4 Frost Heave

Frost heave occurs when moisture-retaining soils are exposed to subfreezing
temperatures for a prolonged period as is found in Northern climates. As freezing extends
deeper into the soil, retained moisture expands. Since the moisture cannot expand
downwards, and lateral expansion is somewhat contained, it follows the path of least
resistance, which is generally upwards. Any object embedded in soil subject to these
conditions will also be lifted. This includes buried conduit. Factors determining the degree
of lift include:
• Amount of retained moisture in the soil.
• Depth of insulating snow cover.
• Duration of sub-zero temperature levels.
• Duration of exposure.
242
Enterprise Standard
Note: During a typical northern winter, accompanied by normal snowfall (which acts as
an insulating blanket) only a very small percentage of surface area actually freezes. When
the snow blanket is absent, plowed away (as in roads, walkways), or prevented from
accumulating (under bridges or other protected areas), the ground may freeze, and
subsequent frost heave can be severe.
To help minimize frost heave after installing the conduit:
• Ensure that restoration of walkways or road surfaces is complete and properly
compacted to avoid surface water penetration into the area around the conduit.
• Use soil with a low moisture level to backfill in order to minimize this effect in colder
climates.
Note: Roads, sidewalks, and bridge locations. Due to the behavior of an object when
subjected to frost heave, the object (in this case, the conduit structure) continues to be
pushed upward as each freeze cycle causes soil to migrate below the conduit. Eventually,
these cycles can break up the surface restoration (potholes), and even allow the duct to
become exposed. Proper restoration with asphalt, cement, or grout will help limit moisture
migration into the softer soil layers, minimizing frost heave.
Plowing
Comcast and business partner personnel MUST be familiar with and qualified to operate
the plowing equipment.
Conduit placement by plowing methods are less intrusive than by trenching methods.
Ground surface is minimally disturbed compared to trenching.
Prior to plowing a communication system or methodology MUST be established between
construction team members. Communication between team members is critical during
the plowing process.
Tractors provide forward movement of the
plowing equipment. A plow blade will split the
earth and conduits will be routed through an
internal cavity (plow chute) to the base of the
plow chute.
Dimensions of the plow chute are governed by
the dimensions of the conduit being placed. The
radius of the plow chute MUST be carefully
considered with respect to conduit type and the
minimum bending radius.
Attention MUST be given to the condition of the Figure 12-46: Large Trencher Example
plow chute. Burrs, sharp edges, and rough
surfaces can damage cables and conduits during
the placement process.
243
Enterprise Standard
Plow chutes are manufactured specifically to place multiple conduits simultaneously. The
plow chute is divided to provide independent paths for each to travel through the plow.
Two methods of plowing are associated with the underground placement of the conduit
systems. Vibratory and Static plowing are both used for conduit placement. The scale of
the construction project, equipment and manpower availability, excavation specifications
and the trenching environment are factors that MUST be considered when a plowing
method is selected.
12.9.5.1 Factors to Consider

• Drag created by the earth on the pulled conduit creates substantial pulling tension.
• Unseen subsurface objects may damage the conduit as they are pulled across the
object.
• Local regulation may require warning tape to be plowed in with the conduit. Most
plow manufacturers make plow blades that bury conduit and tape at the same time.
12.9.5.2 Construction Method Prior to Plowing

• All bores and crossings MUST be installed prior to the start of the plowing process.
• Dig a trench deep enough and at least twice the length of the plow blade/chute for
the plow blade to enter the trench. This enables the lowering of the plow chute and
forming of the conduits at the start of the plow line. The specified bending radius
of the conduit MUST be considered and not exceeded.
• A similar trench MUST be dug at the other end of the installation to allow the plow
blade to exit the trench. This enables the raising of the plow chute and forming of
the conduits at the end of the plow line. The specified bending radius of the conduit
MUST be considered and not exceeded.
• Cap or tape the conduit end.
• Make sure the reel does not run into objects that may damage the conduit.
• Pay the conduit over the top of the reel. Do not use reel brakes.
• Plow chutes MUST be inspected to ensure that the minimum bending radius of the
conduit is not exceeded.
• Plow chutes MUST be inspected for burrs, sharp edges or rough surfaces.
• The conduit may pay-off from the front of the tractor or from a stationary conduit
reel.
• Warning tape can be placed above the conduit during the plowing process
244
Enterprise Standard
12.9.5.3 Static Plowing

Static plowing is accomplished much like vibratory plowing except the plow chute does
not vibrate to split the earth. Static plowing is the preferred method for installing conduit.
The plow line is made by the forward movement of the tractor while the plow chute is in a
lowered position.
A tractor moves slowly forward as the blade splits the earth and places the conduit at the
required depth. Because terrain and soil types vary, follow the recommendation of the
plow manufacturer for the correct feed tube and plow blade.
Communication between team members is critical during the plowing process.
Figure 12-47: Static Plowing
Note: At a minimum, an operator and a helper / feeder are needed for plowing installation.
12.9.5.4 Vibratory Plowing

Vibratory plowing offers substantial productivity gains over other direct burial methods.
• Vibratory plowing uses a tractor with a hydraulically driven shaker that provides
vibratory movement of the plow blade.
• The reel is transported by the tractor.
• Pay-off is routed over the tractor body to the plow chute.
• Vibratory plow blade will split the earth while the tractor provides forward movement
of the plow blade.
• Conduit will be routed through the plow chute and will trail the plow blade as the
tractor and plow blade moves forward.
Figure 12-48: Vibratory Plowing

Note: There is not a means to effectively monitor pulling tension so coordinated operation
of the tractor and plow are critical.
245
Enterprise Standard
12.9.5.5 Pull Plow

This method requires the use of a vibrator box attachment. Select a plow blade with a
circular area at least 1-inch (2.5 cm) larger than the conduit. This expanded area will
provide a path for the conduit that will reduce the amount of pulling tension associated
with side wall pressure.
A tag-behind bullet can also be used. Attach the bullet to the plow blade with a short
length of chain. Attach the other end of the bullet to a pulling swivel and grip to pull the
conduit. Cap or tape the conduit end.
Over pulling can relieve pulling tension in longer pulls. Pull the conduit to an intermediate
trench and over pull through the pit.
Note: Loose soil (such as sand) will decrease the length a conduit can be pulled due to
soil collapsing around the conduit effectively increasing the pulling tension. This same
effect will also occur in wet clay type soil.
Pre-Rip
It is advisable to pre-rip each run. Pre-ripping is an extra step. Time studies have shown
an increase in productivity as a result of pre-ripping. Section 12.9.5.6 will cover the pre-
rip.
Figure 12-49: Pull Plow Example
12.9.5.6 Rip and Plow (using two tractors)

If obstructions (like roots and large rocks) are anticipated along the installation path,
consider a rip and plow installation. In rip and plow, a lead tractor rips the ground by
pulling a plow without conduit several hundred yards / meters ahead of the tractor with the
conduit.
• Pre-rip tractor will split the soil prior to the secondary pass in the same plow line as
the plowing tractor. The first tractor clears the route and permits the second tractor
to work more efficiently.
• Locating potential problems such as existing services and immovable objects prior to
conduit placement, increase efficiency.
• In some severe soil conditions, it is helpful to pre-rip more than once.
246
Enterprise Standard
The size of the plowing tractor is dictated by soil conditions and plowing depths. Soil
conditions may require the use of a pre-rip tractor and/or an additional pull-piece tractor.
• Pull-piece tractors are used to provide additional pulling power to plow tractors.
• Maximum plow ground speed increases in adverse soil conditions when pre-ripped.
Note: Plow conduit in the same direction as the last pre-rip pass.
• Excavate entry and exit pits for the blade.
Figure 12-50: Rip and Plow
Boring (Conventional and Directional)

Boring digs or punches a hole in the earth, usually from one trench to another. It is an
excellent method for crossing areas that cannot be plowed (such as paved roads or
railroad tracks) if they cannot be traversed aerially.
Conventional Bores
Routing of cables and conduits may necessitate the subsurface crossing of streets,
parking lots or other immovable objects. Conventional bores can be used. These bores
are typically an “aim and shoot” process.
12.10.1.1 Mechanical Boring

A mechanical boring machine may be utilized to push a drill stem and auger (jack and
bore) to make an adequate conduit passage. The auger diameter SHOULD be 1 inch (2.5
cm) larger diameter than the conduit being installed.
Follow the equipment manufacturer operation instructions. In general practice position
the auger oriented in the direction of the receiving pit.
Figure 12-51: Mechanical Bore
247
Enterprise Standard
LOCATE - LOCATE - LOCATE UTILITIES - LOCATE – LOCATE
12.10.1.2 Pneumatically Driven Pistons (missiles)

Pneumatically driven pistons are also used to complete subsurface crossings.
Subsurface crossings are generally accomplished by digging an excavation pit (trench) on
each side of the crossing to allow the guiding and retrieval of the drill stem or pneumatic
piston. Detailed equipment operation and excavation procedures are specified by the
construction equipment manufacturer.
Figure 12-52: Pneumatically Driven Piston
The tunnel of the crossing may be enlarged by using reamers. Conduits MUST support
the tunnel wall and allow placement of cables within the crossings. Subsurface bores are
often completed substantially prior to any cable placement.
Directional Bores
Directional boring is accomplished by using a steerable drill stem. The depth and direction
of the boring can be controlled by the equipment operator. Substantially long bore lengths
can be accomplished by using directional boring devices.
Subsurface crossings are generally accomplished by digging a trench on each side of the
crossing to allow guiding and retrieval of the drill stem. The construction equipment
manufacturer specifies detailed equipment operation and excavation procedures.
• Generally, a bore MUST be kept as straight as possible.
• The hole may be enlarged using reamers. The reamer oversizing can be at least
1.5x–2x larger in diameter than the conduit being installed.
• A larger “outer” conduit SHOULD be installed at strategic locations (e.g., street
crossings) for use as a sleeve for smaller conduit.
After the bore is complete, attach the conduit to the drill stem with the appropriate grip and
swivel. Pull the drill stem/back reamer and conduit through the bore.
248
Enterprise Standard
• Longer pulls will require tension monitoring.

• The back-reamer size will be determined by the size and number of conduits being
pulled.
Note: Careful attention MUST be paid to not exceed the maximum pulling force or the
minimum bend radius.
Directional Bore Example
Figure 12-53: Directional Bore
12.10.2.1 Drilling Fluid

Use the correct drilling fluid. The quantity MUST be calculated and mixed for the type of
soil prior to drilling. An incorrect mix could result in high friction and fluid loss in the soil.
Long pulls require a correct mix and quantity to reduce friction on the pipe.
There is no universal soil; therefore, there is no universal drilling fluid. Drilling fluid
provides soil stabilization, lubrication and means to carry away the cuttings and suspend
cutting when fluid is not in circulation. To achieve this requires the proper blend of material
for the type of soil(s) being drilled through.
Note: Source Cited ‘Horizontal Directional Drilling—Good Practices and Guidelines’
published by HDD Consortium/NASTT.
The factors that make a successful bore are too interrelated to be able to point a finger at
any one of them as being the cause of a problem. These factors are best placed in the
form of a square. The drilling square is a simple and useful tool to remembering the four
factors affecting fluid flow. Fluid flow is the key to successful horizontal directional drilling.
249
Enterprise Standard
Figure 12-54: Drilling Square
Note: Source Cited: ‘The Drilling Square’ published by Baroid.
12.10.2.2 Soil Classification

Soil is classified in two general conditions: coarse soils and fine soils.
12.10.2.2.1 Coarse Grain Soils

Coarse grain soils are classified by material weight, not material size. Examples are Sand,
Gravel and Rock.
Coarse soils create ground conditions with high porosity and permeability. They are non-
reactive, do not swell, and do not get sticky. Assemblages of larger-sized particles such
as sands and gravels do not exhibit plasticity. Water has less effect on these materials.
These soils are called “cohesionless” or “granular.” Normally, cohesionless soils have
high shear resistances. When a mass of cohesionless soil is sheared, individual grains
either roll, slide, fracture, or distort along the surface of sliding. Likewise, many cohesive
soils contain grains of sand, so they can exhibit significant shear resistance. These
materials make excellent embedment in wet or dry conditions.
12.10.2.2.2 Fine Grain Soils (Clay and Silt)

Fine soils are reactive and can change with moisture content. Very small (colloidal) size
soil particles are capable of absorbing large quantities of water, as much as 10 times their
own weight. These particles attract each other to produce a mass which sticks together.
This property is called cohesion or plasticity. Soils containing such particles are referred
to as “cohesive” and include clayey soils. Cohesion gives clayey soils resistance to shear.
The strength of clayey soils is dependent on the amount of water within the soil. As the
content of water increases, the shear resistance decreases.
Silts possess little to no cohesion, they are composed of very fine grains, which makes
them behave somewhat like clay in that they can contain a high percentage of water. Silt
and clays may be found together. When working in these soils they behave similarly.
250
Enterprise Standard
12.10.2.3 Bits / Reamers

There are many options on bits and reamers.
• Wider blades can be used for better steering in soft ground.
• Hard ground stepped or tapered carbide bits may be better.
o Bits are designed with replaceable carbide inserts for rock or hard soil.
o Bits can be matched to the soil type.
12.10.2.4 Pilot Boring

Mechanical +drilling assembly (missile) creates a two to four-inch pilot hole.
With wet systems, drilling fluid is pumped through the drill string to the drill head for
lubrication, cooling, cleaning and stabilizing the hole. Bentonite or polymer is usually used
as a mixing compound for drilling fluid. With dry systems, air may be injected through the
drill string to the drill head to substitute drilling fluid.
The drill head is rotated by either a rotating drill string or down-hole drill motor.
Guidance of the drill head is achieved by rotating the drill head to the desired direction,
then applying pressure with the drill string. Excessive torque by the drill string may cause
upheaving on the ground surface.
A beaconing device located at the drill head is tracked from above ground by a tracking
instrument. Direction modifications are implemented, as necessary, at the desired target
location.
12.10.2.5 Reaming and Pullback

Once the pilot hole is completed, attach the reaming device to the reaming assembly.
Place a swivel between the reamer and the conduit or to prevent rotation and damage.
At the exit point, observe the condition of the bit to see if any changes need to be made
to the fluid or reamer selection. For example, if a bit is balled up with clay, a wetting agent
probably needs to be added to the fluid to prevent stickiness. A reamer that will chop up
the clay to prevent large pieces from bridging off behind the reamer may be needed. If
any unexpected rocks are encountered, it may be necessary to use a fluted or spiral
reamer to press them into the side of the borehole.
Next, pull back the reamer assembly to the entry location using the drill string. The reamer
may also be fluid or air assisted during the pullback for the same reasons as mentioned
during the pilot hole boring.
251
Enterprise Standard
Street Cut
Trenches for the conduit are created in the street or roadbed using variations of two cutting
techniques.
Concrete Saw Method

The first method uses a concrete saw to cut the street surface neat and rectilinear. Parallel
cuts allow breaking up and removing of the material. When the surface material is
removed use a trencher or backhoe to dig a trench. This method is usually applicable to
small jobs and street crossings.
Figure 12-55: Concrete Saw
12.11.1.1 Trench Restoration

Trench restoration begins by returning and compacting sand or some of the spoils. There
are no rocks under all sweeps to vertical before placing the conduit.
• Compact the soil under all bends to vertical. This provides support for the duct in
these locations and prevents damage or kinking during restoration.
• Use sand or soil with no rocks in this area.
12.11.1.2 Backfill Trench

After the conduit is placed, backfill the trench in a manner that will provide proper
compaction.
• Return the spoils in layers. Cover the conduit with sand or rock free soil.
• Do not return backfill containing rocks larger than 1" to areas around the conduit.
Note: If the backfill is not properly fined and compacted the material in the trench will
continue to settle for several weeks or months.
12.11.1.3 Asphalt Cap

The asphalt cap should be a minimum of 2" thick.
• The asphalt cap should be smooth and at the same height as the mating surfaces.
o Bumps and dips in the road due to incorrect backfill compaction or poor asphalt
cap workmanship are not acceptable.
252
Enterprise Standard
o Replace incorrect or defective asphalt caps. If correction is required, follow state,

city or local specifications.
Rock Saw Method

The second method uses a rock saw. Comcast personnel will not normally attempt a
rock saw operation. This operation requires a significant amount of specialized
equipment and personnel
Figure 12-56: Rock Saw
When cutting the street with a rock saw,

• Offset the rock saw so the cut is up close to the curb.
• Avoid chipping the edge of the concrete curb.
• Raise the saw at existing utility crossings to just cut the asphalt 2' before and after
the marked locations. Carefully hand dig these areas.
• Rock saw debris MUST be removed as the rock saw is cutting.
Note: In some cases, water may be required to help control dust (control the amount of
mud traffic may be exposed to).
12.11.2.1 Trench Preparation

The trench bottom preparation is important for two reasons:
• First, for cable re-pull-capability with conduit, PVC or HDPE.
o The trench bottom MUST be as straight and level as possible.
o Provide gradual transitions between bores and utility crossings of differing
heights. This eliminates deflections or dents in the conduit that increase cable
pulling tension.
• Second, loose dirt MUST be removed from the bottom of the trench.
o Backfill with a concrete slurry.
o Proper compaction of native soil is not possible in a narrow trench. The removal
of the loose dirt prevents settling or undesired movement of the "ridge beam"
created by the concrete slurry backfill.
253
Enterprise Standard
Follow trenching guidelines presented in section 12.8

• At riser sweeps and bends provide at least the minimum bend radius of 36"
• All asphalt floaters, remnant patches of asphaltic concrete, MUST be removed and
disposed of as per local code.
12.11.2.2 Backfill Specification

Backfill the trench with a concrete slurry with low ultimate strength or MUST meet local
code.
• Vibrate all slurry to eliminate voids, air pockets and future settling.
• The sand cement slurry ought to have a slump of four to five inches. (The slump is
determined by filling a test cone and measuring the hardened level. The hardened
level is below the original height. This difference in inches is the slump).
• Allow the concrete to cure for a minimum of 48 hours before installing the asphalt
cap.
12.11.2.3 Asphalt Cap

The asphalt cap MUST be a minimum 2" thick.
• Always use tack oil on both sides of the asphalt or asphalt and concrete curb to
better seal the mating surfaces.
• Always roll the asphalt on one side, the second side and then down the middle.
This makes for a smoother surface and better compaction. (Roll at 180 degrees).
• The asphalt cap MUST be smooth and at the same height as the mating surfaces.
o Bumps and dips in the road due to incorrect backfill compaction or poor asphalt
cap workmanship are not acceptable.
o Replace incorrect or defective asphalt caps. If correction is required, follow state,
city or local specifications.
Street Cut Options

Each method requires attention to detail as each trench will pose unique issues. All work
MUST be completed as specified for conduit depth, trench preparation, conduit placement,
backfill, and covered following Comcast and local governing authorities’ requirements.
Additional detail about the street cut process can be found on-line or in vendor documents.
254
Enterprise Standard
Pulling Tension and Control

A successful pull hinges on the preparatory steps taken before the conduit is pulled into a
trench, bore, plow or to place cable or innerduct into a conduit. Careful planning and an
understanding of the factors that can inhibit a successful pull. Each pull is considered
unique. These factors may include temperature, moisture, route geometry, conduit size,
and proposed number of ducts and cables that will be pulled. The most important variable
to consider is the maximum pulling tension of the innerduct or cable.
Pulling Cable or Innerduct into Conduit

To determine how far cable may be pulled without exceeding the maximum pulling tension,
the following factors MUST be considered:
• The route geometry, which consists of:
o The number of bends
o The angle and direction of the bends
o The location of the bends
o The distance between the bends
• The fill percentage of the cable(s) or innerduct in the conduit
• The number of cables or innerducts being pulled in the conduit
• The configuration of the cable or innerduct being pulled in the conduit
• The friction between the cable or innerduct and the conduit
• The back tension created at the setup
These variables may be used to help calculate an ESTIMATED pulling tension. It is
important that proper construction techniques and a breakaway swivel rated for the
maximum pulling tension of the cable or innerduct is used. The breakaway swivel will
ensure that the maximum pulling tension is not exceeded. The use of a breakaway swivel
will also help minimize the effects of twisting force. Twisting forces are created by the pull
rope (or tape) and by the cable or innerduct.
12.12.1.1 Route Geometry

Route geometry is an important contributor to pulling tension. The lowest pulling tensions
are found in straight sections of conduit.
• Low sidewall pressure (LSWP) occurs in horizontal straight sections of conduit.
SWP is caused by the weight and friction of the cable or innerduct against the
conduit, with a minimal amount of force being applied to the cable’s jacket or the
innerduct.
255
Enterprise Standard
• High sidewall pressure (HSWP) is the amount of force applied to the cable jacket
or innerduct as it passes through bends in the conduit. The tighter the bend the
higher the SWP which increases exponentially. The effects of HSWP can include
rope burn through in the bend of the conduit damage to the cable or innerduct.
• Pulling Lubricant will help in reducing pulling tensions and rope burn-through by
greatly reducing friction.
Bends along the conduit path cause sidewall pressure on the articles being pulled through
the conduit. The longer or shallower the bend, the lower the sidewall pressure.
Figure 12-57: Route Geometry
Conduit MUST be placed as flat and level as possible to maintain low pulling tensions.
When the conduit is installed on an incline, typically due to terrain features, pulling
tensions may be reduced by pulling the cable downhill, working with gravity rather than
against it.
Coaxial Cable Tension

Coaxial cables are pulled into place by applying force to the end of the cable.
Excessive forces applied to the cables will cause the cables to permanently elongate.
Deformations of the outer conductor geometry causes an impedance change in
coaxial cable. Connector installation will be difficult and is not recommended.
Pulling tension for all cable types are specified in the vendor data sheets.
As an example, maximum pulling tension for CommScope cable types are shown in Table
12-9: Cable Maximum Pulling Tensions.
256
Enterprise Standard
Table 12-9: Cable Maximum Pulling Tensions
Cable Maximum Pulling Tension

QR 320 120 lbs. 54.5 kgf
QR 540 220 lbs. 100. kgf
QR 715 340 lbs. 154. kgf
QR 860 450 lbs. 204. kgf
P3 500 300 lbs. 136. kgf
P3 625 475 lbs. 216. kgf
P3 750 675 lbs. 306. kgf
P3 875 875 lbs. 397. kgf
MO500 270 lbs. 123 kgf
MO650 360 lbs. 164 kgf
MO750 500 lbs. 237 kgf
Note: lbs. = pounds, kgf = kilogram force

Note: Good construction techniques and proper tension monitoring equipment are
essential.
NEVER EXCEED THE MAXIMUM PULLING TENSION.

Excessive forces applied to the cable will cause the cable to permanently elongate. Good
construction techniques and proper tension monitoring equipment are essential.
Exceeding maximum pulling tension of cables can damage the electrical or optical
performance.
Flexible Conduit Tension

Conduits are pulled into place by applying force to the end of the conduit being pulled
from the reel and during installation. Excessive forces applied to the conduit will cause
the conduit to permanently elongate, drawing down the size. Connector installation
will be difficult and is not recommended.
Pulling tension for conduits are specified in the vendor data sheets.
Good construction techniques and proper tension monitoring equipment are essential.
NEVER EXCEED THE MAXIMUM PULLING TENSION.
257
Enterprise Standard
Exceeding maximum pulling tension can result in the conduit drawing down in size, while
it may recover after a period of resting, the mechanical properties of the conduit are
permanently degraded which may reduce the life expectancy of the conduit.
Break-away Swivels
Break away swivels MUST be placed on pulled cables to ensure that the maximum
allowable tension for that specific cable type is not exceeded. The swivel is placed
between the pull line and the pulling grip. A break-away swivel is required for each
cable when pulling multiple cables.
A break-away swivel is required for each pulled cable. Size the break-away swivel based
on the specified maximum pulling tension of the cable. Do not exceed or cable
damage will occur.
Figure 12-58: Break-away Swivel
Dynamometers
Dynamometers are used to measure the dynamic tension in the cable. These devices
allow continuous review of the tension and accordingly a realization can be made of any
sudden increase in pulling tension.
Tail Loading
Tail loading is the tension in the cable caused by the mass of the cable on the reel
and reel brakes. Tail loading is controlled by two methods.
• It can be minimized by using minimal braking during the pay-off of the cable
from the reel. At times no braking is preferred.
• Tail loading can also be minimized by rotating the reel in the direction of pay-
off.
258
Enterprise Standard
Bending Radius
Cables and innerducts are often routed around corners. Routing around a corner, pulling
tension MUST be increased to apply adequate force for the cable or innerduct to follow
the bend. Tension is directly related to the size of the cable or innerduct which correlates
to the flexibility of the pulled object.
12.12.7.1 Static Bending Radius

The static bending radius of coaxial cable is the minimum bending radius that a cable
can be formed without electrical or mechanical degradation of the cable. The cable is
not normally under as much tension or load as when being pulled through a conduit
or duct. Static bending of the cable in this manner is usually only done during splicing
or final forming of the cable.
12.12.7.2 Dynamic Bending Radius

The radius of the bend in the cable as it is being pulled is the dynamic bending radius.
In this state the cable is under tension or loaded.
Always review the specifications for the appropriate bend radius. If the minimum bend
radius or the maximum pulling tension is not exceeded, a successful installation will result.
• The bending radius of cables during the construction process are controlled by the
radius of the bends in duct or conduit as well as construction techniques and
equipment.
• Conduit bends, cable sheaves, plow chutes and cable shoes MUST have large
radius bends and low friction surfaces that minimally contribute to the increase in
pulling tension that is required to pull the cable through this equipment.
As an example, Table 12-10 shows the minimum bending radius of CommScope cables.
Consult the vendor specifications to determine the minimum bend radius of the cable
being installed.
259
Enterprise Standard
Table 12-10: Minimum Bending Radius (Radii)
Minimum Bend Radius
Capstan Winch
When it is desirable to avoid cutting or splicing a cable, a mid-assist pull location may
be required for extremely long pulling distances. The Capstan Winch can be used to
support this effort, by pulling to a designated point along the route, and by feeding
slack cable back into the remainder of the conduit run, completing the pull.
• Multiple Capstan Winches can be deployed.
• Proper setup and communications between work locations is key to a safe and
successful installation.
• Portable two-way radios may be used which have the necessary range for the
job in progress.
Cell-phones may be used as the communication devices.
Note: If the pulling force required for the placement is to exceed the conduit pull line
strength, replace the pull line with one that has adequate rating.
260
Enterprise Standard
Figure 12-59: Capstan Winch
Similar in capability to the Capstan Winch, electrically operated cable pullers are often
used inside buildings when HDPE or cable reels cannot be set up. Whenever
possible, it is desirable to feed duct from a reel that has been placed inside of a
building, pulling to the outside.
Installing Cable in a Conduit or Duct

Conduits are generally placed by the described construction methods or they may be
existing. Conduits are used to facilitate the installation of the cable.
• Conduits may have innerducts for cable management purposes.
• A cable route survey will dictate the cable placement.
• The survey MUST account for the difficulty of the pull, manpower and equipment
availability.
• Intermediate assist capstans may be necessary depending on the pulling tension
that develops in any length of cable.
Subsurface Installation of Coaxial Cable into Existing Conduits

Ducts (or multiple ducts) are often pulled into existing conduit systems as innerduct.
Note: ALWAYS test and ventilate manholes prior to entering them and follow OSHA
confined space requirements.
Conduit Proofing
An important step that MUST be taken prior to this type of installation is “proofing” the
existing conduit to ensure that all obstructions are cleared, and that conduit continuity and
alignment is good. It is recommended that a rigid mandrel roughly 90% of the inner
diameter of the conduit be used to perform the proof. Proofing conduit is typically
performed by pushing a fiberglass fish with a rigid mandrel attached to the end of it through
the conduit. Problem areas ought to be felt by the person pushing the fiberglass fish and
can be marked on the fish so that the distance to the problem is recorded making it easier
261
Enterprise Standard
to locate the problem. If the fiberglass fish makes it through the conduit without any
difficulties experienced, then the conduit has “proofed out,” and no repairs are necessary.
Before placement of the innerduct inside the conduit can be started, it is important to have
all the necessary equipment to protect the innerduct. The use of sheaves, bending shoes,
rolling blocks (45 and 90 degrees) and straight pulleys are required for protection of the
innerduct during installation. It is important that they all meet the proper radius for the
innerduct size. The use of a pulling lubricant will greatly reduce the tension and stress on
the innerduct when pulling innerduct into an existing conduit.
Mid-Assists
On long routes and routes with many turns it is important to consider the selection of mid-
assist locations. There are different ways of providing mid-assist for innerduct pulls.
Typically, the use of a winch is required such as a capstan or vehicle drum winch.
The introduction of mid-assist capstan winches has made innerduct pulling an easier task,
requiring less manpower and communication than traditional drum winching involves.
Using mid-assist capstan winches leads greater production capabilities.
After Pulling
The stress of pulling innerduct through existing conduit will vary with the length of the
route, number of turns or bends and the condition of the conduit the innerduct is being
pulled into. Stress and friction can be reduced depending upon the amount of lubrication
used.
• The effects of the stress will cause the innerduct to elongate (or stretch) in
proportion to the amount of stress but MUST be less than 2% of the total length
placed.
• Due to this effect, it is important to pull past the conduit system slightly to
compensate for recovery to the original length.
• Allow at least one hour for the innerduct to “relax” before cutting and trimming it.
Existing Conduit / Duct

Existing duct systems may require maintenance prior to placing cables into the duct.
• A rodding machine may be used to remove unwanted debris and water from the
duct.
• A pull line can be blown through the duct and attached to a winch line that is pulled
back through the duct. The winch line will pull the cable into place.
• Tension monitoring and break-away swivels are recommended.
• Duct lubricant MUST be used on all cable pulls.
262
Enterprise Standard
• Pay-off of the cable into the duct system MUST be positioned to prevent any
unnecessary bending of the cable.
Multiple Cables
It is preferred for each cable to have its own conduit, though often multiple cables MUST
be placed in a single conduit. Installing multiple cables or installing a single cable in a
conduit with existing cables requires special planning.
Note: Recommended practices suggest that multiple cables are pulled together.
Installing Cable Grips

The end of the cable or innerduct that is pushed into the grips MUST be prepared prior to
the placing of the grip.
• For cable this MUST be done to prevent the separating of the jacket from the
internal cable components.
• For innerduct prepare the grip or grips to subject each conduit with the identical
pulling pressure.
Follow vendor recommended practices for connect cable or innerduct.
Fill Percentage
The fill percentage, sometimes referred to as fill ratio, is the amount of space that cable(s)
or innerduct occupy inside the conduit as a percentage of the inner diameter of the conduit.
The greater the fill percentage the higher the sidewall pressure will be. This is critical
when constructing the conduit run. Bends MUST be made more gradual when fill
percentages are high.
• Cable-In-Conduit products are typically designed not to exceed 30% fill.
• Recommended practices suggest that fill percentages ought to be at or below 60%.
The fill percentage MUST be considered to ensure that there will be room enough for all
of the cables or innerducts allowing these to navigate the bends or sweeps.
Another important consideration is the configuration of the cable in the conduit. There are
two defined configurations for multiple cables, triangular or cradled.
263
Enterprise Standard
12.14.7.1 Triangular Configuration

Considered triangular when the conductors maintain a triangular pattern in the conduit.
Figure 12-60: Conduit Triangular Configuration
12.14.7.2 Cradled Configuration

Cable has a random lay in the duct and is preferred.
The cradle configuration will permit for higher fill percentages and lower pulling tensions.
Figure 12-61: Conduit Cradled Fill Configuration
Pulling Multiple Cables

A pulling harness MUST be used when multiple cables are pulled in together. A swivel
MUST be used to connect the pull rope to the harness and each cable MUST be
connected to the harness with its own breakaway swivel. Use the lowest maximum pulling
tension value of the cables being installed when calculating for a multiple cable installation.
Slings or harnesses are designed to attach multiple cables or innerducts to a single pull
line. They can be built for any number and size of cable/inner duct.
264
Enterprise Standard
Figure 12-62: Sling or Harness
Back Tension
Back tension is the amount of force needed to pull cable directly from the reel. Since the
amount of cable on the reel, the weight of the reel and the friction of the reel on its setup
through bar will vary, it is difficult to provide a rule of thumb for back tension. Attaching a
spring scale or dynamometer to the cable and then pulling the cable with the measuring
device can determine back tension.
The best method for reducing back tension is to have a reel tender (worker) to assist the
reel with spinning and pay-off.
Note: Do not pull cable from the reel by hand.
Reel Braking
If required, use an arbor brake with very light pressure – just enough to prevent the reel
from over spinning.
Do not use hands to stop a spinning reel – serious injury could result.
265
Enterprise Standard
13. Hardline Coaxial Splicing

Summary
This section is an overview of hardline coaxial cable splicing. The Comcast access
network relies on proper splicing practices of hardline coaxial cable to ensure that the
network will have a long and productive life. Quality workmanship in splicing aluminum
cable is extremely important. Splicers are required to have a full understanding of the
construction procedures presented in Sections 10, 11 and 12 which establish cable and
equipment placement guidelines.
Splicing processes and procedures MUST be followed to reduce any potential impact on
the environment (waste materials) and other communication companies or utilities that
may chute the trench or easement (clearances). These Comcast guidelines MUST be
followed in conjunction with municipal, local, state, and federal codes, including power and
telephone company requirements.
Within this section splicing descriptions will be separated into two major categories, aerial
and underground.
Comcast Specifications Section 13 Summary

• All equipment used in the Comcast network MUST be approved for the application
and have CIFA numbers.
• Splices, connectors, and adaptors will meet SCTE interface specifications.
• Splices, connectors, and adapters MUST NOT deteriorate the coaxial cable
operational bandwidth as specified by the network design bandwidth.
• Use a pin-type connector with integral radiation sleeve.
• Use a splice with integral radiation sleeves.
• Only use approved pin connectors and splices.
• DO NOT use feed-thru connectors.
• Use only rotational housing-to-housing connectors.
• Do not use extension connectors in a new build or rebuild where the cable is
replaced. If extension connectors are required, use only premade extension
connectors with a continuous center pin.
• DO NOT use crimp-on extension adapters.
• DO NOT use flexible cable or drop cable as jumpers in the trunk or distribution
network.
• Aerial placement of straps, spacers, lashing wire clamps, and lashing wire does not
have to be exact, but MUST be close to the specifications found in sections 10 and
11.
• If the input port of an active or passive device, including splices, is on a slack span,
place it to the output side of the pole.
266
Enterprise Standard
• Do not use metal or an unapproved device to clean the center conductor.

• Connector and splice components MUST be torqued to manufacturers’
specifications.
• Environmentally secure and protect the hardline connectors. All connectors shall
have heat shrink, air shrink, or self-adhesive tape applied.
o Use heat shrink tubing where applicable and allowed.
o Use air-shrink tube where applicable.
o Use a self-adhesive tape where shrink tube will not work.
o Shrink tube will be the correct size for the cable.
o Shrink tube shall cover the whole splice connector including the 5/8” port on the
housing or adapter
• Non-jacketed cable shrink tube MUST cover 2-inches past the end of the
connector.
• Jacketed cable shrink tube MUST cover the connector and a 4-inch overlap
over the outer jacket.
• Underground straight splices shrink tube shall have an 8-inch overlap over the
outer jacket.
• When connectorization is complete, all connections MUST meet Cumulative
Leakage Index (CLI) requirements.
• All excess material MUST be cleaned up and removed from the work location and
disposed of according to Comcast disposal policies.
Hardline Coaxial Splicing Safety

Construction of a Comcast network requires a substantial amount of manpower, tools and
equipment. Underground and aerial construction will expose the manpower, tools and
equipment to hazards, dependent on field conditions and circumstances.
Knowledge of applicable safety requirements,
• Determine that the plant is adequately bonded and grounded, no voltage on the
strand or cable sheath.
• Use the correct protective gear including gloves and safety glasses.
• Use of knives, cutters and other sharp objects.
• Use of coring and stripping tools, manual or drill assist.
• Use of blowtorch or other heating device
• Use of chemicals
• Trash and waste clean-up
267
Enterprise Standard
Hardline Coaxial Splicing Customer Impact

Hardline coaxial splicing craftsmanship is an integral construction component. Customers
will be impacted by poor craftsmanship immediately or during the lifespan of the plant.
Intermittent connectivity, ingress, egress and impedance mismatches are results of
incorrectly installed, or improperly tightened connectors. Other conditions that can
degrade the performance of the Comcast network are:
• Bending boards not used or not used as specified on expansion loops. If the loop
is hand-formed, kinks can occur in cable due to insufficient bending radius. The
defect may not be evident immediately. Defects in the aluminum sheath will
degrade or fail over time due to vibration and temperature cycling.
• Scored and/or improperly cleaned cable center conductors can impact RF
transmission.
• Active and passive devices that use seizure screws MUST be tightened or torqued
to the manufacturer’s specifications. Active or passive equipment seizure screws
that are:
o Not tightened enough may cause inadequate surface contact with the center
conductor. There is a potential for intermittent connectivity for both RF and
power. Inadequate surface contact can lead to Common Path Distortion (CPD)
due to moisture and other contaminants that can build up at the seizure and
center conductor junction. It may also appear as an open to frequencies lower
in the spectrum.
o Over tightened may cause the center conductor to be crushed or bent under the
seizure potentially causing a short or the seizure mechanism may break.
Poor craftsmanship is unacceptable. Bad splicing practices will result in a poor customer
experience immediately and/or over the lifespan of the network.
Equipment Used During Splicing

To splice the Comcast network several products MUST be available:
• A network that is ready to splice.
• Correct connectors for the cable and equipment to be spliced.
• Correct hand tools for splicing.
• Appropriate environmental protection for the splices and connectors to ensure
longevity of the plant.
Hardline Splice Preparation Tools

Tools have been designed and selected to prepare the cable for splicing and
connectorization. Do not use unapproved tools on the Comcast network. When splicing
use the correct tool for the cable size and type. The following illustrations are examples
of the tools used for splicing.
268
Enterprise Standard
Table 13-1: Tools Used for Hardline Splicing
Cable Cutters
Designed to cut the cable with a minimum distortion in
the circumference of the cable. Follow manufacturer
use recommendations.
Note: Do not use to cut steel cable
Side Cutters
Do not use to cut cable. Used for trimming of the
center conductor and connector pin during the
installation. Follow the manufacturer use
recommendations.
Diagonal Cutters
Do not use to cut cable. Used for trimming of the
center conductor and connector pin during the
installation. Follow the manufacturer use
recommendations.
Armor Removal Tool
Removes the jacket encompassing the armor on the
cable. The armor is an additional protective layer
beyond the coaxial shield.
Select the correct tool for the cable size.
Messenger Removal Tool

Used with Integrated Messenger hardline cable to slit
the webbing and remove the messenger.
269
Enterprise Standard
Jacket Stripping Tools

Removes the jacket from the cable.
Coring and Stripping Tool
Cores the dielectric and strips the aluminum shield to
a specific depth.
Select the appropriate tool for the cable size.
Ratchet Handles for Coring Tools

When manually coring and stripping a ratchet handle
can be used.
Center Conductor Cleaner

Removes bonded dielectric and burrs that can
damage a connector’s seizing mechanism.
Utility Knife
Used for plant maintenance to remove the protective
covering on connectors and splices.
Use a double hook blade.
Wrenches
Adjustable or fixed wrenches can be used during
splicing. Size the wrench to the connector that is
being installed. Maximum length of wrench should be
limited to 10”.
270
Enterprise Standard
Screwdrivers and Nut Drivers

Select the correct tool for the equipment being
installed.
Safety Glasses
MUST be worn during cable preparation or when
there is a potential for eye injury.
Electric Drills
Can be used to assist with coring stripping.
Can be battery operated.
Hacksaw (Optional)
Used for cutting the cable when a cable cutter is not
practical or capable. Do not impact the concentricity
of the center conductor to inner shield distance.
Flooding Compound Removal

Used to safely remove the flooding compound from
the outer shield prior to connectorization. Ought to be
citrus based, not petroleum based.
Note: All tools are shown as examples only. The illustration is not a manufacturer
recommendation. All tools MUST have an approved CIFA number. New tools MUST
have Corporate CONNECT Engineering approval and an associated CIFA number.
Hardline Connectors, Splices, and Adapters

Hardline connectors, splices and adaptors will meet the following performance criteria:
• Operational Bandwidth, new build or replacement, 1.2 GHz
• Impedance, 75 Ohms
• Minimized attenuation / insertion loss, ≤0.15 dB.
• Return loss, ≥30 dB through the operational bandwidth, 1.2 GHz
• Shielding Effectiveness, > 140 dB
271
Enterprise Standard
• Operating Voltage, 90 VAC continuous at 60 Hz

• Operating Current, 20 Amps continuous at 60 Hz
• Operating Temperature -40⁰ to +140⁰ F
• Connector pull strength MUST exceed applicable industry standards and will vary
by the cable size.
Splices and connectors MUST NOT deteriorate the coaxial cable operational bandwidth
as specified by the network design bandwidth. Splices MUST support 1.5 times the
operational bandwidth of the network.
The following are illustrations of the connectors and adaptors that may be encountered in
the splicing process. There are additional configurations that are dependent upon the type
of cable used.
Table 13-2: Hardline Connectors, Splices and Adaptors
Hardline Connectors
Two-piece Pin Connector
Three-piece Pin Connector
Hardline Splices
Two-piece Splice
Three-piece Splice
272
Enterprise Standard
Adaptors
90-degree Adaptor Pin-type Connector
180-degree Adaptor Pin-type Connector
Housing-to-Housing Adapter
Extension Adapter
Provides an extension between different
types of equipment, such as housing ports
and cable connectors. Available in several
lengths.
DO NOT use extension adaptors with
crimped on center conductor.
Splice Block – Horizontal

Used with pin connectors.
Can be used to transition between cable
sizes.
Splice Block – Vertical

For vaults or pedestals. Used with pin
connectors.
Female Splice Coupler

Used with pin connectors. Has a pin seizing
mechanism.
Can be used to transition between cable
sizes.
273
Enterprise Standard
Hardline Terminators
75 Ohm Pin-Type Housing Terminator
75 Ohm Hardline Terminator
Hardline Cables
Hardline cables are so named due to the density and non-flexibility of the outer conductor
as compared to a drop cable. As such, preparation of the cable for connectivity is
significantly different than preparing a drop cable. Hardline cable is used to distribute
radio frequency (RF) and power as is applicable based on the system requirements. Key
characteristics of the hardline cable are:
• A concentric inner and outer conductor.
• Inner conductor is a copper clad aluminum configuration.
• The outer conductor is aluminum.
• The dielectric between the inner and outer conductor can be gas injected foam
(most common) or air with a disc spacer (legacy plant).
Figure 13-1: Hardline Coax Key Characteristics
• Characteristic impedance is 75 ohms. The hardline cable MUST adhere to the

dimensions required by the cable size to maintain the characteristic impedance. As
such the type of dielectric used will impact the distance from the outside of the
center conductor to the inside of the aluminum outer conductor (shield).
• Velocity of propagation shall be nominal 87 percent for gas injected foam dielectric
and 93 percent for air and disc dielectrics.
• Structural Return Loss (SRL) shall be 30 dB minimum, 5 MHz to 1.2 GHz.
274
Enterprise Standard
Splice Environmental Protection – Shrink Tubing

Shrink tube is used to environmentally protect or seal splices between coaxial cables or
coaxial cable to passive and active equipment 5/8” ports. Approved shrink tubing is
available as two different types; heat shrink and air shrink. When installed, they will appear
similar from the outside. The key performance characteristics are very different.
Choosing between the two may be difficult as each will provide the required sealing and
protection. Follow the Divisional, Regional or local direction provided as to which type of
shrink tubing to use.
• All hardline connectors deployed in Comcast plant MUST have heat or air shrink
applied according to Comcast best practices.
• Shrink Tube will be sized for the cable and connectors.
• Shrink tube for non-jacketed cable connector MUST extend from the housing port
to 2-inches past the end of the connector.
• Shrink tube for non-jacketed cable splice MUST extend 2-inches past the end of
the splice connectors.
• Shrink tube for jacketed cable connector MUST extend from the housing port and
provide a 4-inch minimum overlap of the outer jacket.
• Shrink tube for a jacketed cable splice MUST provide a 4-inch minimum overlap of
the outer jacket.
• Shrink tube for underground straight splices MUST provide an 8-inch minimum
overlap of the outer jacket.
• Tube shrink temperature applied is ≈ 250⁰ F
• Shrink tube MUST be capable of performing in all expected environmental
conditions. -67⁰ F to 150⁰ F
• MUST provide a water-tight seal over the connector or splice.
• UV and Ozone resistant.
• Heat shrink tube shrink ratio 3:1
• Heat shrink MUST have markings using thermos-chromatic paint that changes or
disappears with the correct shrink temperature applied.
• Easy installation and re-entry.
275
Enterprise Standard
13.4.4.1 Heat Shrink Tube Application
Shrinking the tube is defined as recovery. The

shrink tube has been temporarily expanded
and when heat is applied will shrink or recover
returning to the manufactured radius. When
the heat shrink is recovered it will encapsulate
the connector or splice.
Heat shrink tubing shrinks / recovers inward
Figure 13-2: Heat Shrink Recovery
and radially around the cable and connectors.
During the recovery the shrink tube will lose some length. Determine the potential lateral
shrinkage from the manufacturer’s specification. Take this potential shrinkage into
account when cutting the length of the tubing.
Figure 13-3: Shrink Expanded vs Recovered
The following is a guideline for selecting and applying the heat shrink boot. Select the
correct size tubing for the application.
Table 13-3: Shrink Tube Parameters
EXPANDED RECOVERED
Internal Internal Application Range Tube
Tube Order Wall Thickness for General Use Lengths
Diameter Diameter
Number (Nom) W
(Min) D (Max) d
Values in Inches
400 0.40 0.15 0.08 0.18 - 0.34 48
750 0.75 0.22 0.08 0.24 - 0.65 48
1100 1.10 0.40 0.08 0.45 - 1.00 48
1300 1.30 0.40 0.08 0.45 - 1.20 48
1500 1.50 0.50 0.08 0.55 - 1.40 48
1700 1.70 0.50 0.08 0.55 - 1.60 48
2050 2.05 0.75 0.08 0.82 - 1.80 48
2750 2.75 1.00 0.08 1.20 - 2.50 48
Note: Data from Canusa specification sheet for CFTV (Used as an example)
276
Enterprise Standard
• Place the tubing over the prepared cable prior to connectorization.

• Properly install the heat-shrink tubing at each location after finishing the connector
installation. Verify that it fits at the 5/8” port and over the splice.
o Blow torches may be used at the discretion of the Division, Region and Local
Engineering. If allowed, use only the largest blow torch type tip to shrink the
tubing.
• DO NOT USE A PENCIL TIP or a NARROW
FLAME. These may unevenly heat the shrink
tube causing it to not properly shrink around the
connector or splice. Use may overheat the shrink
tube and cable causing the shrink tube to split or
the cable dielectric to melt changing the
characteristic impedance of the cable.
• Keep the flame moving! Do not hold the flame at
a specific point on the tube for too long. The heat
MUST be applied evenly around the tube to
enable a consistent shrink rate.
Heat Shrink Illustration from Canusa Specification
Note: Safety Instructions Warning: To avoid risk of accidental fire or explosion when
using gas torches, always follow the torch manufacturer’s safety instructions. To minimize
possible effect of fumes produced during the shrinking process, always provide good
ventilation in confined workspaces.
o Handheld electric heaters may be used in place of a blow torch. These may take
longer to shrink the tubing. Just as much care MUST be exercised to not over-
heat a section of the tubing.
To determine if a tube has completely recovered, look for the following, especially on the
back and underside of the tube:
• Uniform wall thickness
• Conformance to the connector,
• No flat spots or chill marks, shows uniform heating
• Visible sealant flow out of the ends of the tube.
Active or Passive Equipment
Shrink the tube from the equipment side ensure that it covers the lip on the 5/8” port of the
equipment where the connector enters the housing or adapter body.
• Shrink the tubing right after the connector is installed. Do not leave this job for later.
• When completely recovered, the tubing MUST extend 2-inches minimum past the
connector onto the cable.
277
Enterprise Standard
Figure 13-4: Non-Jacketed Shrink Application
• When completely recovered on jacketed cable, the tubing MUST extend 4-inches
over the jacket.
Figure 13-5: Jacketed Shrink Application
Splice
Shrink the tube from the center of the splice to each end ensuring complete coverage.
• When completely recovered, the tubing MUST extend 2-inches minimum past the
ends of the connector covering the cable.
• Shrink the tubing right after the splice is installed. Do not leave this job for later.
Table 13-4: Heat Shrink Application
Heat Shrink Tube
Pre-shrink to connector
Post-shrink to connector
Heat Shrink on Passive Equipment
278
Enterprise Standard
13.4.4.2 Air Shrink Tube

Air shrink MUST be handled differently from heat shrink. Once out of the package it will
begin the recovery process. Follow the manufacturer’s recommendations when using air
shrink.
Air-shrink tubing is available for three applications:
3. Single tube for special applications such as jacket repair.
4. Two-piece tubing. An inner and outer tube are used for pin-type connectors.
5. Three-piece tubing. Two inner and one outer tube. Used for splice locations.
Prior to placing the air-shrink tube onto the cable, the cable MUST be prepared, coring
and stripping and ready for connectorization.
• Select the correct sized tubing for the application.
• Place the tubing over the prepared cable prior to connectorization.
• Properly install the air-shrink tubing at each location after finishing the connector
installation following the manufacturer recommendations.
• No blow torch is required or to be used.
• Equipment: Verify that the tube is placed against the equipment side of the
connection covering the lip on the equipment where the connector enters.
o The tubing MUST extend 2-inches minimum past the end of the connector onto
the cable.
o Air-Shrink the tubing right after the connector is installed. Due to the nature of
the air-shrink, contraction will begin when it is removed from the package and
will continue after being placed on the splice or connector.
Table 13-5: Air Shrink Tube
An inner and outer shrink tube is used for a

housing pin-type connector.
For splices a second inner tube is used.
Pre-Shrink. Air Shrink tube has been placed over

the connector and the coaxial cable and jacket.
Post Shrink. Air-shrink tube is now tight around

the connector or splice providing environmental
protection.
279
Enterprise Standard
13.4.4.3 Self-Fusing or Self-Adhesive Tape

In locations where shrink tubing cannot be used or may be ineffective, the use of a self-
fusing or self-adhesive tape can be applied. The tape MUST provide a water-tight seal.
Locations where the tape MAY be used are housing-to-housing connectors, 90- or 180-
degree connectors, extension connectors, etc.
Table 13-6: Self Adhesive Tape
SFT-150
Self-Fusing or Self-Adhesive Tape
90⁰ Adaptor
Adapter protected by self-adhesive tape.
Hardline Coaxial Cable Splicing

All splicing MUST follow the configuration that has been specified on the design map. If
a problem is found with the design, it MUST be brought to the attention of the Construction
Supervisor before splicing in the equipment. The Construction Supervisor, Design and
CONNECT Engineering MUST give their approval before making any changes to the
design.
Note: document the changes on the office construction maps and have the Construction
Supervisor initial the changes. When the design change is approved, verify the design
change is transferred to all system documentation, paper or electronic.
Connectorization and Splicing Guidelines

Connectorization and splicing is a critical component of network construction. Personnel
who are skilled splicers MUST recognize the critical nature of splicing and the effects upon
network performance. Quality craftsmanship in the preparation of hardline cable for
connectorization is extremely important for the optimum performance of the Comcast
network.
Connectors and tools are sized to meet the coaxial cable specifications. Follow all cable
and splice manufacturer recommendations for the installation of the connectors.
280
Enterprise Standard
Use the right tools. These include a coring and stripping tool, a file (for deburring), center
conductor cleaning tool, wrenches sized for the connectors (adjustable wrenches are fine)
and cable cutters. A high-torque, low-speed drill or a ratchet are optional.
As illustrated earlier there are several methods of splicing hardline coaxial cables together.
• A splice is used to join two cables of the same cable type.
• Adapters / splice blocks are used to join similar or dissimilar cable types. These
are shown in in Figure 13-6.
Splice
Splice Block with Pin Connectors
Figure 13-6: Splice and Splice Block
13.5.1.1 Coaxial Hardline Cable Preparation for Connectorization

The following are high-level guidelines for the preparation of the coaxial cable for
connectorization. Always follow cable and connector manufacturer preparation
guidelines. Each sub-section is presented in the preparation order covering the cable
types used by Comcast, cable preparation, coring and stripping, center conductor
cleaning, splice Installation, connector installation and environmental protection.
Non-Jacketed Cable
• Use rounded blade cable cutters to trim the cable to a smooth, round end.
Jacketed Cable
• Determine the vendor and type of jacketed cable used and follow vendor
instructions for jacket preparation and connector installation. Using the correct
coring tool, the jacket will be trimmed as specified.
Jacketed Flooded Cable
• Determine the vendor and type of jacketed flooded cable used and follow vendor
o Underground flooded cable may have a clear viscous flooding compound.
o Aerial flooded cable may have a black non-viscous asphaltic flooding compound.
• Remove the jacket with a jacket stripping tool. DO NOT USE A KNIFE.
• Clean off the flooding compound with an approved flooding compound remover.
281
Enterprise Standard
Armor Removal from the Cable (when applicable)

• Armor MUST be removed to prepare the cable for connectorization. Several types
of armor may be used dependent upon the manufacturer and cable type. Use
manufacturer suggested methods of removing the armor.
• Trim the cable to the required length. The armor will require a different means of
cutting the cable to length. Do NOT use a method that will create an eccentricity
on the cable.
• Remove the armor as recommended by the manufacturer. Be careful! The armor
has sharp edges and it is easy to get cut while handling it. Wear protective gear.
• Determine the vendor and type of jacketed flooded cable used and follow vendor
13.5.1.2 Coring and Stripping

Coring and stripping remove the cables aluminum outer conductor and at the same time
the dielectric is cored and the center conductor is exposed. Use an electric or manually
operated combination tool.
Determine the vendor and type of cable used and follow vendor instructions for jacket
preparation and connector installation. Using the correct coring tool, the jacket will be
trimmed as specified.
Note: It is recommended to use a coring/stripping tool that includes the optional strip stop.
The tool will core and strip the cable and cut the center conductor to the proper length.
Drill Coring enables the tool to optimize its shearing force while coring. The drill provides
additional torque for the removal of the dielectric and aluminum shield, thus speeding up
the process.
Hand Coring provides a consistent clean core operation. Most standard tools are able to
provide the proper shearing force. Dielectric may remain on the center conductor and
MUST be removed prior to connectorization.
Note: No matter the method that is used to cut the center conductor to length, the center
conductor dimension MUST always conform to the splice or connector manufacturer’s
recommended length.
Combination coring and stripping tools use heat-treated steel coring bits, which wear out.
• If the bit wears out it may flare the end of the outer conductor, potentially causing
damage to the connector and degrading signal transmission.
• Use the replacement bits supplied by the coring/stripping tool manufacturer.
282
Enterprise Standard
When using the combination coring/stripping tool to trim the aluminum outer conductor
and expose the center conductor, a thin layer of plastic or residue may remain on the
inside diameter of the outer conductor and may interfere with the integral sleeve of the
connector. Leaving a thin layer sometimes occurs with the combination coring/stripping
tool, but rarely with the coring (only) tool.
Note: Follow the coring instructions of the cable vendor, the residual bonding compound
on the inside of the outer conductor may be normal and should not be corrected. Trying
to clean the bonding compound may negatively affect the integrity of the outer conductor.
Coring tools MUST be periodically examined to make sure that they do not damage,
scrape, or deform the cable's interior or exterior surfaces. Coring tools require
maintenance to perform properly. Always clean and lubricate coring tools to prevent
damage to the outer shield or the center conductors. Replace parts that are worn.
Figure 13-7: Coring and Stripping Tool (CablePrep Illustration)
13.5.1.3 Coaxial Hardline Cable Center Conductor Preparation

Cleaning
After coring the cable, a thin layer of dielectric material will remain on the outer surface of
the exposed center conductor. The conductor is made of copper-clad aluminum and can
be very easily damaged if proper care is not taken while cleaning the conductor of any
remaining dielectric material.
• A plastic or fiber center conductor cleaning tool MUST be used to scrape the coating
off the center conductor.
• Do not use materials harder than copper, such as pocketknives, razor blades, or
sandpaper, to clean off the dielectric coating.
• Scoring or abrading of the copper-clad aluminum center conductor will result in a
weakened conductor that can break in the future after it is exposed to cyclic stress.
283
Enterprise Standard
If aluminum is exposed through the loss of the copper-cladding, a galvanic cell can form
and eventually result in the loss of electrical contact due to corrosion.
Scraping the center conductor with a tool that is not specified for removing the dielectric
residue may damage the center conductor potentially impacting the higher frequencies
that ride on the outer most area of the center conductor. This is known as “Skin Effect”.
Note: A flame MUST never be used to clean the center conductor of remaining dielectric
material since overheating and carbonization of the dielectric may occur and result in
degraded signal performance. Copper will carry the heat deep into the cable causing
much more damage to the dielectric and adversely affecting the characteristic impedance
of the cable.
Trimming the Cable Center Conductor
After the cable center conductor is cleaned, determine the required length for the center
conductor. Use the available trim guides included with or on most splices and connectors.
Trim the center conductor with diagonal cutters 1/2 to 2/3 of the way through. Rotate the
cutters 90 degrees and cut through completely. Leaves the center conductor with a slightly
triangular or pyramid shaped end.
Note: Always follow the splice or connector manufacturer’s specification for the length of
the center conductor.
Figure 13-8: Coax Core and Center Conductor Length
13.5.1.4 Cable Connectorization at a Splice

At a splice location two cables MUST be prepared. All expansion loops are placed, and
the cable cut to the correct length. The following procedure assumes the cable is prepared
for connectorization and splicing.
• Place the shrink tube onto the cable.
• Place the splice hardware, back nut and/or middle nut onto the cable.
• Place and secure the cable into the connector main body, one side at a time.
o When using a two-piece connector, place the cable into the main body and
tighten the back nut onto the main body of the splice. Follow manufacturer
tightening sequence and torque specification. Repeat for the opposite side.
284
Enterprise Standard
o When using a three-piece connector, place the cable into the main body and
tighten the middle nut onto the main body of the splice. When secured, place
and tighten the back nut onto the middle nut. Follow manufacturer tightening
sequence and torque specification. Repeat for the opposite side.
• Place heat or air shrink tube on the splice. Shrink the tube following manufacturer
recommendation.
13.5.1.5 Pin Connector Preparation for 5/8” Port

Prior to insertion of the pin connector into the housing verify the length of the pin. Use the
available trim guides included on most adaptors and equipment housings. Trim the pin
with diagonal cutters.
Note: Burrs MUST be removed prior to the pin insertion into the housing or seizure
mechanism.
Passives: Verify the seizure screw has been loosened. If required by the equipment
location and the equipment is capable of, rotate the seizure mechanism to accommodate
the adjacent 5/8” port. See the illustration to the right.
Figure 13-9: Tap Pin Connector Configuration
Note: If required by the equipment location and the equipment is capable of, rotate the
seizure mechanism to accommodate the adjacent 5/8” port. See the illustration to the
right.
Actives: May or may not have a seizure mechanism requiring loosening prior to the
insertion of the pin into the 5/8” port.
• Place the pin connector into the housing port.
• Tighten the connector main body to the 5/8” port to the specified torque.
• Do NOT secure the seizure screw in the housing at this time.
285
Enterprise Standard
Prior to Cable Connectorization

After the cable has been prepared for connectorization, coring, stripping and center
conductor length,
• Slide the shrink tubing over the cable,
• Place onto the cable the back nut and then if applicable the middle nut, as
determined by the connector type used.
Cable Placement into the Connector
• Place and secure the center conductor of the cable into the pin connector. Follow
manufacturer tightening and torque specification.
o Two-piece connector: place the cable into the main body and tighten the back
nut onto the main body of the connector.
o Three-piece connector: place the cable into the main body and tighten the middle
nut onto the main body of the connector. When secured, place and tighten the
back nut onto the middle nut.
• Place heat or air shrink tube on the splice. Shrink the tube following manufacturer
recommendation.
Securing the Connector Center Pin by the Seizure Screw
• Verify that all hardware associated with the cable connection is tightened and in
place prior to tightening the seizure screw in the equipment.
• Tighten pin-connectors under the seizing screws to the proper torque specified by
the equipment manufacturer.
o Under tightening of the pin by the seizure screw can result in intermittent
connections, response issues, CPD etc.
o Overtightening pin-connector seizing screws causes cracking of the securing
mechanism or failure of the pin.
• Equipment, adaptors and splices with seizing mechanisms will secure the pin
connector.
• Replace any port caps prior to leaving the location.
286
Enterprise Standard
13.5.1.6 Environmentally Securing the Connectors

Environmentally secure the outside plant (OSP) connections using a protective covering.
The protective covering MUST be placed on the connector or splice at the same time as
the installation. See section 13.4.4.
• Heat shrink: Place the boot over the connector and allow the boot to recover using
heat. Apply the flame carefully when using heat on the shrink boot. Overuse of the
torch may melt or deform the boot, melt the jacket and dielectric.
• Air shrink: Place the boot over the connector and allow the boot to recover in the
outside air temperature.
• Self-Adhesive Tape: Place on connectors that cannot have shrink boot applied.
Equipment Installation and Splicing

Equipment installation is one of the final steps when constructing the Comcast network.
It could be considered the most crucial aspect as issues created during splicing will
immediately be apparent after plant activation or may cause intermittent problems that
surface over time. Placing and securing the equipment MUST be performed with an eye
on quality.
Install all equipment at the location specified on the design map. An amplifier or node that
is not installed at the designated location can significantly reduce the quality of the
network.
If a problem is found with the design location of any equipment, it MUST be brought to the
attention of the Construction Supervisor before splicing. The Construction Supervisor will
raise the issue to CONNECT Region and Division Engineering. CONNECT Region and/or
Division Engineering MUST give their approval before making any changes to the design.
When the design change is approved, verify the design change is noted on all system
documentation, paper or electronic. Mark the changes on the office construction maps
and have the Construction Supervisor initial the changes.
Aerial Equipment Mounting and Splicing Guidelines

• Do not mount splices or equipment mid-span.
• Do not mount equipment on a slack span.
• Mount active and passive equipment on an aerial crossover only if:
o Designated on the electronic design
o If the crossover is over 50’ from the pole.
• Use a housing-to-housing connector when installing taps or passives to an active
device.
• Use a housing-to-housing connector when two passives are at the same location.
DO NOT USE a cable jumper between two pieces of equipment.
287
Enterprise Standard
• When back feeding a cable from a port

on the opposite side of the equipment,
use two 90-degree or one 180-degree
adaptors to complete the back feed.
DO NOT USE a reverse cable loop for
this purpose, it is not acceptable.
Figure 13-10: NO Back Loop
• Use hanger brackets on equipment (tap, DCs, line extender, etc.) any time there is
a through cable.
• Tighten all equipment housing covers to the recommended torque specified by the
manufacturer each time a housing is closed. Ensure any alignment pins are seated
properly.
Note: Tighten all housing-to-housing connectors following manufacturer’s instructions

and use bishop tape or approved self-bonding tape for environmental protection.
13.6.1.1 Grounding and Bonding

Ground and/or bond all active equipment locations prior to the installation of the coaxial
cable into the housing connectors. Bonding MUST be performed as required by the NESC
2017 and as required by local ordinances, local utilities and joint users. Plant grounding
and bonding MUST be completed at the time of the strand installation before removal of
the traveling grounds. Details can be found in section 7 Grounding and Bonding and
section 9 Strand Installation.
13.6.1.2 Expansion Loops and Splicing

Form all expansion loops to the proper size with the correct loop forming tool as specified
in Section 10.3.3.
• When both trunk and distribution/feeder cable are located on the same strand, the
expansion loop will contain both cables. The loop location is dictated by the feeder
cable. This is known as being “feeder dominant”.
• Expansion loop size is dictated by the largest cable.
• All tums or corners of 45 to 90 degrees require an input and output expansion loop.
• All changes of height at the pole require an input and output expansion loops. If a
splice or equipment is located at this transition, place it on the higher strand. If the
higher strand is a slack span do not place on the higher strand. Ensure that water
from the higher strand does not have a direct path to the equipment on the lower
strand.
288
Enterprise Standard
• If the placement of the loops is not acceptable to the local utility, they can be moved
with prior approval of the Construction Supervisor in conjunction with the Region
Engineering team. If the utility requires a change, the change MUST be submitted
to CONNECT Corporate Engineering.
• Observe all clearances between the bottom of the loop and the adjacent joint users
on the same aerial structure (pole).
• Splices and splice blocks MUST NOT be placed in the bottom of the loop. Install
them prior to the loop and secure with a strap and spacer on each side of the splice.
• All splices, splice blocks and connectors MUST be environmentally protected using
shrink tube. The splice block dust covers
13.6.1.3 Corners
• Equipment placed on corner poles may require additional spacing. At all tums in
the cable place a strap and spacer at least 4-inches past the last bend from the
output of the active and at least 4-inches before the first bend of the corner. Where
the cable path circumnavigates the pole, maintain a 4-inch clearance from the pole.
• There is a minimum bending radius of 11-inches for 0.750” and smaller cable and
15-inches for 0.875” through 1.125” cable.
• Place a strap and spacer at least 4-inches from the last bend in the turn and at least
4 inches before the first bend in the output loop.
• Wrap the lashing wire around the strand only, 10-inches before the strap and 10 to
12-inches after the strap and spacer to the lashing wire clamp. Place the strap and
spacer at least 4-inches after the last bend of the expansion loop.
Dimensions and equipment placement are shown in Figure 13-11.
289
Enterprise Standard
Figure 13-11: Corner Equipment Pole Configuration
13.6.1.4 Splitter and Coupler Installation

• Install all passives on the input side of the pole. (Exception: “Slack span”).
• Install an output expansion loop on each leg of a splitter or directional coupler.
• When trunk and feeder are located on the same strand, the expansion loop will
contain both cables. The location of the trunk expansion loop is dictated by the
feeder cable.
• Where there is a through cable, install the splitter or directional coupler on a hanger
bracket.
• Install a straight through trunk cables expansion loop at its normal location on the
output side of the pole when the feeder does not continue in the same direction.
• Place the output expansion loop away from the pole on the output side.
• At all times, place the output loop after the turn.
• Install only pin-type connectors with integral radiation sleeves. DO NOT USE FEED
THROUGH CONNECTORS!
• All hardline connectors MUST be environmentally protected using shrink tube or
equivalent.
290
Enterprise Standard
13.6.1.5 Tap Installation

Install terminators with integral sealing sleeve and isolated drop saver on each tap port
prior to installation.
• Install taps on the input side of the pole. (Exception: If an input port of the tap is on
a slack span, move it to the output side of the pole.)
• Install an output expansion loop on the output side of the pole.
• Taps do not require an input expansion loop. They MUST follow normal hardware
placement.
• When trunk and feeder are located on the same strand, the expansion loop will
contain both cables. The location of the trunk expansion loop is dictated by the
feeder cable.
• Maintain the minimum bend radius in transitions from the strand to the input
connector and through the output expansion loop based on cable size.
o 11” minimum radius for cables ≤ 0.750” diameter
o 14.5” minimum radius for cables > 0.750” diameter
• Before bending the cable at the input or output of the tap maintain a 6” straight
section cable.
• When installing a tap where there is a through cable, support the tap from the strand
using the proper hanger bracket. Protect the through cable with a cable guard.
• Install a straight through trunk cables expansion loop at its normal location on the
output side of the pole when the feeder does not continue in the same direction.
• At all times, place the output loop after the turn.
• Connect collocated taps or taps to couplers or active equipment with rotational
housing-to-housing connectors.
• When installing a tap where there is a through cable, support the tap from the strand
using the proper hanger bracket. Protect the through cable with a cable guard.
• Use only pin-type connectors with integral radiation sleeves.
• Wrap the lashing wire around the strand only for at least 10-inches before the strap
and spacer and then continue for at least 10 to 12-inches to the lashing wire clamp.
Place the strap and spacer at least 4-inches before the bend in the cable
transitioning down to the tap.
• Bend the cable with an 11-inch radius minimum along with a 6-inch straight section
before the connector.
• On the output side of the tap, leave at least a 6-inch straight section of cable after
the connector before bending the cable back up to the strand. Maintain the required
bend radius.
THROUGH CONNECTORS!
291
Enterprise Standard
• All hardline connectors MUST be environmentally protected using shrink tube or

equivalent. See section 13.4.4.
• On the input side of the pole the strap and spacer MUST be placed at least 4-inches
after the last bend in the cable and about 4 inches before the three-bolt clamp.
• On the output side of the pole the strap and spacer MUST be placed about 4-inches
after the three-bolt clamp and at least 4 inches before the first bend in the expansion
loop.
• Place the strap and spacer at least 4-inches before the expansion loop bend in the
cable transitioning up to the strand. Wrap the lashing wire around the strand at
least 10-inches after the strap and spacer and then continue for 10 to 12-inches to
the lashing wire clamp.
Figure 13-12 is an illustration of a tap installation without a through cable. The tap is
attached directly to the strand. The illustration is showing the requirement to observe the
bend radius of the coax and the 6” straight requirement into or out of a coaxial connector
prior to any bends being applied. At the expansion loop or where the cable is bent
maintain the recommended minimum bend radius for the cable. In Figure 13-12 the
recommended radius shown is for cables that are ≤ 0.750”.
Figure 13-12: Tap Installation
292
Enterprise Standard
Figure 13-13 is an illustration of a tap installation with a through cable requiring the use of
a tap hanger bracket. The distance from the strand to the tap is based on the depth of the
hanger bracket. The illustration is showing the requirement to observe the bend radius of
the coax and the 6” straight requirement into or out of a coaxial connector prior to any
bends being applied. At the expansion loop maintain the recommended minimum bend
radius for the cable. In Figure 13-13 the recommended radius shown is for cables that
are ≤ 0.750”.
Figure 13-13: Tap Installation with Through Cable
• The green circles show the 11-inch radius for cables ≤ 0.750”, the same radius used
for the expansion loop. The difference is the depth of the expansion loop vs the
depth of the cable to access to the equipment ports.
• Do not exceed the minimum bend radius.
13.6.1.6 Active Equipment

Active equipment includes all devices that require plant powering to operate. These are
nodes, amplifiers, line extenders, gateways, Wi-Fi units, and other network powered
devices.
Note: Nodes are covered within this section. Only the coaxial portion of the node will be
addressed. The optical fiber cabling is covered in the Fiber Construction Manual.
13.6.1.6.1 Nodes and Amplifiers

A node is a device that will transition the optical signal to an RF signal for coaxial
distribution. It can have from 1 to 4 RF distribution ports.
293
Enterprise Standard
An amplifier and line extender are devices that increases the RF signal level and then
distributes the RF to 1 to 3 housing ports. Port usage is determined by the amplifier
configuration.
• Input RF port
• 1 to 3 RF ports to feed the distribution network.
During construction and connectorization, the actives MUST be installed and placed as
designed. During the installation, follow these splicing and connectorization guidelines.
• Install all nodes and amplifiers on the input side of the pole.
o An exception to this requirement is at slack span locations or upgrades where
signal flow can be reversed in the network.
o DO NOT move the amplifier location, from one side of the pole to the other, if all
that is required is to change the signal flow.
o DO NOT add additional splices.
• During the forming of the bends for the expansion loops and bends to the connector,
the minimum bend radius requirements of the cable MUST be followed.
• Use the correct expansion loop forming tool for the size of cable being installed.
• Install a full input expansion loop before the node or amplifier and an output loop
on the opposite side of the pole from the active device at all active equipment
locations. If the trunk or feeder cable change direction, install an expansion loop
after all turns.
• At the input loop, install the lashing wire around the strand for 10-inches before the
strap and spacer. Install the strap and spacer at least 4-inches before the first bend
of the loop.
• Then, continue the lashing wire around the strand only for 10 to 12-inches to the
lashing wire clamp (lashing wire clamp).
• Then route the loop back up to the strand with a strap and spacer at least 4-inches
past the last bend of the expansion loop.
• Run the cable straight for at least 4-inches past the strap before bending to route
down to the amplifier.
• Run a 6-inch (minimum) straight section between the last bend in the cable and the
connector of the node, amplifier or any passive connected directly to an active. A
housing-to-housing connector MUST be used to connect a passive to the node or
amplifier.
• On the output side of the active, run a 6-inch (minimum) straight section of cable
from the end of the connector to the first bend to transition the cable back up to the
strand.
• Place a strap and spacer 4-inches (minimum) from the last bend in the cables and
about 4-inches from the three-bolt clamp.
294
Enterprise Standard
• The cable will pass under the three-bolt clamp with the strap and spacer about 4-
inches past the three-bolt clamp and 4-inches (minimum) before the first bend in
the output expansion loop.
• On the output side of the expansion loop place all hardware,
o Wrap the lashing wire around the strand only at least 10-inches before the strap.
o Place the strap and spacer at least 4-inches from the last bend in the loop and
the lashing wire clamp 10 to 12-inches into the loop from the strap.
Figure 13-14: Node Splicing
Figure 13-15: Amplifier Splicing
295
Enterprise Standard
• Actives MUST have an input expansion loop. Use the expansion loop dimensions
in Figure 13-14 and Figure 13-15 and apply to the input loop. This is shown in
Figure 13-16.
Figure 13-16: Active Device Input and Output Expansion Loops
13.6.1.6.2 Line Extender

A line extender is a two-port housing having an input and output RF port. It is used after
the node or amplifier to extend the reach of the RF plant.
• Place the line extender on the input side of the pole. Exception: If the input port of
the line extender is on a slack span, move it to the output side of the pole.
• During the forming the bends for the expansion loops and bends to the connector,
the minimum bend radius requirements of the cable MUST be followed.
• Use the correct expansion loop forming tool for the size of cable being installed.
• Install a full input expansion loop before the line extender and an output expansion
loop on the opposite side of the pole. If the feeder cable changes direction, install
an expansion loop after all turns.
• Install all line extenders on the input side of the pole.
o An exception to this requirement is at slack span locations or upgrades.
o DO NOT move the amplifier location if all that is required is a change in the signal
flow.
o DO NOT add additional splices.
• At the input expansion loop, install the lashing wire around the strand for 10-inches
before the strap and spacer. Install the strap and spacer at least 4-inches before
the first bend of the expansion loop.
• Continue the lashing wire around the strand for 10 to 12-inches to the lashing wire
clamp (lashing wire clamp).
• Route the expansion loop back up to the strand with a strap and spacer at least 4-
inches past the last bend of the expansion loop.
• Run the cable straight for at least 4-inches past the strap before bending to route
down to the active device connector.
296
Enterprise Standard
• Run a 6-inch (minimum) straight section between the last bend in the cable and the
connector of the node or amplifier or any passive connected directly to an active.
A housing-to-housing connector MUST be used to connect a passive to the node
or amplifier.
• On the output side of the active, run a 6-inch (minimum) straight section of cable
from the end of the connector to the first bend to transition the cable back up to the
strand.
• Place a strap and spacer 4-inches (minimum) from the last bend in the cables and
about 4-inches from the three-bolt clamp.
• The cable will pass under the three-bolt clamp with the strap and spacer about 4-
inches past the three-bolt clamp and 4-inches (minimum) before the first bend in
the output expansion loop.
• On the output side of the expansion loop place all hardware:
o Wrap the lashing wire around the strand only at least 10-inches before the strap.
o Place the strap and spacer at least 4-inches from the last bend in the loop and
the lashing wire clamp 10 to 12-inches into the loop from the strap.
Figure 13-17: Line Extender Splicing No Through Cable
13.6.1.6.3 Line Extender with Through Cable

At any splice location that has a through cable, change the through cables expansion loop
location to allow for the spliced equipment’s normal placement of input and output
expansion loops.
• Any time there is a through cable, support the line extender and/or any passive from
the strand by the proper hanger brackets.
297
Enterprise Standard
• Support the through cable with straps and spacers. Also, protect the cable from
abrasion by installing a cable guard.
• Attach passives to line extender with rotational housing-to-housing connectors.
Figure 13-18: Line Extender Splicing with Through Cable
13.6.1.7 Aerial Power Supplies

AII aerial power supply installations MUST conform to National and Local Electrical codes
and ordinances.
• Components and connectors used at the power supply, in the power circuit to the
network, MUST be capable of operating at 20 Amps continuous up to the power
insertion port. When connected to the system the current draw on any leg off of
the power inserter MUST NOT exceed 12 Amps continuous.
Figure 13-19: Power Configuration and Current Draw Diagram
298
Enterprise Standard
• A document covering power supply installation and maintenance is on the

Standards Portal. The document is titled, Outside Plant Power Supply
Installation, Maintenance and Monitoring, Enterprise Standard.
http://community.teamcomcast.com/e/a5/Standards_Portal/Documents_Library/O
SP_Pwr_Sply_INST_Mnt_Stnd_ES.pdf
OSP_Pwr_Sply_INST_Mnt_Stnd_ES.pdf.
Note: The underscores in the document name are required.
• When possible, locate the power supply one pole away from a node or amplifier
pole, but not more than 125-feet from the active.
o Do not place a power supply at an active location. Poles at active locations are
the most repeatedly visited in a system. With the power supply one pole away
the active is easier and safer to access,
o In this configuration, place the power inserter at the active and connect with a
housing-to-housing connector.
o Connect the power supply to the power inserter with a span of cable the same
size as the feeder cable used.
• Mount all power supplies and power inserters on poles that are accessible to
vehicles for easier maintenance.
• Locate power supplies and power inserters where a tap is designed into the
distribution line and on the same pole as the power inserter. This is for status
monitoring.
13.6.1.8 Aerial Network Power Insertion

AC voltage MUST be applied to the network to power the Comcast active equipment. As
with combining the RF channels for distribution on the network, AC MUST also be
multiplexed onto the cable. To couple AC Voltage and power to the network a power
inserter is used. This device MUST be capable of working at 20 Amps continuous on the
power insertion port. When transitioned to the network cables the maximum continuous
current is 12 Amps. The power inserter MUST meet all current CONNECT electrical, RF
and mechanical product specifications.
• All methods of power insertion MUST meet the 12 Amps continuous current
specification.
• Install power inserters in locations as designed. DO NOT place a power inserter
on a slack span.
• Follow the expansion loop requirements for the equipment installed or is being
installed.
• If the power inserter is collocated with a node, amplifier or passive, use a housing-
to-housing connector.
• When there is a through cable, install the power inserter on a hanger bracket.
299
Enterprise Standard
THROUGH CONNECTORS at power insertion locations.
• Splice and connect all power inserters at the designated location, including the
specified equipment port.
• Power insertion ports on nodes can be used without a power inserter.
• Unused RF ports on nodes or amplifiers may be used to insert power into the
network with the use of a power inserter. The unused RF port on the power inserter
MUST be terminated, no matter whether RF is present or is not at the port.
• All power supply connectors MUST be environmentally protected.
Figure 13-20: Power Supply Connectivity
Underground / Subsurface Splicing Guidelines

Install all equipment at the location specified on the design map. An amplifier or node that
is not installed at the designated location can significantly reduce the quality of the
network.
Any problems found with the designed location of any equipment MUST be brought to the
attention of the Construction Supervisor before splicing in the equipment. The
Construction Supervisor and CONNECT Engineering MUST give their approval before
making any changes to the design.
300
Enterprise Standard
Note the changes on the office construction maps and have the Construction Supervisor
initial the changes. When the design change is approved, verify the design change is
noted on all system documentation, paper or electronic.
13.6.2.1 Underground Actives Equipment Splicing Configurations

Active equipment includes all devices that require plant powering to operate. These are
nodes, amplifiers, line extenders, or any other equipment that is directly spliced to the
hardline network.
Note: Node splicing within this section will cover only the coaxial portion. The optics and
optics cabling will be covered in an upcoming Fiber Construction Manual.
13.6.2.1.1 Nodes and Amplifiers

• Install nodes horizontally with the input side on the left.
• Install amplifiers horizontally with the input side on the left or vertically with the input
side towards the bottom of the cabinet or pedestal.
• Follow manufacturer recommendations for mounting active devices in pedestals to
support proper heat dissipation. Equipment mounted improperly can overheat and
cause irregularities in RF performance, premature aging or failure of the active
device.
• During the forming of the bends to the connector, the minimum bend radius
requirements of the cable MUST be followed.
• Use 90⁰ or 180⁰ adaptors to change the direction of cable within the cabinet. Pin-
type extension adaptors can be used. DO NOT USE JUMPERS AND SPLICES.
• All connectors will be environmentally protected by shrink boot or self-adhesive
tape.
Node (Horizontal) Amp (Horizontal)
Figure 13-21: Actives Pedestal
Note: It is recommended that nodes and amplifiers are mounted horizontally in pedestals
or cabinets.
301
Enterprise Standard
13.6.2.1.2 Line Extender

A line extender is a two-port amplifier housing having an input and an output RF port. It
is used after a node or amplifier to extend the reach of the distribution plant.
• Install line extenders horizontally with the input side on the left or vertically with the
input side towards the bottom of the cabinet or pedestal.
• Follow manufacturer recommendations for mounting active devices in pedestals to
support proper heat dissipation. Equipment mounted improperly can overheat and
cause irregularities in RF performance, premature aging or failure of the active
device.
• During the forming the bends for the bends to the connector, the minimum bend
radius requirements of the cable MUST be followed.
type extension adaptors MUST be used. DO NOT USE JUMPERS AND SPLICES.
tape.
LE (Horizontal) LE (Vertical)
Figure 13-22: Line Extender Pedestal
13.6.2.2 Splitter and Coupler Locations

• Mount passives in a pedestal or cabinet either vertically or horizontally.
o Vertical, position the input side of the tap down.
o Horizontal, position the input port to the left. Try to follow the direction of RF
signal flow.
requirements of the cable MUST be followed.
• At locations where the tap Connectors may be below the pedestal use extension
connectors to get the additional height that may be required. DO NOT USE
JUMPERS OR SPLICES.
type extension adaptors can be used. DO NOT USE JUMPERS AND SPLICES.
302
Enterprise Standard
THROUGH CONNECTORS!
tape.
• Bond and ground the coupler at required locations.
Figure 13-23: Coupler Pedestal Placement
13.6.2.3 Tap Locations

Install terminators with integral sealing sleeve and isolated drop saver on each tap port
prior to installation.
• Mount taps as designed in a pedestal or cabinet either vertically or horizontally.
• Vertical, position the input side of the tap down.
• Horizontal, position the input port to the left.
requirements of the cable MUST be followed
• At locations where the tap Connectors may be below the pedestal use extension
connectors to get the additional height that may be required. DO NOT USE
JUMPERS OR SPLICES.
type extension adaptors can be used
• Use housing-to-housing connectors where the tap will chute space with other
equipment. Multiple taps in the same location MUST use housing to housings
depending upon the pedestal or cabinet configuration.
THROUGH CONNECTORS!
tape.
303
Enterprise Standard
• At all End Of Line (EOL) underground tap locations a ground MUST be installed.
Figure 13-24: Tap Pedestal Placement
13.6.2.4 Underground Plant Power Supplies

AII underground power supply installations MUST conform to National and Local Electrical
codes and ordinances.
• Components and connectors used at the power supply, in the power circuit to the
network, MUST be capable of operating at 20 Amps continuous. When connected
to the system the current draw on any leg off of the power inserter MUST NOT
exceed 12 amps continuous.
Figure 13-25: Underground Power Configuration
• A document that covers underground power supply installation and maintenance is

on the Standards Portal. The document is titled, Outside Plant Power Supply
Installation, Maintenance and Monitoring, Enterprise Standard.
http://community.teamcomcast.com/e/a5/Standards_Portal/Documents_Library/OSP_Pw
r_Sply_INST_Mnt_Stnd_ES.pdf
OSP_Pwr_Sply_INST_Mnt_Stnd_ES.pdf.
Note: The underscores in the document name are required.
304
Enterprise Standard
• When possible, locate the power supplies near and not be more than 125 feet from
the network power insertion location.
o Place the power inserter at the active and connect with a housing-to-housing
connector.
o Connect the power supply to the power inserter with a span of cable the same
size as the feeder cable used.
• Splice and connect all power inserters into the cable at the exact location, including
the equipment port, specified in the design maps. Any splice location or port
change MUST be approved in writing by Divisional or Regional Engineering.
• Power insertion ports on nodes and amplifiers can be used.
• All power supply connectors MUST be environmentally protected.
13.6.2.5 Underground Network Power Insertion

Ac Voltage MUST be applied to the network. As with combining the RF channels for
distribution on the network, AC MUST also be multiplexed on the cable. Use a network
power inserter. This device MUST be capable of working at 20 Amps continuous on the
power insertion port. When transitioned to the network cables the maximum continuous
current is 12 Amps. The power inserter MUST meet all Comcast technical specifications.
o All methods of power insertion MUST meet the 12 Amps continuous current
specification.
o Install power inserters at locations as designed.
o If required, follow the expansion loop requirements for the equipment installed or
is being installed.
o If the power inserter is collocated with a node, amplifier or passive, use a
housing-to-housing connector.
o Install only pin-type connectors with integral radiation sleeves. DO NOT USE
FEED THROUGH CONNECTORS at power inserter locations.
Power Insertion
Figure 13-26: Power Insertion Power Supply to Underground Amplifier Pedestal
305
Enterprise Standard
Note: All connectors will be environmentally protected by shrink boot or self-adhesive

tape.
13.6.2.6 xNet Network Power Transition Between Nodes

The powering requirements for an Xnet plant are unique when compared to the typical
HFC network powering. The node is typically the last active in the network. As such, an
AC power supply may support more than one node. To transition between segments a
method has been developed to extract power from one segment and insert into another.
• No RF can be transitioned between segments.
• Power cable between segments will only carry the AC Voltage.
• 23 Ohm power cable can be used to transition between segments.
Figure 13-27: xNET Power Strapping Diagram
306
Enterprise Standard
14. Rebuild Construction

Summary
The major distinction between a new build and a rebuild is the disposition of the existing
plant during and after a rebuild. A second distinction is the operation of both the existing
and new systems will operate in parallel during activation and deactivation. Except for the
items listed in this section, all construction MUST follow new build practices as outlined in
previous sections.
A common mistake made during rebuild planning and execution is to assume that the
existing plant was built right the first time or that conditions on the pole have not changed
since the plant was originally built. The joint users may have added, reconfigured or
eliminated plant that can now have the Comcast plant out of compliance.
This section assumes that important issues, such as routing changes (drops, underground
and MDU's), make ready problems, and drop conditions were taken into consideration in
the walkout and design phases of the project.
Rebuild Construction Specification

With the exceptions of items listed in this section, all construction will follow practices as
outlined in this manual. While all rebuild construction projects are unique, they do share
some of the associated tasks of newbuild construction and splicing.
• Since the life expectancy of certain hardware (i. e., nuts, bolts, washers, etc.) is
many times greater than that of the coaxial cable, reuse them when possible. Some
areas of the country have a higher corrosion rate. Take this into consideration when
deciding to reuse any existing hardware.
• Aerial rebuild construction practices MUST meet Comcast specifications, NESC,
National, State, Local ordinances and Joint Partner recommendations for clearance
requirements at the pole and mid-span always during construction and wreck-out.
• Subsurface or underground rebuild construction practices MUST meet Comcast
specifications, NESC, National, State, Local ordinances and Joint Partner
recommendations for clearance requirements during construction and wreck-out.
• All grounding and bonding MUST meet Comcast specifications, National, State,
Local ordinances and Joint Partner recommendations or requirements.
• Use only the parts that are approved for the project and have CIFA numbers.
• The splicing of nodes, amplifiers, taps and passives MUST adhere to the splicing
section of this manual. Section 13.
• Extension connectors with a continuous center conductor are required. Jumpers
MUST NOT be used in aerial or underground plant.
307
Enterprise Standard
• New power supplies MUST be in place and ready for operation. Power supplies
are covered in the document, Outside Plant Power Supply Installation, Maintenance
and Monitoring located on the standards portal.
OSP_Pwr_Sply_INST_Mnt_Stnd_ES.pdf
Rebuild Construction Requirements

All Comcast construction employees and business partner construction crews MUST
understand the new design architecture to be used in the rebuild. If necessary, request
manufacturer training and assistance for Comcast and business partners. The technology
used in the rebuild MAY require additional installation and operational training.
• Determine the placement of new power supplies as required by design.
• Verify that the power supplies activated during the rebuild DO NOT exceed the
manufacturer' s current load limits.
• Power supplies shared between the existing and new system during the rebuild,
MUST NOT exceed the manufacturer’s maximum current load limits.
Note: Make temporary power sources (i.e. generators) available.
• Place vertical grounds at all active locations and first, tenth and last pole.
• Place all continuity bonds as required.
• Place the appropriately sized tap brackets on equipment
o Where multiple cables exist and pass over the hardware
o Where passives are connected together.
• Shrink boot all hardline connectors.
• At the tap, tighten all drop fittings to manufacturer specifications, and install sealing
boots.
• Use bishop tape on all housing-to-housing and 90-degree connectors.
• Attempt to repair all damaged cable and report the repair to the system. If not
repaired, submit a request to have the cable replaced.
Note: Report moved or missing poles to Comcast Engineering in the local system.
Determine if a plant redesign is required to move, replace or eliminate equipment.
• Do not carry removed equipment on your belt or down a ladder.
• Do Not Drop removed hardware, electronics, coax or strand to the ground.
Carefully lower all removed equipment to the ground.
• Place all removed electronics, taps, passives, hardware and cable at a Comcast
designated location for repurposing or disposal.
308
Enterprise Standard
Aerial Plant
Rebuilding an aerial plant MUST be performed with caution and attention to detail in all
phases of the rebuild process. The following will provide guidance for the rebuild
construction planning and execution processes.
When raising or lowering the existing cable plant it is important (where clearances allow)
to raise or lower it as far as possible from its original location. When the old system is not
moved an adequate distance from the new, the construction crew have difficulty getting
the lasher through and the lasher can cause damage to the existing active system and
drop hardware.
Raise or Lower the Existing System

When rebuilding an existing aerial plant determine the placement of the old plant above
or below the new plant during the construction process, The placement decision MUST
be made based on the available space at the pole and the potential for creating a
clearance violation of the joint users on the pole.
There are three options to consider when rebuilding the coaxial plant; Leave the old plant
and reframe for the new, lower the existing plant. or raise the existing plant.
1. Reframe and leave the old plant in its present location and reframe for the new.
Since most poles have limited space availability, this option is only applicable a
small percentage of the time. Consider all options when placing the new plant
above or below the existing plant. Clearances are critical!
Figure 14-1: Reframe for New Plant Above the Existing Plant
309
Enterprise Standard
2. Lower the existing system. Lowering the existing system allows for the wreck out
of the existing system with fewer obstacles. Maintaining clearances for both the
cable and the drops can make this option prohibitive.
Figure 14-2: Lower the Existing Plant
Note: The phone company or other adjacent communications networks will not want the
Comcast network physically contacting their plant.
3. Raise the existing system. It is necessary to take extra precautions during the
construction of the new system and during the wreck-out of the old system. The
old plant is above the new system. Maintaining clearances for both the cable and
the drops make this option more attractive. Additional care MUST be used during
the wreck-out of the old plant.
310
Enterprise Standard
Figure 14-3: Raise the Existing Plant
Note: When raising or lowering the existing system, observe and maintain clearances
from all joint users as per NESC clearance guidelines not only at the pole but mid span as
well!
If clearances cannot be met contact Local or Regional Engineering.
Securing the Old Plant

The existing plant is operational during the rebuild construction phase of the project. As
such the existing plant MUST be secured in a way that will enable the new-build
construction and provide a way of disposing the old system through a wreck-out process.
Securing the old plant MUST NOT place the network in non-compliance of clearance
and bonding and grounding requirements.
14.3.2.1 Securing a Through Pole

The most common practice for securing a straight through pole is placing a drive hook into
the pole to support the existing system.
• If the decision is made to replace all three bolt clamps, drive the hook through the
center hole of the old three bolt damp. Maintain the tightness of the clamp on the
strand to keep each span from sliding making the wreck-out safer.
• If the old three bolt clamps are reused, drive the drive hook into the pole so only
enough room remains between the pole and the hook to allow the strand to be
placed in the hook. DO NOT place any cable in the drive hook. The weight of the
span will damage the cable. The strand placed in the drive-hook MUST be secured
on either side of the drive-hook using lashing clamps. This will keep the strand
from moving and causing damage to the cable or breaking the existing lashing wire.
311
Enterprise Standard
Figure 14-4: Drive hook
Use of the drive hook is illustrated in Figure 14-2 and Figure 14-3.
14.3.2.2 Securing Deadends and Angle Poles

CAUTION: Because of the tension on both deadends and angle poles it is recommended,
if there is enough clearance, leave them in their existing frames, and reframe the pole for
the new system.
• When possible, leave street crossings in existing frames.
• Securing deadends and angle poles can be accomplished in several ways, utilizing
three bolt clamps, drive hooks, preforms, rope, or a combination of them.
Note: Never remove the strand and cable on an angle pole from its frame while someone
is on the inside of the angle! Severe Injury or Death can result.
Low Angled Pole High Angled Poles
Figure 14-5: Working at Angled Pole Locations
Consult your construction coordinator to discuss safety and cost considerations for
different pole situations.
• Dead-end poles can be tied off by placing a three-bolt clamp on the strand and
tightening it down, then tying a rope through the center hole of the clamp and tying
it around the pole. Place a drive-hook on the backside of the pole to support the
rope and keep it from moving down the pole. The rope MUST be capable of
supporting the load.
• Once the strand is secure, use the existing hole for the new plant.
312
Enterprise Standard
• Tie off angle poles using the same procedure, except place two to three clamps on
either side of the frame. Secure the rope from one clamp around the pole and tie
it off to the other clamp.
Note: A dead-end preform can be used in place of the three bolt clamps in both the above
examples. Retrieve these during wreck-out.
• Dead-end poles can also be tied off by making a sling using either one false dead-
end preform or two dead-end preforms and a piece of strand.
o Attach one end to the existing strand and the other to a drive hook placed either
on the side of the pole or on the back side of the pole.
o Never place the drive hook on the same side that the strand is attached.
• Angle poles can be tied off utilizing a sling as described above, with a drive hook
placed on the back side of the pole for support.
CAUTION: Always take extra precaution when detaching any existing plant that is under
tension.
Note: When tying existing plant with a rope or strand slings, always support the cable in
a way that will not cause it to stretch, kink or "suck out" at any connector. Customer impact
MUST be kept to a minimum.
Reframing Poles
One of the most common mistakes made by construction crews during a rebuild is to either
assume that the existing plant was built right the first time, or that conditions on the pole
have not changed since the plant was originally built. As an example, other joint users
could have added plant, moved its plant or even eliminated plant. Based on these
changes, the Comcast plant may be out of compliance with clearance or bonding and
grounding requirements.
Space permitting, it is always preferable to reframe dead ends, angle poles, active
locations and street crossings.
Note: Always follow Comcast new build construction practices and verify clearances from
the joint user plants. See section 9 Aerial Strand Construction and clearances are
discussed in section 9.4.
Rebuild Grounding and Bonding

Raising the existing system necessitates changing grounds and bonds. It is critical to
apply a new bond and ground to the existing system at the same time the plant is moved.
Since the old system and the new system could both be active for a long period of time,
ground and bond them per Comcast bonding and grounding practices, NESC and NEC,
as well as local requirements.
313
Enterprise Standard
Anchors and Guys

Discuss the issue of anchors with both the pole owner and joint users, to determine if their
requirements have changed since the original cable system was built. Determine if they
require changes to any attachment hardware, auxiliary eyes, open eyes, etc.
• Replace any Comcast owned anchor that is bent or twisted.
• If the joint users anchor is bent or twisted, discuss replacement with owner.
• Refer to Section 8 Guys and Anchors for anchor and guy installation guidelines.
Underground / Subsurface
An underground rebuild could involve either placing new cable in an existing conduit, or
re-trenching where a coax had originally been direct buried and is now physically failing
or cannot support an extended bandwidth application. Follow the Comcast underground
/ subsurface construction practices found in Section 12.
• Before any work begins, Locate, Locate LOCATE LOCATE Locate Locate
• If an existing direct buried cable needs replacement the span MUST be replaced
with a conduit and a new cable.
Deactivating the Existing / Old System

After activating the new plant and having determined that all drops, MDU's, etc. are
transferred to the new plant, the old plant can be deactivated by section in preparation for
the wreck-out.
• All customers have been transferred to the new plant. Using the tools that monitor
the CPE’s and other devices in the rebuild area, all devices MUST be
communicating on the new plant.
• Regional and/or the local system Engineering and Construction MAY require the
marking of equipment to be wrecked-out after the old plant is deactivated. Follow
local procedures.
• Deactivate the old plant by either pulling fuses, disconnecting a leg(s) from actives,
or by turning off power supplies.
Note: Consult as built maps before turning the old plant off, to ensure that only those
areas that are rebuilt and transitioned to the new plant are affected.
• Since the RF is shut down in an area, allow enough time before wreck-out begins
to enable diagnostics to report any Customer Premises Equipment (CPE) not
responding or customers not connected to the new system to call in.
o All Customer Premises Equipment (CPE) MUST be responding through the new
plant.
• CPE not reporting will require a truck roll.
• CPE found to be defective MUST be replaced.
314
Enterprise Standard
• If multiple customer calls are received from the rebuild area, the old plant can be
reactivated. The number of calls will be defined by the local system.
• If a small number of calls are received, verify the transfer of these individuals to the
new system, and begin the wreck-out. Create a service ticket to correct identified
issues.
Equipment Wreck-out
Wreck-out is the removal and proper disposal of the old Comcast equipment. See section
14.9 Equipment Reconciliation for disposal and recycling recommendations.
• Removal of hardware from the pole line.
• Removal of underground equipment.
Note: Provide the wreck-out crew very specific areas (designated on maps) to avoid
inadvertently shutting down active customers.
• Remove all power (AC) from the system before it is wrecked out. The presence of
AC indicates a possible active leg/area.
• Cutout and lower all nodes, amplifiers and line extenders to the ground. DO NOT
DROP! Equipment salvaged from the old plant can be repurposed and used in
other locations.
o If the old plant equipment is marked for wreck-out, only remove the marked active
and passive equipment.
o For safety reasons, do not carry nodes, amplifiers, line extenders or passives
while descending a pole or ladder.
Strand and Cable Wreck-out

Wreck-out is the removal and proper disposal of the old Comcast plant. To wreck-out
strand and cable, secure the old plant designated for wreck-out with a handline. Cut and
lower the old plant to the ground using the handline. Do not cut and drop the old plant
to the ground. See section 14.9 Equipment Reconciliation for disposal and recycling
recommendations.
CAUTION: A HIGHER FREQUENCY OF PERSONAL INJURIES AND PROPERTY
DAMAGE OCCURS DURING THE WRECKOUT OF THE OLD PLANT, THAN DURING
ANY OTHER PHASE OF CONSTRUCTION.
• Take extra precautions when the following situations exist
o Cutting any existing plant that is still under tension.
o Roadways, railroad crossings, and driveways.
o Areas accessible to pedestrians.
o Working over any private property (including parked vehicles).
o Working over phone and cable drops.
315
Enterprise Standard
• Roll up, secure, and place the strand, cable, and lashing wire on a truck or trailer.
Then together with the hardware, actives, and passives, take them to a designated
Comcast disposal or recycling location.
• Remove all the old equipment and hardware (including the drive hooks) from the
poles and check the surrounding areas for debris. Clean up as required.
• Remove old riser cable, hardware, and abandoned riser guard during the wreck-
out, and cap all abandoned conduits.
Deactivation and Removal of Old Power Supplies

Every effort MUST be made to maintain the power supply location to power the new plant.
Deactivating a current power supply location MUST be done as a last resort.
Verify which power supplies require removal. When an area is redesigned and the power
supply MUST be removed, notify the power company to disconnect the power supplies,
prior to removing the physical power supplies. The power supply location MUST be
deactivated.
• Deactivate Power supplies by:
o Turn off the AC power input circuit breaker
o Turning off the battery circuit breaker
o Verify that output voltage is 0 Volts
o Verify the AC input voltage is 0 Volts
• Removing the batteries:
o Aerial: Remove from cabinet and securely and carefully lower the battery to the
ground. DO NOT DROP! When on the ground secure the battery for transport
to a designated battery facility.
o Underground: Remove from cabinet and secure the battery for transport to a
designated battery facility.
o Batteries can be reused or recycled
• Ferroresonant Transformer, UPS and accessories can be removed
Note: NEVER remove a power supply cabinet that is still connected to

power.
• VERIFY THAT THE POWER SUPPLY IS PROPERLY DISCONNECTED FROM

UTILITY POWER BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO REMOVE THE CABINET OR
ASSOCIATED HARDWARE!!
316
Enterprise Standard
• EXTREME CARE MUST BE EXERCISED WHEN REMOVING THE

WEATHERHEAD AND RISER FROM THE POLE. DO NOT ALLOW THEM TO
COME IN CONTACT WITH THE ACTIVE POWER.
• Carefully remove the power supply cabinet.
• Perform proper site restoration when removing an underground power supply.
Note: See section 14.9 Equipment Reconciliation for disposal and recycling
recommendations.
Equipment Reconciliation and Disposition

Since the wreck-out crews are typically the last construction personnel to work on the
network they MUST perform any cleanup at this time. Verify the cleanup work meets all
ordinances and regulations that are currently in place or meet the requirements of the
easement or pole owner.
• Decide well in advance how to reconcile and support salvaged equipment.
• Decide well in advance how to reconcile or reclaim all scrap materials.
• Make prior arrangements for the disposition of non-salvageable or hazardous
materials.
• Equipment salvaged can be repurposed and MUST be removed carefully. Minimize
any possibility of damage.
CLI Compliance
Maintain the "Cumulative leakage index" throughout the rebuild. Test for and correct all
signal leakage. Refer to the signal leakage testing guidance.
317
Enterprise Standard
15. Upgrade Construction

Summary
An upgrade may be the solution when a new design architecture or proposed new
technology is selected to increase system capacity and capabilities. The existing
infrastructure, hardware and cable, is of adequate size, structural integrity and meets the
bandpass requirements of the upgrade.
Upgrading a system is an expedient method of increasing a systems bandwidth and data
transport capability. This is accomplished by removing or replacing the existing active and
passive equipment and implementing the new technology. Upgrading an existing system
may be more cost effective than rebuilding plant, especially in underground locations.
During the upgrade the existing plant will be turned down or experience multiple signal
flow interruptions as the plant is being reconfigured.
Comcast Upgrade Construction Specifications

With the exceptions of items listed in this section, all construction will follow practices as
outlined in this manual. While all upgrade construction projects are unique, they do share
some of the associated tasks of newbuild and rebuild splicing.
Reconfiguration of the network is based on the type of architecture to be used.
• Use only the parts that are approved for the project and have CIFA numbers.
• Add coax as required by the design.
• Replace taps or tap plates as required by the design.
• Based on network design, existing taps MAY be turned around due to the change
in signal flow. The stipulation that the tap MUST be on the RF input side of the pole
will be waived during an upgrade where the RF signal direction is reversed.
• The splicing of nodes, amplifiers, taps and passives MUST adhere to the splicing
section of this manual.
• To avoid creating cracks in existing and potentially brittle cable, do not reform the
existing expansion loops.
• Extension connectors with a self-seizing or a continuous center conductor are
required. Jumpers MUST NOT be used.
o Use extensions as required by design.
o Connector configuration (90⁰ or 180⁰) MAY use an extension connector.
• All lashing, spacers and straps MUST meet specifications. See section 10.
• All grounding and bonding MUST meet National, State, Local ordinances and Joint
Partner recommendations.
• Identify any known damaged strand, hardware, cable or lashing requiring
replacement.
• New strand and cable required by the upgrade MUST be in place.
318
Enterprise Standard
• New power supplies MUST be in place and ready for operation. Power supplies
are covered in the document, Outside Plant Power Supply Installation, Maintenance
and Monitoring located on the standards portal.
OSP_Pwr_Sply_INST_Mnt_Stnd_ES.pdf
Upgrade Construction Requirements

All Comcast construction employees and business partner construction crews MUST
understand the new design architecture used in the upgrade.
• If necessary, request manufacturer training and assistance for Comcast and
business partners. A new technology upgrade may require the training.
• Determine the placement of new power supplies as required by design. Include
installation of modules, batteries, charging and monitoring equipment and locks.
• Verify that the power supplies activated during the upgrade do not exceed the
manufacturer' s current load limits.
Note: Make temporary power sources (i.e. generators) available.
• Place vertical grounds at all active locations and first, tenth and last pole.
• Place all continuity bonds as required.
• Place the appropriately sized tap brackets on equipment
o Where multiple cables exist and pass over the hardware
o Where passives are connected together.
• All hardline splices and connectors MUST have shrink boot.
• At the tap, tighten all drop fittings to manufacturer specifications, and install sealing
boots.
• Use bishop tape on all housing-to-housing and 90-degree connectors.
• Attempt to repair all damaged cable and report the repair to the system. If not
repaired, submit a request to have the cable replaced.
• Where broken lashing wire exists, delash and relash the span.
A common mistake made during upgrade planning and construction is to assume that the
plant was built right the first time or that conditions on the pole have not changed since
the plant was originally built or walked-out. The joint users may have added, reconfigured
or eliminated plant. During construction:
• Note: Report missing or damaged pedestals to Comcast local system Engineering.
Replace with an approved pedestal.
• Note: Report moved or missing poles to Comcast local system Engineering.
Determine the impact on the plant activation schedule. Is a plant redesign required
to move, replace or eliminate equipment?
319
Enterprise Standard
Note: Report moved or missing power supplies to Comcast local system Engineering.
Determine the impact on the plant activation schedule to install or reinstall the power
supply or consider a redesign of the power network.
During the upgrade, equipment that is changed or replaced MUST be removed carefully
and MUST NOT damage Comcast or joint users’ plant.
• Do not carry removed equipment on your belt or down a ladder.
• Do Not Drop removed equipment to the ground. Carefully lower all removed
equipment to the ground.
• Place all removed electronics, taps, passives, hardware and cable at a Comcast
designated location for repurposing or disposal.
New Coaxial Cable Placement

Additional coaxial cable MAY be placed to supplement the existing cable. Cable is placed
based on the RF design requirements for the upgrade. Depending upon the architecture,
cables specifically designated for power can be installed to transition power from one node
to an adjacent node.
• Place and/or overlash new coaxial cable, aerial in the areas identified by the design.
o To add cable to the network, overlash the cable to the existing cable. For a single
cable or multiple cables added to the bundle use double lashing wire. It does
not require a delash/relash operation.
o To add cable to the network with existing fiber, overlash the cable to the existing
cable and fiber. It is not a Comcast requirement to have the fiber exposed on
the outside of the bundle during an upgrade or cable bundle expansion. As
such, it does not require a delash/relash operation.
• Grounding and bonding MUST be verified and corrected prior to or during
construction.
• Pre-splicing new cable may allow for dual active plant during the upgrade. This can
lessen plant outages during the upgrade.
Minimal Plant Interruptions Preparation

During an upgrade the goal is to minimize the customer impact. The following are
guidelines to assist in minimizing the plant downtime.
• An adequate number of experienced splicers are required to ensure that service
interruptions are kept to a minimum. Never leave customers out of service for more
than three hours, accumulated over the duration of the project.
• Place power supplies as soon as possible to avoid unnecessary delays.
o The upgrade construction may require placing power supplies in different
locations than existing power supply locations.
o Verify that all required power supplies are activated before splicing begins.
320
Enterprise Standard
• Remove and replace pedestals to accommodate new electronics prior to the

upgrade to avoid delays with reactivation.
• Have all new equipment prepared for installation before removing existing
equipment.
• Verify that the node is operating and meets performance criteria before beginning
the upgrade splicing.
• When splicing new actives, prepare the actives prior to installation with the correct
connectors and modules for the location
• Assure that any rerouting of signal or power is understood.
• Daily splicing boundaries are determined by the current node area that includes
actives, passives, taps and power supplies for the distribution area.
• Determine the current customers that will be affected by the daily splicing. Know
their operational status prior to and after the upgrade. Use the tools designated for
monitoring the CPE and plant devices.
Note: Report any temporary work performed needing rework during the final cutover.
Note: It is important not to schedule more plant than can be spliced during the production
day.
• Keep standby (on call) personnel available for unplanned outages and damage
control every day after the plant is reactivated.
Aerial Tap Device Replacement

Tap Upgrade Splicing
During a system upgrade, taps may pose a challenge. The challenge is the tap size
difference that may be encountered. In the past 9” stretch taps were deployed. They had
limited band pass capability. During the upgrade the 9” stretch tap will be replaced with
5” taps that have a higher pass band capability.
When replacing a stretch tap with a wide body tap.
• The existing output loop on the opposite side of the pole MUST remain.
• The old tap MUST be removed.
• If the old tap uses a hanger bracket, reuse the hanger bracket if it is in good shape.
Replace if necessary.
• Cut the coaxial cable immediately behind the connector.
• DO NOT reuse the old connectors. Replace with new pin-connectors.
• Re-core all existing connectors using proper tools designated for cable preparation.
• Do not re-bend or reform the bend as this action may weaken the cable shield
reducing the effective life of the cable.
• Only use extension connectors to make up the difference in tap body length and
the replacement of the old connectors.
321
Enterprise Standard
• Approved extension connectors are 3” and 6”. The maximum extension connector
length is 6”.
• Extension connectors cannot be coupled together to get additional length. They
can be placed on either side of the device.
• DO NOT use a coaxial jumper and splice.
• When there is additional damage to an existing cable a jumper MAY be required.
The hardline jumper MUST be the same size as the existing cable and MUST be a
minimum of 36” in length.
• All connectors, extension fittings, housing to housing connectors, and splices will
have environmental protection placed on them using the guidelines in section
13.4.4.
o Shrink boot all connectors
o Use Bishop tape on all housing-to-housing connectors
The following illustrations are of taps showing relative sizes of the stretch tap to the wide
body taps with extension connectors’
9” Stretch Tap
5” Wide Body Tap
5” Wide Body Tap with (1) 3” Extension

Connector

Connectors
5” Wide Body Tap with (1) 3” and (1) 6”

Extension Connectors

Connectors
Figure 15-1: Stretch Tap Replacement Using Extension Connectors
Figure 15-2 Illustrates the placement of an existing 9” Stretch Tap using the cable bend
radius for cables that are ≤ 0.750” cable. The 9” stretch tap will be replaced by a 5”
widebody tap.
322
Enterprise Standard
Figure 15-2: Existing 9" Tap Installation
Figure 15-3 illustrates a 5” tap replacing the 9” stretch tap. With re-connectorization and
making up the difference in tap body length will require the use of extension connectors.
Figure 15-3: Replacement 5" Widebody Tap for 9" Stretch Tap
Underground / Subsurface
Underground upgrade could involve placing new cable in an existing conduit, or re-
trenching where a coax had originally been direct buried and is now failing. For both types
of upgrades requiring new or replacement cable, follow the Comcast underground /
subsurface construction practices found in Section 12.
• Before any work begins, Locate, Locate, LOCATE, LOCATE, Locate, and Locate.
• If an existing direct buried cable needs replacement the span MUST be replaced
with a conduit and a new cable or cables.
323
Enterprise Standard
As part of the plant upgrade process certain conditions may be evident requiring the
resplice of a tap location due to the closeness to the ground. The tap hardline connectors
may be very close to ground level placing the tap below the opening of the pedestal
making access to the device hard. During the changing of the tap and re-connectorization
the tap is not at a workable height within the pedestal then use extension connectors to
get the height. In the past the workaround could have been to add a splice and jumper.
DO NOT use a splice and jumper.
• Use extension connectors to provide the extra length. No longer than 6 inches.
• A heat shrink or air shrink MUST be applied to the hardline and extension
connectors.
Figure 15-4: Extension connectors at a tap location
Figure 15-5: Extension connectors at a splitter or directional coupler location
324
Enterprise Standard
Remove and Replace Actives and Passives

In the upgrade process active and passive equipment may be changed based on the
design requirements. See section 15.9 Equipment Reconciliation and Disposition for
disposal and recycling recommendations.
• Prior to splicing deactivate the AC Voltage on all coaxial cable by either removing
fuses in the power inserter, node or amplifier or turn the power circuit breaker off at
the power supply and turn the battery switch to off. If the battery switch is left on,
the inverter will continue to run supplying network power until the batteries are
depleted.
• If equipment removal is required, remove existing actives, taps and passive
equipment and replace with the designed equipment values.
• To eliminate damage, lower the old equipment to the ground carefully.
o DO NOT drop the equipment to the ground.
o DO NOT physically carry the equipment to the ground.
• When having to resplice equipment into the network, rescore all coaxial cable ends
using the proper cable preparation tool.
• Removed equipment MUST be returned to a Comcast designated location dally for
repurposing or disposal.
Deactivation and Removal of Old Power Supplies

Every effort MUST be made to maintain the power supply location to power the new plant.
Deactivating a current power supply location MUST be done as a last resort.
Verify which power supplies require removal. When an area is redesigned and the power
supply MUST be removed, notify the power company to disconnect the power supplies
prior to removing the physical power supply cabinet whether aerial or underground. The
power supply location MUST be deactivated.
Deactivate power supplies by:
• Turn off the power input circuit breaker
• Turn off the battery circuit breaker
• Input Voltage MUST be 0 Volts
• Output Voltage MUST be 0 Volts
• Removing the batteries:
o Aerial: Remove from cabinet and securely and carefully lower the battery to the
ground. Do Not Drop! When on the ground secure the battery for transport to
a designated battery facility.
o Underground: Remove from cabinet and secure the battery for transport to a
designated battery facility. Batteries can be reused or recycled.
• Ferroresonant transformer, UPS and accessories can be removed.
325
Enterprise Standard
NOTE: NEVER remove a power supply cabinet that is still connected to power.
• VERIFY THAT THE POWER SUPPLY IS PROPERLY DISCONNECTED FROM

UTILITY POWER BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO REMOVE THE CABINET OR
ASSOCIATED HARDWARE!!
• EXTREME CARE MUST BE EXERCISED WHEN REMOVING THE
WEATHERHEAD AND RISER FROM THE POLE. DO NOT ALLOW THEM TO
COME IN CONTACT WITH THE ACTIVE POWER.
• Carefully remove the power supply cabinet.
• Perform proper site restoration when removing an underground power supply.
Equipment Reconciliation and Disposition

Since construction and activation personnel should be the last people to work on the
network, they MUST perform any cleanup at this time. Verify the work will meet all
ordinances and regulations that are currently in place or meet the requirements of the
• Decide well in advance how to reconcile or reclaim all scrap materials.
• Make prior arrangements for the disposition of removed materials.
CLI Compliance
Maintain the "Cumulative leakage index" throughout the upgrade. Test for and correct all
signal leakage. Refer to signal leakage testing guidance.
326
Enterprise Standard
16. Coaxial Construction Inspection and Plant Acceptance

Coaxial plant construction is a significant component of the Comcast network build. The
purpose of this section is to provide guidance for the construction acceptance of the
Comcast network. Following the completion of all plant construction activity, the system
shall be activated, aligned, performance certified following Comcast standard procedures.
To build a robust, reliable and long-life network in an efficient and effective manner, the
system MUST follow the strategies outlined in this coaxial construction manual and other
Comcast documents that are pertinent to the build.
A determination of compliance MUST be made during and following the network
construction process. Construction inspection and acceptance guidelines MUST be used
to ensure the plant has been constructed to the Comcast standards and the construction
will provide a long-life network.
Construction Inspection and Plant Acceptance Specification

Summary
Comcast coaxial network construction is considered complete when the following criteria
are met:
• At a minimum, 10% of the plant MUST be physically inspected by an authorized
Comcast employee to determine that the construction practices are correct, and the
plant meets all Comcast requirements and those of Federal, State, Local and facility
owner / joint user requirements and pertinent NESC and NEC codes.
• During the construction process it is expected of the business partner to inspect
100% of the plant for compliance and completion prior to submitting invoices for the
work.
• The plant will meet all physical performance requirements.
o Grounding and bonding of the coaxial network.
o Cable placement appearance including expansion loops, bends and vertical
transitions at the pole.
• No kinks
• Cables MUST be straight within the confinement of the lashing wire. Coaxial
transitions along the span should not be noticeable under the lashing wire.
• No 180⁰ loops are allowed in the network.
o Crossovers are placed as per specification.
o All hardware is placed as required, including hanger brackets.
o Clearance and separation from joint users aerial and sub-surface.
o Cable protection at poles and risers.
o Cable strapping and lashing.
o Actives have been placed at the correct location as per the design.
327
Enterprise Standard
o Connector environmental protection is secure (boots).

o Power supply locations are accessible and secure.
Physical Plant Inspection and Acceptance

The physical plant quality control (QC) and inspection for acceptance is aligned with the
construction manual as aerial and underground. Each require a specific set of acceptance
criteria.
Aerial Physical Plant Inspection

• Clearances as per NESC 2017, federal, state, local ordinances, joint user
requirements. Meets separation from joint users on the pole line.
• Strand / Anchoring are in place and meet the design specifications
o Correct hardware has been used for the aerial cable used. Strand support vs
self-support cable.
o Down-guys and anchors are in place as designed. None are missing.
o Anchor Guards are in place.
16.2.1.1 Bonding and Grounding

Bonding and grounding of the plant will comply with Comcast bonding and grounding
specifications, NESC and NEC standards, federal, state and local ordinances and facility
owner / joint user requirements.
• 1st, last and 10th pole in a run at a minimum.
• Bonding at every vertical ground wire.
• Bonding at the down guy anchor locations.
• Bonding at every active location.
• Bonding at every power supply location.
16.2.1.2 Cable Placement

Coaxial cabling MUST be placed as defined in section 10. Any discrepancies found MUST
be corrected.
Strand Supported Cable
• Cable is lashed to the strand as described in section 10
• Correct number and sizes of cables are placed.
• Bends and corners are placed as specified.
• Expansion loops are placed as specified.
• Lashing wire clamps, spacers and cable guards are placed as specified.
328
Enterprise Standard
Self-Support Cable
• Cable is placed as described section 11.
• Correct size of cable is placed.
• Bends and corners are placed as specified.
• Expansion loops are placed as specified.
• Spacers and cable guards are placed as specified.
16.2.1.3 Active and Passive Equipment Housings

Active and passive equipment MUST be placed as per the design. Any splice location or
configuration changes will have been approved as per the construction manual.
• Node housings are placed at the designed location.
• Amplifier housings are placed at the designed location.
• Power supplies are placed at the designed location.
• Passives are placed at the designed location.
• If required, hanger brackets are used as specified.
16.2.1.4 Aerial Environmental Protection

Aerial environmental protection MUST be used on all hardline connectors, splices and
adaptors. The protection is provided by a heat shrink or air shrink boot, or self-adhesive
tape (Bishops-tape). All connectors MUST have a shrink boot applied or self-adhesive
tape.
• If heat shrink is used, see section 13.4.4.1 for specific application requirements.
• If air shrink is used, see section 13.4.4.2 for specific application requirements.
• If using self-adhesive tape, see section 13.4.4.3 for specific application
requirements.
Underground Physical Plant Inspection

• Underground clearances or separation as per NESC 2017, federal, state, local
ordinances, facility owner / joint user requirements.
o Meets separation from joint trench or easement facilities.
o Facilities break ground level at the designated locations.
o Appropriate pedestals, cabinets or vaults are placed.
• Meets facility depth requirements.
329
Enterprise Standard
16.2.2.1 Conduit
PVC or a galvanized steel duct is placed as designed.
• Correct conduit size has been placed.
• Meets the depth requirements of the project.
• Innerduct is placed as designed. This includes Cable-in-Conduit.
16.2.2.2 Cable Placement

Cable is placed in duct or innerduct as per the design. Direct bury cable construction is
not used.
• Correct cable size has been placed as per the design.
• Correct number of cables are placed in the duct.
• Duct fill is not exceeded.
16.2.2.3 Riser locations

Risers are placed as per the design.
• Correct placement and secured to structure, pole or building, etc.
• Riser stand-offs used and placed correctly
o Wooden pole, is climbing space preserved
o Steel or other material are standoffs placed and anchored correct.
• U-Guard is properly sized and mounted for the application.
• Environmental protection, is the open end of the conduit sealed?
• Riser guard used as specified.
• Riser Protection in place
o Steel Plates as designed and specified.
o Bollards as designed and specified.
16.2.2.4 Equipment Protective Covering

Pedestals, cabinets, vaults and manholes are placed as per the design.
16.2.2.4.1 Pedestals
• Correct placement
• Correct size
330
Enterprise Standard
16.2.2.4.2 Cabinets
• Correct size for the location and purpose
• Correct thermal dissipation capability for equipment placement
• Concrete slab for power supply
• Is there adequate access to the cabinet for maintenance
16.2.2.4.3 Vaults
• Correct vault for the specified use, service, equipment, splicing and connectivity
• Appropriate placement and location
• Adequate access to the vault
16.2.2.4.4 Manhole
• Equipment placed in joint use environment
• Equipment placed in Comcast owned facility
16.2.2.5 Bonding and Grounding

• Bonding and grounding at every riser to a vertical ground wire
• Bonding and grounding at every active location
• Bonding and grounding at every power supply location
16.2.2.6 Underground Hardline Connector Environmental Protection

Aerial environmental protection MUST be used on all hardline connectors, splices and
adaptors. The protection is provided by a heat shrink or air shrink boot, or self-adhesive
tape (Bishops-tape). All connectors MUST have a shrink boot applied or self-adhesive
tape.
• If heat shrink is used, see section 13.4.4.1 for specific application requirements.
• If air shrink is used, see section 13.4.4.2 for specific application requirements.
• If using self-adhesive tape, see section 13.4.4.3 for specific application
requirements.
As-Built (Red-Lining)
A plant as-built is critical. When the physical coaxial plant is complete and the
performance testing is accepted, any changes to the physical plant design are then
entered into the construction documentation on Spatialnet.
Note: The base plant data obtained from the as-built MUST be correct.
331
Enterprise Standard
Through Spatialnet, all plant design information is transitioned to user interfaces such as
Watchtower. The interfaces show the plant design and physical layout to Comcast
personnel for performance tests and troubleshooting.
The as-built MUST include the following:
• Footages between every pole span
• Types of cables that have been placed
• Directional coupler and splitter values and location
• Tap values, plug-in accessories, changes to the design based on specific location
issues.
• Power supply location and parameters
• Active type and location and parameters
Construction Inspection and Documentation:

• Collection of the as-built documentation, electronic preferred.
o Check for completeness and accuracy of the build.
o Review of the documentation for obvious failures.
• Documentation by digital photos.
• Document the construction errors in writing.
• Presenting a recommendation for unconditional acceptance or qualified acceptance
• Unconditional Acceptance: Network construction and performance are compliant
• Qualified Acceptance: Network construction and performance are non-compliant
and MUST be corrected.
• Completion of the report.
• Securing approval of the recommendation to accept the plant construction.
Closing Activity for Unconditional Acceptance:

• Distribution of the (data) report performed by the quality acceptance team
• Pass plant and plant performance acceptance information to the construction
management team, Regional, Division and Corporate CONNECT Engineering
when coaxial construction and turn-up of a node area is determined to be complete.
Follow-up Activity for Qualified Acceptance:

• Eliminating deficiencies as indicated in the quality acceptance test report.
• Repeat acceptance testing for the deficiencies corrected and other possible
affected parameters.
332
Enterprise Standard
• Proceed with closing activities for unconditional acceptance if the result of the retest
is positive.
333
Enterprise Standard
17. Comcast Network Construction Waivers

Deviations and Waivers
Specifications and configurations referenced in this document are the Comcast standard,
and MAY not be modified in their implementation. A situation requiring modification to
these specifications, or where their implementation may not result in deployment of a cost-
effective solution, MUST be brought to the attention of the Division and Corporate
CONNECT Construction and Engineering. Deviation from the standards prescribed in this
document shall require approval by Comcast CONNECT Engineering. (Copied from
section 1.4.) Granting of waivers can be from CONNECT Construction.
Granting of a Waiver
A waiver to the construction specification may be granted by Comcast CONNECT
Construction or Engineering if the change is the result of a situation requiring modification
to these specifications, or where their implementation may not result in the deployment of
a cost-effective solution. All construction waiver requests MUST be submitted to Comcast
CONNECT Region Construction for review. Dependent upon the description within the
waiver request, the decision may require Comcast Corporate CONNECT Construction or
Engineering consideration.
Specifications that should not be waived and may require additional engineering to comply
are associated with:
• Nationally accepted requirements NESC, NEC, OSHA, etc. NESC and NEC may
be adopted within the state or local codes.
• Jurisdictions having authority (JHA) whose specifications should not be waived by
Comcast Construction. If a waiver is required, it MUST be requested through the
JHA. Comcast CONNECT Corporate Construction MUST be in the loop on these
types of waiver request and should be consulted prior to the waiver request of the
JHA.
• Easement and pole owners where a required specification cannot be met. If a
waiver is required, it MUST be requested through the easement or pole owner.
Comcast CONNECT Corporate Construction MUST be in the loop on these types
of waiver request and MUST be consulted prior to making the waiver request of the
• In practice, Comcast construction specifications MUST NOT be waived by Comcast
Construction or Engineering. If a waiver is required it MUST be requested through
Comcast Local System Construction who MUST define the issue and suggest an
alternate solution that complies with National, State, City, JHA, or easement or
structure owner specifications. Regional and Division Engineering will review and
may approve the waiver request. Comcast CONNECT Corporate Construction and
Engineering MUST be in the loop on these types of waiver request and may be
consulted prior to making the waiver request.
Origination of a Waiver Request
334
Enterprise Standard
The originator of a waiver request can be an entity that has recognized that the
specification cannot be met due to obstacles or circumstances encountered during
construction.
An example is a conduit run that cannot be buried at 24” to the top of the conduit. A rock
obstacle or soil conditions may prohibit the conduit from being placed at the depth
specification. A waiver MAY be requested by:
• A business partner cannot comply with the construction specification. A local
construction specialist MUST prepare a waiver and submit to the local Construction
Supervisor or Manager. The waiver request and supporting material MUST be
scanned and attached to an e-mail and submitted to the Regional Construction
Director.
• The Regional Construction Director will approve or deny the waiver request within
five working days. The resolution of the waiver MUST be returned as an e-mail to
the local system with associated documents.
Required within a Waiver Request:
• Who is making the waiver request?
• Identify the specification from the Coaxial Construction Standard that cannot be
complied with.
• A detailed explanation of why the specification cannot be met.
• A detailed explanation of the construction change required.
• What is the impact if the waiver request is denied?
o Is there another solution that will meet the specification?
o Will the alternate solution require a design change?
o Will the plant be deemed unserviceable?
• What is the term of the waiver:
o Temporary. Until circumstances change that the project can be completed
meeting the specification. A due date MUST be specified for the completion of
the corrective measures.
o Permanent. There is no alternate solution.
• All waivers will be placed in a searchable database associated with the system and
project.
• All waivers MUST be acknowledged through a local Construction Director or
Supervisor.
The following is an example of a Comcast Construction underground waiver form.
335
Enterprise Standard
COMCAST CONSTRUCTION WAIVER FORM

Application for Waiver of Aerial Construction Specification
Job Address Job#

City (Job # from P2)
State
System
Region
Why is the Waiver Required? (Describe the reason for the waiver request. )
Additional Details COMMENTS

A digram showing the issue
Map information showing the plant
Photo
Proposed Solution
Other
Relevent material attached for request
Are additional waivers required from governing
authorities and joint users?
Waiver Request Submitted By Name:

Signature:
Title:
Company:
Address:
Contact # Date:
As the Business Partner or Construction Representative described in this application, I declare that the foregoing statements herein
contained and the information herewith submitted are in all respects true and correct to the best of my knowledge and belief.
FOR OFFICE USE ONLY

Approved Disapproved
Administrative Approval
Comcast Approving Authority (Corporate, Division, Region)

Comcast Regional Construction Director Name:
Title:
Date:
Field Checked Name:

Title:
Date:
Figure 17-1: Comcast Waiver Request Form
336
Enterprise Standard
18. Resources Used in the Document

Multiple documents were used in this standard to create the basis on which Comcast will
construct and in extension maintain the coaxial plant.
Construction and Standards References

TCI Engineering, 1996, TCI Construction Manual, TS-PHYS-9610002,
Telecommunications Inc.
Comcast Southeast Construction, (No date cited), Southeast Region Construction Manual
1, Comcast Construction Department, 85 East Belcher Road, Foxboro, MA 02035
IEEE / ANSI, 2016, 2017 National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) C2-2017, Institute of
Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc, (IEEE) American National Standards Institute
(ANSI)
Hi-Line Engineering, 2017, Application Guide for 2017 NESC Table 232-1, Clearance
Charts, Hi-Line Engineering / GDS Associates, https://www.gdsassociates.com/wp-
content/uploads/2017/07/NESC-2017-Clearance-Charts.pdf
Hi-Line Engineering, 2014, Pole Guying More Complicated Than Meets the Eye, Jason
Settle, P.E. NRECA TechAdvantage 2014, https://www.techadvantage.org/wp-
content/uploads/2014/03/5B_Settle.pdf
Telcordia, 2011, The Telcordia Blue Book - Manual of Construction Procedures, Special
Report, SR-1421 Issue 5, Telcordia, 09/2011 with Revision 1, 10/2011
Media One Engineering. (No Date Cited), Construction General Requirements, Media
One Construction, Aerial Ver 1.0.rtf
Media One Engineering, (No date cited), Support Strand Installation, Media One,
Support Strand Installation practices.doc
CommScope Engineering, 1976, CATV Cable Construction Manual, 2nd Edition, (No
longer available)
CommScope, (No Date Cited), Broadband Applications & Construction Manual, Trunk
and Distribution, CommScope, Trunk_Distribution_Const_Manual_II-106549.pdf,
Broadband Resource Center, https://www.commscope.com/solutions/hfc-access
TFC / ABS Engineering, 1996, Construction Manual Semiflexible Coaxial Cable
Guidelines, Times Fiber Communications, Inc. Division of Amphenol Broadband
Solutions, www.timesfiber.com
TFC / ABS Engineering, 1995, The Cable Book II, Times, Technical Note: s, Times
Fiber Communications, Inc. Division of Amphenol Broadband Solutions,
www.timesfiber.com
337
Enterprise Standard
B. D. Garrett, Superior Continental Corporation, 1973, The Design of Expansion Loops

for Reducing Fatigue in Coaxial Cable Installations, Superior Continental Corporation
R&D, Hickory NC, NCTA Technical Papers 1973,
https://www.nctatechnicalpapers.com/Paper/1973/1973-the-design-of-expansion-loops-
for-reducing-fatigue-in-coaxial-cable-installations
Federal Highway Administration, 2009, Manual on Uniform Traffic Control devices for
streets and Highways 2009 Edition, U.S. Department of Transportation, Federal
Highway Administration, https://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov/pdfs/2009/mutcd2009edition.pdf
USDA Rural Development Publications, Regulations and Guidelines,
https://www.rd.usda.gov/publications/regulations-
guidelines/bulletins/telecommunications
Rural Utilities Service, (RUS), 2001, Specifications and Drawings for Construction of
Aerial Plant, Bulletin, 1735F-152, United States Department of Agriculture, Rural Utilities
Service, (RUS), https://www.rd.usda.gov/files/UTP_Bulletins_1753F-152.pdf
Rural Utilities Service, (RUS), 1996, Aerial Plant Construction, Bulletin 1751F-635,
United States Department of Agriculture, Rural Utilities Service, (RUS), 06/1996
https://www.rd.usda.gov/files/UTP_Bulletins_1751F-635.pdf
Rural Utilities Service, (RUS), 1996, Aerial Plant Guying and Anchoring, Bulletin 1751F-
650, United States Department of Agriculture, Rural Utilities Service, (RUS),
Rural Utilities Service, (RUS), 1995, Construction of Buried Plant, Bulletin, 1751F-64,
United States Department of Agriculture, Rural Utilities Service, (RUS), 06/1995,
Poly/Chem Instruction, (No date cited), Video, Air-shrink, Contech Systems Inc.
https://www.contechsystems.net, https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Jt7AkmBLBQs
Multicom Inc. 2017, Heat Shrink Tubing Instructions for Use, www.multicominc.com
https://www.multicominc.com/wp-content/uploads/M-HST-1500-Heat-Shrink-Tubing-
Instructions1.pdf
CablePrep, 2015, Cable Prep Tools for Hardline Applications Users Guide, CablePrep,
https://www.cableprep.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/12/Hard-Line-Tool-User-Guide.pdf
https://www.youtube.com/user/CablePrep/videos
SCTE Engineering Interface Practices Subcommittee, 2016, ANSI / SCTE 15 2016
Specification for Trunk, Feeder and Distribution Coaxial Cable, www.scte.org.
Specification for 5/8-24 Plug, (Male) Trunk and Distribution Connectors, www.scte.org.
Specification for 5/8-24 RF & AC Equipment Port, Female, 2015, www.scte.org.
338
Enterprise Standard
SCTE ISBE Standards, Interface Practices Subcommittee, 2019, SCTE 156 2019
Specification for Mainline Plug (Male) to Cable Interface, www.scte.org
PPC, 2015, Hardline 101 Back to Basics, prepared for Comcast, 2015, www.ppc-
online.com
PPC references can be found at:

Video – PPC Hardline Coax Connectors, PPC, Connectorization overview,
https://www.ppc-online.com/hardline-coax-connectors
PPC Spec Sheets - Hardline Connectors, PPC, https://www.ppc-online.com/hardline-
connector-spec-sheets-hubdb
Corning Gilbert references can be found at:

https://www.corning.com/worldwide/en/products/communication-networks/resource-
library/search.html?productsSearchState=&resourcesSearchState=fq%3D%257B!tag%2
53Dresource_types_en_us_s%257Dresource_types_en_us_s%253A%2528%2522Stan
dard%2520Recommended%2520Procedures%2522%2529%26&relatedContentSearch
State=&initialResultType=resources&searchText=&
Trunk and Distribution Connectors, GRS 3 Piece Installation Guide, 2007 Corning
Gilbert Inc G-1400-029 05/07,
https://www.corning.com/catalog/coc/documents/standard-recommended-procedures/G-
1400-029-AEN.pdf
Trunk and Distribution Connectors, G2 2® Piece, QR Series Installation Guide, 2008,
Corning Gilbert, G-1400-636 11/08,
1400-636-AEN.pdf
GRS Series Installation Guide CommScope P-III® Cables (412, 500, 625, 750, 875,
1000), 13/2002, Corning Gilbert, G-1400-240 03/02,
1400-240-AEN.pdf
Trunk and Distribution Connectors, G2QTM 2 Piece Installation Guide, 2009, Corning
Gilbert, G-1400-726 10/09, https://www.corning.com/catalog/coc/documents/standard-
recommended-procedures/G-1400-726-AEN.pdf
Trunk and Distribution Adaptors, 90⁰ Socket Contact Installation Guide, 10/2011,
1400-574-AEN.pdf
339
Enterprise Standard
Trunk and Distribution Adaptors, 180⁰ Socket Contact Installation Guide, 10/2011,
1400-576-AEN.pdf
Trunk and Distribution Adaptors, Housing to Housing, Locking, Rotational Adapters
Installation Guide, 2011, Corning Gilbert, G-1400-524 10/2011,
1400-524-AEN.pdf
Trunk & Distribution Adapters Housing to Housing, Sealed Locking, Rotational Adapters
Installation Guide, 10/2010, Corning Gilbert, G-1400-525 10/10,
1400-525-AEN.pdf
Corning Gilbert Contact Adaptor Installations Instructions for Pedestal Splice Socket,
2008, Corning Gilbert, G-1400-575 05/08,
1400-575-AEN.pdf
Lemco Catalog Splicing Tools, Lemco Tool, http://www.lemco-
tool.com/PDF/LEMCOTEXT.pdf (Reference to construction and splicing tools)
Sub-surface / Underground References

TCI Construction Manual, 1996, Underground Construction, Section 13, TS-PHYS-
9610002, 10/01/1996
Media One, (No date), Underground Specifications, Media One Network Standards
Manual, Ver. 1.0
Telcordia, 2011, The Telcordia Blue Book – Manual of Construction Procedures, Special
Report SR-1421, Issue 5, September 2011.
Plastic Pipe Institute, 2009, Handbook of Polyethylene Pipe, Chapter 7 and Chapter 14
OSHA, 2015, Trenching and Excavation Safety, 2015, OSHA 2226-10R, Occupational
Safety and Health Administration, (OSHA) www.osha.gov
OSHA, 1926.1204 – Permit-required confined space program, OSHA, 1926 Subpart AA
OSHA 2018, Avoiding Underground Utilities during Horizontal Drilling Operations, Safety
and Health Information Bulletin, SHIB 03-13-2018,
https://www.osha.gov/dts/shib031318.pdf
OSHA, (No Date) Construction Industry Regulations, 29 Code of Federal Regulations,
1926, Subpart P, Excavation Standard,
Plastic Pipe Institute, 2009, Plastic Pipe Institute® Handbook of Polyethylene Pipe,
http://www.performancepipe.com/en-us/Documents/PPI%20Handbook.pdf
340
Enterprise Standard
Dura-Line, 2013, HDPE Conduit and Innerduct for Outside Plant, issue 1, 09/2013,
www.duraline.com
Dura-Line, (No date cited), HDPE Installation Guide, dura line, www.duraline.com
Dura-Line, 2017, FuturePath® Flex Installation Recommendations, Technical Bulletin,
DCEB-17004, 04/2017, www.duraline.com
Dura-Line, 2009, FuturePath® User’s Guide and Installation Manual, Technical Bulletin,
Dura-Line, 2013, Conduit Handling Procedures for Field Forces, Technical Bulletin,
Dura-Line, 2012, HDPE Benefits as Compared to PVC Conduit, Technical Bulletin:
DCEB-98008, Issue: F, 05/2012, www.duraline.com
Dura-Line, 2009, Recommended Procedures for Splicing and Bonding Armored
FuturePath, Technical Bulletin: DCEB-09003 Issue: A, 11/10/2009
Dura-Line HDPE Conduit and Innerduct for Outside Plant, Issue 1, 9/1/2013
Allied Tube & Conduit, 2014, Rigid PVC Conduit & Fittings, www.alliiedeg.com,
http://www.alliedeg.us/wp-content/uploads/2014/09/pvc-fittings.pdf
CommScope, 2007, Broadband Applications & Construction Manual, Con♦, Quest’
Conduit Products, Conduit_Const_Manual_CO-107146.pdf,
https://www.commscope.com/Product-Catalog/Cable-Management/Product/Empty-
Conduit
Armorcast Products Company, 2017, Product Information Installation Guidelines,
http://www.armorcastprod.com/downloads/2018-Revised-Armorcast-2017-Company-
Catalog.pdf
Charles Telecommunications Group, 2005, Buried Cable Pedestal Installation
Instructions, Section CPL-BDS-801,
http://www.charlesindustries.com/download/Copper_Enclosures_in_PDF/LTCPL-BDS-
801.pdf
MARC, 2003, Potholing Practice, 2003, Damage Prevention Practice,
http://www.marc.org/Government/Local-Government-Services/pdf/Potholing.html
Times Fiber Communications, 1996, Flooding Compounds for CATV Cable, Technical
Note: / 1028-A, Construction Manual, Times Fiber Communications, Inc, April 1996
Times Fiber Communications, 1996, Pulling Coax Cables In Conduit, Technical Note: /
1029-A, Construction Manual, Times Fiber Communications, Inc, April 1996
IEEE NESC, 2017, National Electrical Safety Code, C2-2017, 26 April 2017, Institute of
Electrical and Electronic Engineers, Inc.
341
Enterprise Standard
Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Construction Industry Regulations, 29

Code of Federal Regulations, 1926, Subpart P, Excavation Standard, OSHA.
342

Comcast Standard

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Comcast Standard

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Comcast Standard

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Comcast Outside Plant Coaxial Cable

Audience: National, Divisional, Regional and System personnel involved in, or

Document Owner: Frank Eichenlaub

Standards Writer: Alan Baumgartner

Release Version: 1.3 Release Date: 04/06/2022

Review Cycle: 1 year Next Review Date: 04/10/2023

Portal Link: Standards Portal

Approvals: Thomas Bach, SVP, Engineering

Frank Eichenlaub, Executive Director, Access Engineering

Copyright © 2022 Comcast Cable Communications LLC, All Rights Reserved

Comcast Proprietary and Confidential

DOCUMENT CHANGE HISTORY

DETAILED CHANGE LOG

Document Revision: 001.2

Document Revision: 001.3

4. Tools and Equipment ............................................................................................. 13

Aerial Cable Grounding ........................................................................ 38

Wood Pole Hardware ........................................................................... 65

Double Framed Double Dead end ........................................................ 89

Lashing Coaxial Cable ........................................................................ 111

Prelashing Cable Placement Methods ................................................ 132

Web Removal ..................................................................................... 156

Flexible Conduit: ................................................................................. 173

12.5.2.3.3 Vacuum Excavation .................................................................. 185

12.7.2.2.4.3 Battery Vaults (Do NOT Use) ................................................ 203

12.8.4.1 Bridge Expansion and Contraction .................................................. 224

12.9.5.5 Pull Plow ......................................................................................... 246

Dynamometers ................................................................................... 258

13.4.4.3 Self-Fusing or Self-Adhesive Tape .................................................. 280

13.6.2.6 xNet Network Power Transition Between Nodes ............................. 306

16. Coaxial Construction Inspection and Plant Acceptance ................................... 327

Table 12-7: Underground Armored/Unarmored Cable ................................................. 217

Figure 9-4: Opposite Pole Side Clearance .................................................................... 65

Figure 9-34: Strand Vise or Automatic Deadend. .......................................................... 86

Figure 10-7: Straight Line Non-Wood Pole Construction ............................................. 117

Figure 11-11: Pole Blocks ........................................................................................... 157

Figure 12-23: Underground to Aerial Riser Transition at an Active .............................. 213

Figure 12-53: Directional Bore ..................................................................................... 249

Figure 13-21: Actives Pedestal.................................................................................... 301

811 Call before you dig number

N+0 HFC mid-split or sub-split node only no additional amplification

Scope of this Standard

Updates and Changes

Table 1-1: Conformance Notation

NOT Word indicates a negative usage or coverage of a specific topic or is a

Word is used to express condition, obligation, propriety, or expediency.

Phrase means that there may exist valid reasons in particular

2. Regulations and Codes

• OSHA Safety and Health Standards applies to work in telecommunications centers

National Regulation and Code Availability

The generally applicable OSHA standards are found in:

OSHA Standards Section 1910.268

Purpose of Section 1910.268

Scope of Section 1910.268

National Electric Safety Code (NESC)

Table 3-1: Clearances

1. Track rails of railroads (except

2. Roads, streets, and other areas

3. Driveways, parking lots, and alleys 16.0 feet